Professional Documents
Culture Documents
User Guide
Version 10.1
2007 PCI Geomatics Enterprises Inc.. All rights reserved. COPYRIGHT NOTICE Software copyrighted by PCI Geomatics, 50 West Wilmot St., Suite 200, Richmond Hill, ON CANADA L4B 1M5 Telephone number: (905) 764-0614 RESTRICTED RIGHTS Canadian Government Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in DSS 9400-18 "General Conditions - Short Form - Licensed Software". U.S. Government Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions set forth in subparagraph (b)(3) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause of DFARS 252.227-7013 or subparagraph (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights clause at 48 CFR 52.227-19 as amended, or any successor regulations thereto. PCI, PCI Geomatics, PCI and design (logo), Geomatica, Committed to GeoIntelligence Solutions, GeoGateway, FLY!, OrthoEngine, RADARSOFT, EASI/PACE, ImageWorks, GCPWorks, PCI Author, PCI Visual Modeler, and SPANS are registered trademarks of PCI Geomatics Enterprises, Inc. Sentinel is a registered trademark of SafeNet, Inc. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Geomatica Focus
Table of Contents
Using the Focus online help ................................................................................................................................................................ 23 Using technical references ........................................................................................................................................................... 23 Using the GDB formats reference ................................................................................................................................................ 23 Working with Focus .............................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Opening a file ................................................................................................................................................................................. 25 Adding data to a project ................................................................................................................................................................ 26 Using the Add Layer wizard .......................................................................................................................................................... 26 Understanding the Focus control pane ....................................................................................................................................... 27 Using the Maps and Files trees .................................................................................................................................................... 28 Changing the layer priority........................................................................................................................................................ 28 Viewing layer properties............................................................................................................................................................ 28 Viewing auxiliary data............................................................................................................................................................... 28 Adding image channels............................................................................................................................................................. 29 Combining layers ........................................................................................................................................................................... 30 About the Combined Layer dialog box...................................................................................................................................... 30 About the Select Layer dialog box............................................................................................................................................ 31 Working with project files ............................................................................................................................................................. 31 Saving a project........................................................................................................................................................................ 31 Using the Layer Manager .............................................................................................................................................................. 31 Changing layer properties......................................................................................................................................................... 32 Using the Zoom Scale Active feature........................................................................................................................................ 33 About rotated rasters .....................................................................................................................................................................34 Managing data properties ............................................................................................................................................................. 35 About the Map Properties dialog box .......................................................................................................................................... 35 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 35 Page Setup tab......................................................................................................................................................................... 36 Default RST tab........................................................................................................................................................................ 37 About the Area Properties dialog box ..........................................................................................................................................37 General tab ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 37 Layout tab ....................................................................................................................................................................................... 38 Projection/Extents tab ................................................................................................................................................................... 38 Using a math model with images ................................................................................................................................................. 40 Using the math model for georeferencing ...................................................................................................................................41
PCI Geomatics i
Geomatica Focus
About the Math Model Area Properties dialog box .....................................................................................................................42 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 42 Layout tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 42 Projection/Extents tab............................................................................................................................................................... 43 About the RGB Layer Properties dialog box ............................................................................................................................... 44 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 44 Source Images tab.................................................................................................................................................................... 45 Source LUTs tab....................................................................................................................................................................... 46 Display tab................................................................................................................................................................................ 46 Display within Zoom Scale tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 47 About the Grayscale Layer Properties dialog box..................................................................................................................... 47 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 48 Source Images tab.................................................................................................................................................................... 48 Source LUTs tab....................................................................................................................................................................... 48 Display tab................................................................................................................................................................................ 49 Display within Zoom Scale tab.................................................................................................................................................. 49 Labels tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 50 About the PCT Layer Properties dialog box ................................................................................................................................50 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 50 Source Image tab...................................................................................................................................................................... 50 Display tab................................................................................................................................................................................ 51 Display within Zoom Scale tab.................................................................................................................................................. 51 Labels tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 51 About the Bitmap Layer Properties dialog box ...........................................................................................................................52 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 52 Source Images tab.................................................................................................................................................................... 52 Display tab................................................................................................................................................................................ 53 Display within Zoom Scale tab.................................................................................................................................................. 53 About the Vector Layer Properties dialog box ............................................................................................................................53 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 53 Display within Zoom Scale tab.................................................................................................................................................. 54 Labels tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 54 About the Thematic Layer Properties dialog box ....................................................................................................................... 54 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 54 Display tab ................................................................................................................................................................................ 55 Display within Zoom Scale tab.................................................................................................................................................. 55 Labels tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 55 About the RST Properties dialog box .......................................................................................................................................... 55 About the Modify dialog box...................................................................................................................................................... 56 About the Symbol Properties dialog box .....................................................................................................................................56 Using the File Properties dialog box ............................................................................................................................................57
PCI Geomatics ii
Geomatica Focus
About the Bitmap Properties dialog box ..................................................................................................................................... 57 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 57 History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 57 MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 57 About the File Properties dialog box ........................................................................................................................................... 58 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 58 History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 59 MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 59 Projection tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 59 About the Ground Control Points dialog box ..............................................................................................................................61 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 61 History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 61 MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 62 About the Look-up Table Properties dialog box ......................................................................................................................... 62 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 62 History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 63 MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 63 About the Orbit Properties dialog box ......................................................................................................................................... 63 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 63 History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 64 MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 64 About the Pseudo-color table properties .................................................................................................................................... 64 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 64 History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 65 MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 65 About the Raster Properties dialog box ...................................................................................................................................... 65 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 65 History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 66 MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 66 About the Signatures Properties dialog box ............................................................................................................................... 67 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 67 History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 67 MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 67 About the Text Properties dialog box .......................................................................................................................................... 68 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 68 History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 68 MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 68 About the Vector Properties dialog box ...................................................................................................................................... 69 General tab............................................................................................................................................................................... 69 History tab................................................................................................................................................................................. 70 MetaData tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 70
Geomatica Focus
Projection tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 70 About the Other Projections dialog box.................................................................................................................................... 71 Color mapping and image profiles ............................................................................................................................................... 71 About the RGB Mapping dialog box.......................................................................................................................................... 71 Creating an image profile.......................................................................................................................................................... 72 About the Profile Table dialog box............................................................................................................................................ 72 About the Profile Options dialog box......................................................................................................................................... 74 About the Profile Graph dialog box........................................................................................................................................... 74 About the Graph Controls dialog box........................................................................................................................................ 76 Using the graph controls........................................................................................................................................................... 77 Exporting profiles...................................................................................................................................................................... 78 Printing your graph without showing the mensuration bars...................................................................................................... 78 Using the View tools ...................................................................................................................................................................... 78 Using the Zoom window............................................................................................................................................................ 78 Using a Clone view................................................................................................................................................................... 78 Chaining clone views................................................................................................................................................................ 79 Zooming using the Overview window....................................................................................................................................... 79 Creating named regions ................................................................................................................................................................ 79 Removing named regions......................................................................................................................................................... 80 Creating named regions using coordinates.............................................................................................................................. 80 Panning an image .......................................................................................................................................................................... 80 Zooming an image with zoom tools.......................................................................................................................................... 81 Viewing a 1:1 image resolution................................................................................................................................................. 81 Using a layout grid .........................................................................................................................................................................81 Grid spacing.............................................................................................................................................................................. 81 Index spacing............................................................................................................................................................................ 82 Visualizing your data ..................................................................................................................................................................... 82 Enhancing images.................................................................................................................................................................... 82 Using the Attribute Manager..................................................................................................................................................... 83 Importing XML metadata using the METAIN algorithm .............................................................................................................. 83 Opening an image data set ........................................................................................................................................................... 84 Viewing global metadata ............................................................................................................................................................... 84 Viewing band-specific metadata ...................................................................................................................................................85 Enabling and disabling panes ...................................................................................................................................................... 85 Changing the units for the cursor position................................................................................................................................ 85 Using the Visualization tools ........................................................................................................................................................ 85 About the Visualization Tools dialog box ....................................................................................................................................86 Using the Flicker tool................................................................................................................................................................ 86 Using the Swipe tool................................................................................................................................................................. 86 Using the Blend tool.................................................................................................................................................................. 87 Using the Loop tool................................................................................................................................................................... 88
PCI Geomatics iv
Geomatica Focus
Using the Cycle tool.................................................................................................................................................................. 89 Using the Band Cycling tool...................................................................................................................................................... 90 Opening the Thumbnails viewer ...................................................................................................................................................92 About the Thumbnails viewer.................................................................................................................................................... 92 Using the Thumbnails viewer.................................................................................................................................................... 94 Selecting grayscale and RGB layers ............................................................................................................................................95 Visualizing data with the 3-D data cube .......................................................................................................................................95 About the 3-D data cube controls............................................................................................................................................. 96 About the Select PCT Layer dialog box.................................................................................................................................... 98 Selecting colors ............................................................................................................................................................................. 99 Color palettes............................................................................................................................................................................ 99 Color models .................................................................................................................................................................................. 99 Setting options and preferences ................................................................................................................................................ 101 General interface.................................................................................................................................................................... 101 Warnings................................................................................................................................................................................. 102 Layers..................................................................................................................................................................................... 103 Default representation............................................................................................................................................................. 103 Vector editing ............................................................................................................................................................................... 104 Memory cache .............................................................................................................................................................................. 105 Optimizing the Undo/Redo options......................................................................................................................................... 106 Optimizing the tiling cache...................................................................................................................................................... 106 Setting the total cache limit..................................................................................................................................................... 107 Setting the vector read cache................................................................................................................................................. 107 Overview window ......................................................................................................................................................................... 107 Zoom window ............................................................................................................................................................................... 107 Layer Manager ..............................................................................................................................................................................107 Open GL settings ......................................................................................................................................................................... 108 Setting shape and color preferences ......................................................................................................................................... 108 Modifying a selected line......................................................................................................................................................... 108 Modifying a selected polygon.................................................................................................................................................. 109 Applying preferences to selected text..................................................................................................................................... 109 Changing the style for hatches ...................................................................................................................................................109 Changing the raster color........................................................................................................................................................ 110 Changing the raster size......................................................................................................................................................... 110 Setting up a digitizing tablet using Wintab ................................................................................................................................110 Setting up a digitizing tablet using a driver............................................................................................................................. 110 Testing the digitizing tablet connection................................................................................................................................... 111 Assigning text actions and modifiers....................................................................................................................................... 111 Setting up a GPS receiver ........................................................................................................................................................... 111 Testing the GPS connection................................................................................................................................................... 112 Measurement tools ...................................................................................................................................................................... 112
PCI Geomatics v
Geomatica Focus
Changing display options ........................................................................................................................................................... 112 About the Display Options dialog box..................................................................................................................................... 113 Customizing the Focus toolbars ................................................................................................................................................ 113 About the Toolbar Configuration dialog box............................................................................................................................ 113 Supported layer types .........................................................................................................................................................................115 Focus and raster layers ...............................................................................................................................................................115 Metadata ........................................................................................................................................................................................116 Segment organization ..................................................................................................................................................................116 Topological layers ........................................................................................................................................................................120 Arc layers................................................................................................................................................................................ 120 Node layers:............................................................................................................................................................................ 120 Area layers.............................................................................................................................................................................. 120 Representation Style Tables (RST)........................................................................................................................................ 121 Importing, linking, and translating data .....................................................................................................................................121 Importing files to the PCIDSK format...................................................................................................................................... 122 Building raster overviews........................................................................................................................................................ 123 Deleting raster overviews........................................................................................................................................................ 123 Linking PCIDSK and other databases.................................................................................................................................... 123 Translating file formats............................................................................................................................................................ 124 Importing and converting ASCII files ......................................................................................................................................... 125 Using the Import ASCII Table/Points wizard........................................................................................................................... 125 Formating fixed width files...................................................................................................................................................... 126 Opening data from a remote data source .................................................................................................................................. 126 Using undefined image data ....................................................................................................................................................... 127 Image metadata support ..............................................................................................................................................................129 Working with projections ............................................................................................................................................................ 129 Understanding PCIDSK projection definition.......................................................................................................................... 130 Supported projections............................................................................................................................................................. 130 Defining a new projection........................................................................................................................................................ 131 Defining datums and ellipsoids............................................................................................................................................... 133 Reprojecting files ......................................................................................................................................................................... 134 About the Reproject dialog box............................................................................................................................................... 134 Reprojection bounds............................................................................................................................................................... 135 Selectable layers and reprojection.......................................................................................................................................... 136 Setting reprojection bounds.................................................................................................................................................... 137 Specifying a coordinate system.............................................................................................................................................. 137 Selecting an ellipsoidal earth model .......................................................................................................................................... 137 Selecting the earth model....................................................................................................................................................... 138 Selecting the SPCS coordinate system ..................................................................................................................................... 138 Selecting a different coordinate system.................................................................................................................................. 138 Maximum bounds and resampling methods ............................................................................................................................. 138
PCI Geomatics vi
Geomatica Focus
Selecting database layers for reprojection ................................................................................................................................139 Organizing and editing layers .....................................................................................................................................................139 Adding and removing imagery................................................................................................................................................ 140 Creating a new raster layer..................................................................................................................................................... 141 Creating a new bitmap layer................................................................................................................................................... 141 Creating a new vector layer.................................................................................................................................................... 141 Setting vector layer attributes .................................................................................................................................................... 142 Setting vector layer properties ................................................................................................................................................... 142 Transferring layers .......................................................................................................................................................................143 Working with data tools ...............................................................................................................................................................144 Changing data formats ................................................................................................................................................................ 144 About the Bitmap Save As dialog box..................................................................................................................................... 144 About the Vector Save As dialog box..................................................................................................................................... 145 Selecting GDB format options................................................................................................................................................. 145 About the Grayscale Save As dialog box................................................................................................................................ 146 About the Output Layer Properties dialog box........................................................................................................................ 147 About the PCT Output Layer Properties dialog box................................................................................................................ 147 About the RST Save As dialog box......................................................................................................................................... 147 About the RGB Save As dialog box........................................................................................................................................ 148 About the PCT Save As dialog box......................................................................................................................................... 149 About the LUT Save As dialog box......................................................................................................................................... 150 Opening the Clipping/Subsetting panel .....................................................................................................................................151 Clipping and subsetting images.............................................................................................................................................. 152 Defining the clip region with user-entered coordinates ........................................................................................................... 153 Defining the clip region by selecting a file............................................................................................................................... 153 Defining the clip region by selecting a layer............................................................................................................................ 154 Defining the clip region by selecting a named region............................................................................................................. 154 Defining the clip region by selecting a script subset file.......................................................................................................... 154 Creating the text file for the Script Subset File method........................................................................................................... 155 Defining the clip region using the Zoom tools......................................................................................................................... 158 Creating multiple subset tiles.................................................................................................................................................. 158 Selecting a clip region............................................................................................................................................................. 158 Opening the Data Merge wizard ..................................................................................................................................................159 Choosing an input layer.......................................................................................................................................................... 159 Naming the output file............................................................................................................................................................. 159 Setting up output layers.......................................................................................................................................................... 160 Data Merge wizard - Set Bitmap Parameters dialog box .......................................................................................................... 161 Data Merge wizard - Set Image Parameters dialog box......................................................................................................... 161 Opening the Algorithm Librarian ....................................................................................................................................................... 163 About the Algorithm Librarian dialog box ................................................................................................................................. 163 Algorithm licensing ......................................................................................................................................................................163
Geomatica Focus
Algorithm categories ................................................................................................................................................................... 164 Algorithm sub-categories........................................................................................................................................................ 164 Finding an algorithm ....................................................................................................................................................................166 Using the Find Algorithm utility............................................................................................................................................... 166 Searching for an algorithm by category.................................................................................................................................. 167 Creating user-defined categories ............................................................................................................................................... 167 Adding algorithms to the user defined folder.......................................................................................................................... 168 Using an algorithm .......................................................................................................................................................................168 About module control panels.................................................................................................................................................. 169 Finding help topics for all algorithms ........................................................................................................................................ 170 Finding help from the Algorithm Librarian dialog box.............................................................................................................. 170 Finding help from a Module Control Panel.............................................................................................................................. 170 Working with an algorithm MCP ................................................................................................................................................. 170 Working with an example ............................................................................................................................................................ 171 Using the ASP algorithm ............................................................................................................................................................. 171 Setting up the input port.......................................................................................................................................................... 171 Setting up output ports............................................................................................................................................................ 171 Setting up input parameters.................................................................................................................................................... 172 Running the ASP algorithm..................................................................................................................................................... 172 Viewing the results ...................................................................................................................................................................... 172 Understanding the results ...........................................................................................................................................................173 Adding functions to the algorithm library ................................................................................................................................. 173 Starting a classification session ........................................................................................................................................................175 Unsupervised classification ........................................................................................................................................................175 Configuring a new classification session................................................................................................................................ 175 Initializing unsupervised classification.................................................................................................................................... 176 Reading a classification report................................................................................................................................................ 176 Supervised classification ............................................................................................................................................................ 177 The supervised classification process.................................................................................................................................... 177 Initializing a supervised classification..................................................................................................................................... 178 Specifying the reference image.............................................................................................................................................. 178 Specifying the input channels .................................................................................................................................................... 179 Training sites and ground cover ................................................................................................................................................ 180 Drawing a class training site .......................................................................................................................................................180 Making corrections.................................................................................................................................................................. 181 About the Erase Settings dialog box....................................................................................................................................... 181 Changing training site colors ..................................................................................................................................................... 181 Importing training sites ............................................................................................................................................................... 181 Importing vectors.................................................................................................................................................................... 182 Opening the Import Bitmaps dialog box ....................................................................................................................................183 About the Import Bitmaps dialog box...................................................................................................................................... 183
Geomatica Focus
Importing a specified bitmap as its training site...................................................................................................................... 183 Importing signatures from the training site editor ....................................................................................................................183 Filling polygons using the Raster Seeding function ................................................................................................................ 184 About the Raster Seeding dialog box ........................................................................................................................................ 184 Filling a polygon ...........................................................................................................................................................................185 Merging classes ........................................................................................................................................................................... 185 Analyzing training sites ...............................................................................................................................................................185 Testing signature separability .................................................................................................................................................... 186 Testing separability with a scatter plot ......................................................................................................................................186 Creating a scatter plot ................................................................................................................................................................. 187 Adjusting scatter plot threshold values................................................................................................................................... 187 Altering the view range for the X and Y axes ............................................................................................................................ 187 Exporting the scatter plot file................................................................................................................................................... 187 Displaying the color scale legend........................................................................................................................................... 187 Printing the scatter plot........................................................................................................................................................... 188 Previewing the classification ...................................................................................................................................................... 188 Setting the Maximum Likelihood classification preview.......................................................................................................... 188 Removing the preview classification from the metalayer........................................................................................................ 188 Creating a separability report.................................................................................................................................................. 188 Saving the separability report to an existing file ......................................................................................................................189 Running a supervised classification ..........................................................................................................................................189 Testing accuracy with signature statistics............................................................................................................................... 189 Viewing signature statistics..................................................................................................................................................... 190 Viewing a matrix report........................................................................................................................................................... 190 Comparing signature statistics................................................................................................................................................ 190 Saving the signature statistics report...................................................................................................................................... 190 Post-classification editing ...........................................................................................................................................................191 Improving classification results............................................................................................................................................... 191 Initialize post-classification editing.......................................................................................................................................... 191 Setting up a bitmap mask....................................................................................................................................................... 191 Opening a bitmap mask.......................................................................................................................................................... 192 Saving a bitmap mask............................................................................................................................................................. 192 Masking an image area........................................................................................................................................................... 192 Opening an aggregation session ............................................................................................................................................... 192 Opening the Aggregate dialog box in an unsupervised session............................................................................................. 193 Setting up an aggregation....................................................................................................................................................... 193 Setting up a new aggregate class........................................................................................................................................... 193 Creating an aggregate from a set of input classes................................................................................................................. 195 Changing the input and output channel assignments............................................................................................................. 195 Assigning a new PCT to the current session.......................................................................................................................... 195 Generating a PCT................................................................................................................................................................... 196
PCI Geomatics ix
Geomatica Focus
Importing a PCT...................................................................................................................................................................... 196 Saving the aggregate session................................................................................................................................................. 196 Starting an aggregate session................................................................................................................................................ 196 Importing other classes........................................................................................................................................................... 197 Setting up for class labelling ...................................................................................................................................................... 197 About the Class Labelling dialog box...................................................................................................................................... 198 Initializing classes from a classification channel..................................................................................................................... 199 Initializing classes from a text file............................................................................................................................................ 199 Launching the Accuracy Assessment dialog box.................................................................................................................... 200 Using the Accuracy Assessment dialog box ............................................................................................................................ 200 Selecting a classified image.................................................................................................................................................... 201 Selecting a reference image................................................................................................................................................... 201 Generating a random sample................................................................................................................................................. 201 Assigning a reference class to a sample................................................................................................................................ 202 Opening samples from a vector segment............................................................................................................................... 202 Launching the Accuracy Report dialog box............................................................................................................................ 202 Producing a random sample report......................................................................................................................................... 203 Producing an error report........................................................................................................................................................ 203 Producing an accuracy statistics report.................................................................................................................................. 203 Saving an accuracy report...................................................................................................................................................... 203 Information tools ................................................................................................................................................................................. 205 Opening the Information report .................................................................................................................................................. 205 Viewing information for a selected vector .................................................................................................................................205 Viewing information for vectors under the cursor ....................................................................................................................205 Showing information for raster data .......................................................................................................................................... 206 Displaying the attributes from a chart ....................................................................................................................................... 206 Specifying the units of measurement ........................................................................................................................................ 206 Selecting a Measure tool........................................................................................................................................................ 206 Measuring a line...................................................................................................................................................................... 207 Measuring a polygon............................................................................................................................................................... 207 Measuring a rectangle or ellipse............................................................................................................................................. 207 Reading the Measure tool report............................................................................................................................................ 208 Viewing histograms and statistics ............................................................................................................................................. 208 Viewing a histogram................................................................................................................................................................ 208 Viewing histogram statistics.................................................................................................................................................... 209 Viewing Mask contents........................................................................................................................................................... 209 Viewing histograms under a bitmap mask.............................................................................................................................. 210 Zooming into and out of a histogram...................................................................................................................................... 210 Printing a histogram................................................................................................................................................................ 210 Exporting a histogram............................................................................................................................................................. 210 Working with numeric values ..................................................................................................................................................... 211
PCI Geomatics x
Geomatica Focus
Opening the Numeric Values dialog box................................................................................................................................. 211 Exporting the numeric values to a text file.............................................................................................................................. 212 Change a color channel DN value.......................................................................................................................................... 212 Interpreting the values............................................................................................................................................................ 212 Making an image profile .............................................................................................................................................................. 212 Using the mensuration bars.................................................................................................................................................... 214 Selecting vector profiles.......................................................................................................................................................... 214 Using the spectra extraction tools ............................................................................................................................................. 214 Extracting spectra from a region of interest............................................................................................................................ 215 About the Spectra Extraction Configuration dialog box.......................................................................................................... 215 Configuring a hyperspectral metalayer................................................................................................................................... 215 About the Spectra Extraction dialog box................................................................................................................................. 216 Region menu ................................................................................................................................................................................ 216 Edit menu................................................................................................................................................................................ 217 Tools menu............................................................................................................................................................................. 217 Spectra extraction table.......................................................................................................................................................... 217 About the Import Vectors dialog box....................................................................................................................................... 218 About the Import Bitmaps dialog box...................................................................................................................................... 219 Merging a spectra channel ..........................................................................................................................................................220 Saving a spectral extraction.................................................................................................................................................... 220 Plotting spectra ............................................................................................................................................................................ 221 About the Spectra Plotting dialog box .......................................................................................................................................221 Radiometric quantity vs. wavelength graph............................................................................................................................ 221 Displayed spectra................................................................................................................................................................... 222 Graph options......................................................................................................................................................................... 224 Plotting ranges........................................................................................................................................................................ 224 Report..................................................................................................................................................................................... 225 Selecting a spectra library....................................................................................................................................................... 225 Changing the graph options.................................................................................................................................................... 226 Saving a spectra plot.............................................................................................................................................................. 226 Opening the DEM Editing dialog box ......................................................................................................................................... 227 Editing a DEM......................................................................................................................................................................... 227 Opening an existing mask....................................................................................................................................................... 227 Creating a mask...................................................................................................................................................................... 228 Replacing the elevation values under a mask ........................................................................................................................ 228 Filtering and interpolating DEM values................................................................................................................................... 229 Applying tool strategies for common situations in digital elevation models ........................................................................ 230 Adjusting pixel values for a lake.............................................................................................................................................. 230 Adjusting the pixel values for multiple lakes........................................................................................................................... 230 Compensating for forests and urban areas............................................................................................................................. 230 Neutralizing cloud-covered areas........................................................................................................................................... 231
PCI Geomatics xi
Geomatica Focus
Removing noise from a DEM.................................................................................................................................................. 231 Selecting the DEM layer......................................................................................................................................................... 231 Viewing the scatter plot for a layer .............................................................................................................................................232 Changing the input channel for the X and Y axes: ..................................................................................................................233 Using the Scatter Plot dialog box............................................................................................................................................ 233 Zooming into and out of a scatter plot..................................................................................................................................... 234 Using the graph controls .............................................................................................................................................................234 Changing the x and y view ranges.......................................................................................................................................... 234 Exporting a profile................................................................................................................................................................... 235 Working with legend and color controls.................................................................................................................................. 235 Interpreting a profile table ...........................................................................................................................................................235 Changing the color of a channel ................................................................................................................................................ 236 Changing the profile vector color ...............................................................................................................................................236 About the Change Color dialog box ...........................................................................................................................................237 Printing without the mensuration bars showing .......................................................................................................................237 Using the profile statistics .......................................................................................................................................................... 238 Controlling the cursor ................................................................................................................................................................. 238 Opening the GPS tool .................................................................................................................................................................. 239 Using the GPS tool................................................................................................................................................................. 239 Updating the cursor position using the GPS receiver............................................................................................................. 239 Inputting vector point data using the GPS receiver................................................................................................................. 239 Inputting vector line or polygon data using the GPS receiver................................................................................................. 240 Using the ADAPT algorithm ........................................................................................................................................................ 240 Converting RGB to pseudo-color............................................................................................................................................ 241 Converting RGB to pseudo-color............................................................................................................................................ 241 Opening the PCT Editing dialog box....................................................................................................................................... 241 Adjusting the pseudo-color for single values.......................................................................................................................... 241 Editing a value........................................................................................................................................................................ 241 Selecting a basic color value.................................................................................................................................................. 242 Customizing range-based pseudo-color tables ........................................................................................................................ 242 Using standard mode.............................................................................................................................................................. 242 Keeping the original color values............................................................................................................................................ 242 Selecting colors within the range............................................................................................................................................ 242 Applying pseudo colors to pixel values in a raster.................................................................................................................. 243 Opening the Raster Editing dialog box ......................................................................................................................................243 Specifying a value ........................................................................................................................................................................244 Changing a default enhancement ...............................................................................................................................................244 Applying a linear enhancement .................................................................................................................................................. 244 Zooming an image feature with an enhancement................................................................................................................... 245 Adjusting toolbar enhancements............................................................................................................................................. 246 Applying the Tail Trim option.................................................................................................................................................. 246
Geomatica Focus
Adjusting the amount of Tail Trim........................................................................................................................................... 246 Decreasing the image contrast............................................................................................................................................... 247 Decreasing the image brightness........................................................................................................................................... 247 Enhancing images from the shortcut menu............................................................................................................................ 247 Opening the LUT editor ............................................................................................................................................................... 247 Displaying a histogram in the LUT Editor................................................................................................................................ 248 Moving an entire histogram..................................................................................................................................................... 248 Using the LUT tools................................................................................................................................................................ 248 Using the LUT enhancement options...................................................................................................................................... 248 Trace-editing a LUT histogram............................................................................................................................................... 249 Comparing custom enhancements......................................................................................................................................... 249 Applying a new look-up table to the corresponding image plane............................................................................................ 249 Working with spatial filters ......................................................................................................................................................... 250 Opening the Filter dialog box.................................................................................................................................................. 250 Filtering under a mask............................................................................................................................................................ 251 Using low-pass filters.............................................................................................................................................................. 251 Applying a gamma filter.......................................................................................................................................................... 253 Using high-pass filters............................................................................................................................................................. 254 Creating custom filters............................................................................................................................................................ 256 Saving a filtered image to a new file....................................................................................................................................... 257 Scaling images ............................................................................................................................................................................. 257 Scaling output data using Save As......................................................................................................................................... 258 Available scaling methods...................................................................................................................................................... 258 Scaling output data................................................................................................................................................................. 259 Fusing image data ........................................................................................................................................................................260 Running the FUSE algorithm.................................................................................................................................................. 260 Running IHS and RGB............................................................................................................................................................ 263 Using the PANSHARP algorithm............................................................................................................................................ 263 Using the raster calculator ..........................................................................................................................................................265 About the raster calculator ......................................................................................................................................................... 265 Expression.............................................................................................................................................................................. 266 Edit.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 266 View........................................................................................................................................................................................ 267 Raster Calculator toolbar........................................................................................................................................................ 267 Expression.............................................................................................................................................................................. 267 Calculator keys....................................................................................................................................................................... 268 Output parameters.................................................................................................................................................................. 268 Using the Raster Calculator to set output parameters............................................................................................................ 269 Opening the EASI Modeling dialog box ..................................................................................................................................... 269 About the EASI Modeling dialog box...................................................................................................................................... 270 Adding image and bitmap layers to a .pix file......................................................................................................................... 271
Geomatica Focus
Using simple image models.................................................................................................................................................... 271 Understanding the basic modeling logic................................................................................................................................. 272 Adding a bitmap layer to irvine.pix.......................................................................................................................................... 273 Image layer variables.............................................................................................................................................................. 274 Creating an EASI bitmap mask ................................................................................................................................................... 276 Understanding atmospheric correction ............................................................................................................................................ 283 Preparing data .............................................................................................................................................................................. 283 Transfer data to PCIDSK........................................................................................................................................................ 283 Reprojecting data.................................................................................................................................................................... 284 Assembling data into a file...................................................................................................................................................... 285 Opening the Atmospheric Correction Configuration dialog box ............................................................................................ 285 Setting up atmospheric correction parameters....................................................................................................................... 286 About aerosol types .....................................................................................................................................................................287 About standard atmospheres ..................................................................................................................................................... 287 Opening the elevation information setup dialog box ............................................................................................................... 288 Calculating slope, aspect, sky view, and shadow................................................................................................................... 289 Opening the band setup dialog box ........................................................................................................................................... 289 Matching band numbers to channel numbers......................................................................................................................... 290 Opening the Solar Calculations dialog box ...............................................................................................................................290 About Solar Zenith and Azimuth............................................................................................................................................. 290 Calculating the solar zenith and azimuth................................................................................................................................ 290 About visibility ............................................................................................................................................................................. 291 About adjacency..................................................................................................................................................................... 291 Determining the offset to surface temperature value.............................................................................................................. 291 Editing an existing calibration file to create a new file .............................................................................................................292 Opening the Define Haze and Cloud dialog box ....................................................................................................................... 293 Automatically creating a mask................................................................................................................................................ 293 Importing the masks from a file............................................................................................................................................... 294 Editing the Cloud mask ............................................................................................................................................................... 294 Editing the Haze mask ................................................................................................................................................................. 294 Editing the Visibility layer ........................................................................................................................................................... 294 Opening the Run Atmospheric Correction dialog box ............................................................................................................. 294 Running the correction............................................................................................................................................................ 295 Deriving additional data from the corrected imagery.............................................................................................................. 295 Opening the Leaf Area Index Model dialog box ........................................................................................................................ 296 Selecting the equation for calculating the Leaf Area Index..................................................................................................... 297 Changing the values for the fraction of photosynthetically active radiation (FPAR) equation ............................................297 Opening the Advanced Option dialog box ................................................................................................................................ 297 Setting the parameters............................................................................................................................................................ 298 Setting the thresholds for the reference pixels .........................................................................................................................299 Opening the Empirical BRDF Correction dialog box ................................................................................................................299
Geomatica Focus
Selecting the BRDF equation.................................................................................................................................................. 300 Understanding vector layer types ..................................................................................................................................................... 301 Unstructured vector layers ......................................................................................................................................................... 301 About topological layers ............................................................................................................................................................. 301 Thematic rasters .......................................................................................................................................................................... 302 Understanding vector editing in a math model area ................................................................................................................ 302 Adding a new vector layer ...........................................................................................................................................................303 Adding points to an active layer .................................................................................................................................................303 Adding a line or a polygon to an active layer ............................................................................................................................303 Adding a rectangle or ellipse to an active layer ........................................................................................................................304 Tracing a line on an active layer .................................................................................................................................................304 Digitizing 3-D vectors .................................................................................................................................................................. 304 Performing tasks in the Attribute Manager ............................................................................................................................... 304 About the Preferences dialog box ..............................................................................................................................................305 Controlling the Attribute Manager cursor ..................................................................................................................................305 Setting a selected record statistics display .............................................................................................................................. 306 Creating an unconnected table ...................................................................................................................................................306 Restricting the layer so you cannot add shapes to it ...............................................................................................................306 Viewing records ........................................................................................................................................................................... 307 Opening a file saved as an attribute ...........................................................................................................................................307 Selecting and clearing records and fields ................................................................................................................................. 307 Understanding vector layer type default fields ......................................................................................................................... 307 Adding records to the Attribute Manager .................................................................................................................................. 309 Adding new fields ........................................................................................................................................................................ 309 Setting the field definitions ......................................................................................................................................................... 309 Changing an existing field to a geometry field ......................................................................................................................... 310 Adding all appropriate geometry fields ..................................................................................................................................... 311 Updating the geometry ................................................................................................................................................................ 311 Using find and replace in the Attribute Manager ...................................................................................................................... 311 Creating a relational database .................................................................................................................................................... 312 Selecting all records that match a value in the current cell .....................................................................................................312 Selecting all records that do not match a value in a selected field .........................................................................................313 Making a query by example ........................................................................................................................................................ 313 Limiting the query to selected records ...................................................................................................................................... 314 Using the compute function ........................................................................................................................................................314 Opening the Aggregate Attributes dialog box .......................................................................................................................... 315 Performing a calculation ............................................................................................................................................................. 315 Opening the Area Neighbors dialog box ................................................................................................................................... 315 Reporting bordering areas .......................................................................................................................................................... 315 Creating a chart from the Attribute Manager .............................................................................................................................316 Opening the Z-value Transfer dialog box .................................................................................................................................. 317
PCI Geomatics xv
Geomatica Focus
Transferring Z-values from the vertices to a field .....................................................................................................................317 Transferring Z-values from a field to the vertices .....................................................................................................................318 Exporting layer attributes to a file .............................................................................................................................................. 318 Exporting the attributes to a text file ..........................................................................................................................................318 Opening GeoRasters from the Attribute Manager .................................................................................................................... 319 Dissolving a boundary .................................................................................................................................................................319 Adding function fields to output layers ..................................................................................................................................... 320 Working with shapes ................................................................................................................................................................... 320 Selecting a single shape ............................................................................................................................................................. 321 Selecting shapes within or partially within a circle .................................................................................................................. 321 Selecting shapes within or partially within a polygon ..............................................................................................................321 Grouping shapes ..........................................................................................................................................................................321 Ungrouping shapes ..................................................................................................................................................................... 321 Attaching shapes ......................................................................................................................................................................... 322 Separating shapes ....................................................................................................................................................................... 322 Creating buffers ........................................................................................................................................................................... 322 Creating buffers - step 1 ..............................................................................................................................................................322 Creating buffers - step 2 ..............................................................................................................................................................323 Editing vectors using the vector editing tools .......................................................................................................................... 323 About the Vector Editing tool bar ...............................................................................................................................................324 Selecting a shape .........................................................................................................................................................................325 Moving a vertex ............................................................................................................................................................................ 325 Moving several vertices together while maintaining their form .............................................................................................. 325 Reversing vector direction ..........................................................................................................................................................326 Adding vertices ............................................................................................................................................................................ 326 Connecting lines .......................................................................................................................................................................... 326 Connecting polygons .................................................................................................................................................................. 326 Cutting a line ................................................................................................................................................................................ 326 Cutting a polygon .........................................................................................................................................................................327 Extending a line ............................................................................................................................................................................327 Merging segmented lines ............................................................................................................................................................ 327 Changing a line into a polygon ...................................................................................................................................................327 Flipping a shape to its mirror image .......................................................................................................................................... 327 Spinning a shape free hand ........................................................................................................................................................ 328 Spinning the shape precisely ..................................................................................................................................................... 328 Separating overlapping shapes ..................................................................................................................................................328 Moving the cursor to the start vertex .........................................................................................................................................328 Moving the cursor to the end vertex: ......................................................................................................................................... 329 Moving the cursor along vertices ...............................................................................................................................................329 Moving the cursor to a vertex ..................................................................................................................................................... 329 Displaying vertices ...................................................................................................................................................................... 329
Geomatica Focus
Adding and removing: vertices .................................................................................................................................................. 329 Switching between coordinate systems .................................................................................................................................... 330 Selecting vectors using spatial query tools .............................................................................................................................. 330 Including an original selection in a spatial query ..................................................................................................................... 330 Selecting fully contained shapes ............................................................................................................................................... 330 Selecting partially contained shapes ......................................................................................................................................... 330 Selecting all shapes within a specified distance ...................................................................................................................... 331 Selecting all shapes fully within a distance .............................................................................................................................. 331 Selecting intersecting shapes .................................................................................................................................................... 331 About the Overlay wizard ............................................................................................................................................................ 331 Combining layers with a spatial overlay ....................................................................................................................................332 Using a statistical overlay ........................................................................................................................................................... 333 Adding attributes to the statistical overlay output ................................................................................................................... 333 Using a suitability overlay ...........................................................................................................................................................334 Understanding weights in the suitability overlay ..................................................................................................................... 336 Viewing data as a chart ............................................................................................................................................................... 337 About chart types .........................................................................................................................................................................337 Creating a chart from the layer ................................................................................................................................................... 339 Defining the data to chart ............................................................................................................................................................340 About Series In .............................................................................................................................................................................340 Designing the chart surround .....................................................................................................................................................341 About the category field .............................................................................................................................................................. 342 Resetting the chart to defaults ................................................................................................................................................... 343 Using the Chart Viewer ................................................................................................................................................................343 Designing the chart legend ......................................................................................................................................................... 345 Opening the X-axis or Y-axis Properties dialog box .................................................................................................................345 Customizing the axis heading .................................................................................................................................................... 346 Customizing the axis tick labels .................................................................................................................................................346 Opening the X-axis or Y-axis Properties dialog box .................................................................................................................346 Displaying grid lines along the axis ........................................................................................................................................... 347 Displaying ticks ............................................................................................................................................................................347 Opening the Title or Subtitle Properties dialog box ................................................................................................................. 347 Customizing the title or subtitle of the chart .............................................................................................................................347 Opening the data labels properties ............................................................................................................................................ 347 Customizing the data labels ........................................................................................................................................................348 Saving a chart ...............................................................................................................................................................................348 Opening and deleting a chart ......................................................................................................................................................348 Digitizing vectors with peripheral devices ................................................................................................................................ 349 Registering a digitizing tablet ..................................................................................................................................................... 349 Importing and exporting tablet registration .............................................................................................................................. 350 Using a digitizing tablet ...............................................................................................................................................................350
Geomatica Focus
Using the GPS tool .......................................................................................................................................................................351 Inputting vector point data using a GPS receiver .....................................................................................................................351 Inputting vector line or polygon data using the GPS receiver ................................................................................................ 352 Understanding representation ....................................................................................................................................................352 Types of representation style tables ..........................................................................................................................................353 Generating an indirect representation style table .................................................................................................................... 354 Editing the representation styles ............................................................................................................................................... 354 Selecting a style ........................................................................................................................................................................... 354 Changing style appearance ........................................................................................................................................................ 355 Changing style parts ....................................................................................................................................................................355 Using an attribute as part of the style ........................................................................................................................................355 Opening the Set Style Attribute dialog box ............................................................................................................................... 356 Setting the style attribute ............................................................................................................................................................ 356 Selecting a symbol .......................................................................................................................................................................356 Labelling shapes .......................................................................................................................................................................... 356 Managing the labels .....................................................................................................................................................................356 Adding labels to a layer ...............................................................................................................................................................357 Setting label representation ........................................................................................................................................................357 Changing labels ........................................................................................................................................................................... 357 Defining the design and layout for labels ..................................................................................................................................358 Defining which attribute to use for the label ............................................................................................................................. 358 Setting the position for point layer labels ................................................................................................................................. 359 Setting the position for line layer labels .................................................................................................................................... 359 Setting the position for polygon and raster layer labels ..........................................................................................................360 Designing a symbol ..................................................................................................................................................................... 360 Understanding the symbol working area ...................................................................................................................................360 Creating a symbol ........................................................................................................................................................................ 361 Creating a multi-part symbol ...................................................................................................................................................... 361 Selecting a symbol from the symbol file ................................................................................................................................... 362 Setting symbol representation ................................................................................................................................................... 362 Editing the symbol RST ...............................................................................................................................................................362 About the symbol file Save As dialog box .................................................................................................................................362 Saving a project file ............................................................................................................................................................................ 365 Renaming a map .......................................................................................................................................................................... 365 Starting a new map ...................................................................................................................................................................... 365 Working with map properties ......................................................................................................................................................365 Changing the paper size by dragging a resize handle ............................................................................................................. 365 Changing the paper size from the Map Properties dialog box ................................................................................................ 366 Working with areas ...................................................................................................................................................................... 366 Scaling an area .............................................................................................................................................................................367 Rescaling an area .........................................................................................................................................................................367
Geomatica Focus
Setting area properties ................................................................................................................................................................ 368 Setting area properties ................................................................................................................................................................ 368 Opening the Math Model Area Properties dialog box ...............................................................................................................369 Setting Math Model Area properties ...........................................................................................................................................370 Working with surrounds ..............................................................................................................................................................371 Creating a surround .....................................................................................................................................................................371 Setting a default surround element ............................................................................................................................................372 Setting a default quick style ........................................................................................................................................................372 Setting surround element properties ......................................................................................................................................... 372 About neatlines ............................................................................................................................................................................ 372 Setting the position of a neatline in relation to an area ........................................................................................................... 372 Setting specific extents for a neatline ........................................................................................................................................373 About borders .............................................................................................................................................................................. 373 Changing border style and proximity to neatline ..................................................................................................................... 374 About grids ................................................................................................................................................................................... 374 Changing grid pacing and proximity to neatline .......................................................................................................................375 Changing the style and layout of the grid ................................................................................................................................. 376 Changing the location and style of the grid headings ............................................................................................................. 377 Changing the location and style of the grid labels ................................................................................................................... 377 About legends .............................................................................................................................................................................. 379 Setting the number of columns and designing a border for a legend .................................................................................... 380 Adding a title to the legend ......................................................................................................................................................... 380 Adding styles to a legend ............................................................................................................................................................381 Organizing sections in a legend ................................................................................................................................................. 382 Creating a design for sections in a legend ................................................................................................................................383 Customizing a section layout ..................................................................................................................................................... 384 Organizing legend columns ........................................................................................................................................................ 384 Adding a picture to a map ........................................................................................................................................................... 385 About north arrows ......................................................................................................................................................................386 Setting the angle and style for a true North arrow ....................................................................................................................386 Adjusting the position of a north arrow label ............................................................................................................................387 Setting the angle and style for the magnetic north arrow ........................................................................................................387 Setting the angle and style for the grid north arrow .................................................................................................................388 About scale bars .......................................................................................................................................................................... 388 Determining the style and position of the title for the scale bar ............................................................................................. 389 Selecting a scale bar type ........................................................................................................................................................... 390 Setting the divisions for the scale bar ....................................................................................................................................... 390 Labeling a scale bar with a unit of measurement and setting a zero tick .............................................................................. 391 Setting subdivisions for a scale bar ...........................................................................................................................................392 Specifying which divisions to subdivide ................................................................................................................................... 392 Designing a Line and Tick scale bar .......................................................................................................................................... 393
Geomatica Focus
Designing a single, double, or triple scale bar ..........................................................................................................................393 Adding a map title to an area ...................................................................................................................................................... 394 Adding text to a surround ........................................................................................................................................................... 395 Setting the updating behavior .................................................................................................................................................... 395 Setting the offset (not available for neatline, border, and grid) ...............................................................................................396 Setting a grid starting point ........................................................................................................................................................ 396 Selecting an existing quick style ................................................................................................................................................397 Removing a custom quick style from the list ............................................................................................................................397 Creating a custom quick style .................................................................................................................................................... 397 Creating an index for a project, you must provide ................................................................................................................... 397 Adding a default index to a map .................................................................................................................................................398 Indexation properties ...................................................................................................................................................................398 Setting general parameters for an index ................................................................................................................................... 398 Adding or change the index title ................................................................................................................................................ 399 Opening an indexation parameter file ........................................................................................................................................399 Setting up an index ...................................................................................................................................................................... 400 Setting the spacing for rows and columns ................................................................................................................................400 Setting the count for rows and columns ................................................................................................................................... 400 Setting headings for rows and columns ....................................................................................................................................401 Setting a RepCode for a grid heading ........................................................................................................................................401 Setting a RepCode for grid lines ................................................................................................................................................ 401 Filtering an index ......................................................................................................................................................................... 401 Making a word exclusion list ...................................................................................................................................................... 401 Generating an index list .............................................................................................................................................................. 402 Using the Verification Mode option ............................................................................................................................................402 Setting advanced indexation properties ....................................................................................................................................402 The prefixes list follows a set of rules ....................................................................................................................................... 403 Creating or editing a prefixes list ............................................................................................................................................... 403 Using the Swap Prefixes option ................................................................................................................................................. 404 Saving an indexation file ............................................................................................................................................................. 404 Adding text to an index ............................................................................................................................................................... 404 Setting the text color ................................................................................................................................................................... 404 Setting the text style .................................................................................................................................................................... 404 Using the New Text tool .............................................................................................................................................................. 404 Printing a map .............................................................................................................................................................................. 404 Selecting printer options .............................................................................................................................................................405 Selecting page layout options .................................................................................................................................................... 405 Printing color separations ...........................................................................................................................................................405 Opening the Export Map dialog box ...........................................................................................................................................407 Exporting a map or chart as an Adobe Illustrator file .............................................................................................................. 408 Exporting a map or chart as a JPEG .......................................................................................................................................... 408
PCI Geomatics xx
Geomatica Focus
Exporting a map or chart to a JPEG 2000 file ........................................................................................................................... 409 Exporting a map or chart to PCIDSK ..........................................................................................................................................409 Exporting a map or chart to TIFF ................................................................................................................................................409 Exporting a map or chart to BMP ............................................................................................................................................... 410 Exporting a map or chart to an HP RTL file ...............................................................................................................................410 Exporting a map or chart to EMF ................................................................................................................................................411 Viewing overlapping layers from a Web mapping service .......................................................................................................411
Geomatica Focus
PCI Geomatics 22
Geomatica Focus
Chapter 1
Using the Focus online help
The Focus HTML online Help system provides basic Help topics for using Focus and online references for the Focus tools and processes you will need to use when you do your work. Geomatica Help includes a technical reference library for background information and extensive online list of data formats you can use with the many PCI GeoGateway features in Focus. You can also contact PCI or visit the PCI Geomatics Corporate Web site for more specific help and support.
Advanced Hyperspectral: Contains detailed technical information on hyperspectral data and how you can use it with Focus and the other Geomatica applications. For information on using the Focus hyperspectral visualization tools, see the Focus Online Help and the Focus User Guide.
23
Geomatica Focus
Supported File Formats screen by clicking the name of the format in the supported formats list.
PCI Geomatics 24
Geomatica Focus
Chapter 2
Working with Focus
Like all PCI Geomatics products, Focus is designed to work with dozens of data formats through GeoGateway and to take advantage of the PCIDSK file format. There are several instances when you should change your data to PCIDSK so you can take advantage of all of the features offered in Geomatica. You should convert your data files to PCIDSK format when: The original format does not support auxiliary information, such as georeferencing, look-up tables, pseudo-colour tables, and vectors. The original format cannot be updated. You want to use your files in PACE or XPACE programs. Geomatica also contains a certified implementation of the NITF standard enabling you to view, to format, and to export digital imagery and imagery-related products; Geomatica is, however, not NITF certified.
under both the Files tab and the Maps tab. You can choose files from the File Selector dialog box, which is a standard Windows panel that also allows you to choose from data types in the GeoGateway file list (GDB formats). For more information on the File Selector dialog box, see "Common Utilities" in the Geomatica online Help. The following image shows the main Focus interface:
Opening a file
You can open files in Focus from the File menu, from the toolbar, or from shortcut menus in the Focus control pane
PCI Geomatics
When you open data files, they are listed in the Files tree in the control pane and all files and layers are available. For more information about elements in the Focus
25
Geomatica Focus
interface, see Understanding the Focus control pane on page 27 . 1. From the File menu, click Open. You can also right-click in the Maps control pane and click Open. 2. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select your data files. 3. Click Open. The image data opens in the view pane. The first three image channels are automatically selected. The file components are listed in the Maps and Files control panes. If the file you opened does not have raster data, the first vector layer opens in a new map. Note: For colour images, TM Bands 1, 2, and 3 representing the red, green, and blue (RGB) image channels, are listed in the Maps tree under New Area. When you open an image containing a math model segment, you can choose to use the a georeferencing or math model. For more information, see Using a math model with images on page 40 .
Windows-based application. Focus also provides an Add Layer Wizard to make adding data easier, see Using the Add Layer wizard on page 26 . You can also add files to open data. For example, you can add new vectors to an Area already in use or you can create a new empty layer and add new data to it by dragging data from another Area or from a different database using the Add Layer Wizard. When you add more data to a project, it is automatically added to the Focus Maps tree in an active Area. 1. In the Maps tree, right-click a Map and click New Area. 2. Drag the data you want to move into the new Area. 3. Save the project. You can also add files from the Files tree to the Maps tree from an open database.
Geomatica Focus
you use the Add Layer Wizard, you do not need to have an active Area in the Maps tree; the Wizard creates a new layer automatically. 1. In the Maps tree, right-click the area where you want to add a layer and click Add. You can also click Add from the Layer menu. 2. From the Add Layer Wizard, choose a layer type option and click Next. 3. From the Files available list, select the data file containing the raster channels you want to use. If the raster file you want to use is not listed, click Browse, navigate to the file you want, and click OK. When you have selected a file in the Files available list, only channels of the specified type are listed in the The following vector segments are available list. For example, only bitmap channels are listed if you have selected bitmaps as the layer type you want to add. 4. From the The following vector segments are available list, select the channel you want to use in your layer. 5. Click Finish.
show the name and path of the file you have opened. The Area level is named New Area by default. You can rename each level and each layer as needed. You can include files of almost any format in your project. In some cases, you may need to convert your file formats to the PCIDSK. Maps Are the element at the top of the hierarchy. This is the workspace that holds all of the data for your work, such as the image, surrounds, and indexes. You can have more than one map in a project. The Map represents the extents of the print page for your project. You can adjust the map size to control the size of your printed output or adjust the size and position of the image relative to the canvas. Areas Hold the file boundaries for either image or vector layers. You can include several layers and segments for a geographical region and you can have many areas in a Map. Each Area has a unique georeference system. When an image or vector layer is added to an area, it is automatically scaled and georeferenced to that Area. Layers Hold the data displayed in the view pane. Layers are composed of segments and can be rearranged in the Maps tree to change the image in the view pane. You can change the order of layers by dragging them up or down the Maps tree. When you move a layer, you also move
27
Geomatica Focus
the segments within it. Segments Are all of the components that make up a layer, such as rasters, vectors, bitmaps, and look-up tables (LUT). The files, listed in the Maps tree, are a hierarchy of elements that make up a project. Maps tree elements have common properties that you can control from the Maps and Files tree, menu bars, and shortcut menus.
that should be visible, check the layer priority. 1. In the Maps tree, click an Area layer. 2. Drag the layer up or down the Maps tree. A black line shows the layer position. You can move an entire area, including associated components, in the same way.
28
Geomatica Focus
The Add Image Channels dialog box opens when you right-click an unlocked file in the Files tree and lets you set the following attributes: Supported bit depths are: The Files tree lists data saved to your hard disk Like the PCIDSK format, Focus keeps image channels and auxiliary data segments in the same place. The data listed in the Files tree is stored in the source file on your system hard disk. Some of the data types, listed in the Files tree, are not viewable as image components. The same list can contain other auxiliary data types such as LUTs, pseudo-color tables (PCT), and signatures. You can use the Focus software tools and dialog boxes to work with these data types. 8-bit: 0 to 255 16-bit signed; -32,768 to + 32,786 16-bit unsigned: 0 to 65,535 32-bit real: approximately +/-1.2E-38 to 3.4E+38
Channel Types: Lists the supported image pixel depths. Existing: Displays the number of image channels for each pixel depth in the selected file. Channels to Add: Lets you specify the number of image channels of each type that you want to add to the source file. When your source PCIDSK file channels are arranged as either band sequential or file interleaved, new channels are added to the end of the file. When your files are pixel interleaved, the new channels are added in groups of pixel depth. Pixel depth groups are ordered by size. For example, when you add 8-bit channels to an existing pixel interleaved file with 16-bit unsigned channels, the 8-bit channels are listed first. Existing 16-bit unsigned channels are renumbered as subsequent channels.
29
Geomatica Focus
Combining layers
A combined vector layer amalgamates several vector layers into one. For example, one vector layer covering the eastern US can be combined with another layer covering the western US to produce a virtual single layer for all of the US. When you combine layers, data is not duplicated, it is linked. The combined layer does not store data but acts as a pointer to the source data. You can combine vector layers from your current data files and from other source files with a two-part process to locate and choose the data you want to combine. 1. With at least two PCIDSK files open in the control pane, click the Files tab. 2. In the Files tree, right-click the file folder icon and click New and then click Combined Vector Layer. 3. In the Combined Layer dialog box, click Browse. 4. From the Select Layer dialog box, select a file from the File list box. 5. Select an available layer from the Layers available list. 6. Click OK. The layers and common columns are listed in the Combined Layer dialog box. The Layer list shows two or more entries that you can combine. The Common attributes list identifies the columns (fields/attributes) that will make up the combined layer doesn't require any action. Only columns that
PCI Geomatics
are present in all layers of your inputs are listed. 7. In the Combined Layer dialog box, select a layer and click OK. A new layer is added under the files listed in the Files tree. You can view the new layer and see the combined data in the view pane. You can also open the Attribute Manager to see all of the combined shapes. Layers common to both input layers are listed twice. For more information, see the following: About the Combined Layer dialog box on page 30 About the Select Layer dialog box on page 31
30
Geomatica Focus
Removes a selected layer from the Layer list. Common Columns List: Shows columns that are common to layers in the Layer list.
project at any time. You can use any of the Focus viewing and editing options when working with .gpr files. You can also manage RGB and grayscale layers within project files with shortcut menus in the Maps and Files panes. When you right-click an object in the Files tree, a shortcut menu lists the available commands for working with that data type. For example, right-clicking a file folder icon opens a shortcut menu listing several commands for managing files. Right-clicking an RGB or grayscale layer opens a shortcut menu listing commands for managing the layers as a data file and for adjusting attributes, statistical properties, and overviews for that layer.
Saving a project
When you work with multiple files, you can save your work as a project using the file name of your original data files or save your project under a new file name. 1. From the File menu, click Save Project or Save Project As. 2. In the File Selector dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to store the project file. 3. Type a name for the project in the File name box. 4. Click Save. To save your project while you are working on it, click File and then click Save Project.
31
Geomatica Focus
The Layer Manager lists layer properties in a table format that shows properties for each object in the map and the hierarchical structure of Maps, Areas, and layers. For surrounds, the Layer Manager only displays the surround elements. This tool is useful when you are trying to manage a large combination of data layers, rasters, and vectors when making a map. Using the Layer Manger, you can control the vector layer hierarchy to ensure that one project layer does not cover another. In the Layers menu, click Layer Manager.
Layer Visible: Checked cells are visible layers. When the check box is disabled, the layer is not visible. Legend Items Visible: Checked cells are Legend items that are visible. They are similar to the Layer Visible column but only apply to layers in the legend. Read Only: Checked layers are read-only. When a layer is read-only, a red x will appear beside the layer under the Maps tab. Layer Priority: Cell numbers show the layer priority. A layer that is assigned a higher priority will be displayed on top of a layer with a lower priority. (See Changing the layer priority on page 28 ) Zoom Scale Active: Checked layers can be assigned zoom scale values. Min Zoom Scale: Minimum zoom scale value. As map scales go, this parameter, X, is considered to be 1: X. Max Zoom Scale:
32
Geomatica Focus
Maximum scale zoom value. As map scales go, this parameter, X, is considered to be1: X. Selectable: Objects are selectable Transparency Active: Checked cells can be assigned a transparency value. When this check box is enabled, the values in the Transparency Value columns are active and the results are shown in Focus. Transparency Value: The pixel value entered here will become transparent, allowing you to see imagery under it. To properly assign transparent values to a three-channel RGB image, use the following format: R10G20B100. In this example, pixel value 10 will become transparent for the red band, 20 for the green band, and 100 for the blue band. For grayscale images, you need only specify a singe value. For example: 10. The pixel value of 10 would become transparent in your grayscale image. Opacity Active: When this check box is enabled, the values in the Opacity% column become active and the results are shown in Focus. Opacity%:
PCI Geomatics
Sets the opacity level. For example, 100% opacity shows the entire image. Layers beneath cannot be seen. With a setting of 0%, none of the image is shown. You can see all of an image beneath the layer. View No Data Value: Shows Null values. No Data Color: When there are #No Data# values in your working file, The No Data Color column lets you assign a color for viewing your No-Data pixels.
Geomatica Focus
Landsat and SPOT scenes cannot be used because their pixels are too large. Using the Zoom Scale function you can set the zoom scale to deactivate the Landsat image when you are zoomed into the aerial photo, or deactivate the aerial photo when you zoomed out looking at the Landsat scene. The following table shows the settings to use for the example above. Table 1. Image Landsat (30m) Spot (10m) Min Zoom Scale 1:10 000 1:50 001 Max Zoom Scale 1:50 000 1:75 000 1:120 000
When you open a raster that contains a rotation, you will be prompted to choose whether you want the raster to display as a rectangular grid (Raster Up) aligned with the Area or with the rotation from the file (North Up). With the North Up option, the rotated raster opens as any other raster. In the Focus view pane the raster may appear turned in the Area since it has been corrected so North is at the top of the viewer. A rotated raster as North Up
With the Raster Up option, the Area is rotated to counteract the effect of the rotation in the file so the first pixel in the data is in the top left corner of the Area. In the Focus view pane the raster appears squared to the Area. A rotated raster as Raster Up
Geomatica Focus
Properties dialog boxes have tabs with layer-specific settings that you can adjust for the data type you are working with. Properties dialog boxes always show information specific to the file and the file type you have chosen. Information and inputs vary depending on the type of layer you have chosen. 1. In the control pane, click the Maps tab and select a layer. 2. From the View menu, click Properties. You can also right-click a layer and click Properties, or you can double-click a layer.
When you create a map with a rotated Area (Raster Up), two surround elements are affected: Grid and North Arrow. You cannot create a grid in a rotated Area. When you create a North Arrow in a rotated Area, the North Arrow will be rotated by the amount set in the Area properties.
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change generic information about your Map and read other file information. (See Working with map properties on page 365 ) Description: Lets you change the file name or description appearing in
35
Geomatica Focus
the Maps tree. File Name: Reports the name of the Map file for the properties you are viewing. Created: Reports the date the file was created. (See Page Setup tab on page 36 )
Orients the map horizontally Paper Size: Allows you to choose from a list of standard paper sizes or lets you create a custom size. You can choose from the following paper size options: US Letter US Legal A0 A1 A2 A3 Tabloid A4 Tabloid A4 Letter A5 Letter B1 (ISO) B4 (ISO) B5 Letter B 11" X 17" C 17" X 22" D 22" X 34" E 34" X 44" Custom
Width: The Width box shows the dimensions of the standard paper size you have chosen or allows you to enter a custom paper width of your own. Height:
36
Geomatica Focus
The Height box shows the dimensions of the standard paper size you have chosen, or allows you to enter a custom paper height of your own. (See Default RST tab on page 37 )
information about your Area and preview the position of your area in relation to your map. Description: The Description box lets you change the Area name or description appearing in the Maps tree. Show Outline: The Show Outline option outlines the Area in the view pane. Scale: The Scale box allows you to change the scale of your Area to several standard scales or to a custom scale. You can choose from the following scale options: 1:20000 1:50000 1:100000 1:1000000 Custom
When you choose Custom from the scale list, you enter your custom scale in the scale box. Preview: The Preview area allows you to see the scale and orientation of your Area relative to your map. (See Layout tab on page 38 )
37
General tab
Under the General tab you can change generic
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Layout tab
The Layout tab lets you change the Area representation, position, and size. You can also view position and size changes in a preview window. Representation: Lets you change the Area scale factor and the Area priority. Scale Factor: Changes the Area scale factor. (See Scaling an area on page 367 ) Priority: Changes the Area priority relative to other Areas in your project or file. (See Changing the layer priority on page 28 ) Position: Allows you to move your Area relative to the Map and to select a unit of measure for your Area. Left: Allows you to change the Area position left or right. Bottom:
Allows you to change the Area position up or down. Size: Allows you to control the width and height of your Area. Width: Changes the width of the Area. Height: Changes the height of the Area. Automatic resize: Resizes your Area automatically. Preview: Allows you to see the position and width and height changes for your Area relative to your map. (See Projection/Extents tab on page 38 )
Projection/Extents tab
The Projection/Extents tab allows you to change the definition of the Area#s projection, change the bounds of the Area, and rotate the Area. Changing the projection's definition does not change the projection of the Area. To change the projection, see Reprojecting files on page 134 .
PCI Geomatics 38
Geomatica Focus
Coordinate System: The Coordinate Systems list displays the coordinate system for your area. The available coordinate systems are Pixel UTM Long/Lat Meter Foot SPCS Other
Bounds: The Bounds box allows you to show the bounding coordinates of you file in either geocoded (Eastings and Northings) or geographic (latitude and longitude) units for UTM, SPCS and Other coordinate systems. Bounding coordinates are not shown with the Pixel option. Long/Lat displays the bounding coordinates in geographic units only. Meter and Foot displays the bounding coordinates in geocoded units only. Upper left: The Upper Left boxes show the X, Y coordinates for the upper left corner of the Area. Values are in the units of the selected coordinate system. Lower Right: The Lower Right boxes indicate the X, Y coordinates for the lower right corner of the Area. Values are in the units of selected coordinate system. Rotation:
Earth Model: The Earth Model button opens the Earth Model dialog box, where you can choose from a list of data and ellipsoids to define a coordinate system for an area. More: The More button opens projection definition dialog boxes, where you can select a projection definition for the Area. The More button is active if you select UTM, SPCS, or Other from the Coordinate System box. A different projection panel opens under different conditions. Table 2. This Projection UTM SPCS
PCI Geomatics
The Rotation boxes indicate the amount the Area is rotated to display a rotated raster so the first pixel in the data is in the top left corner. For more information, see About rotated rasters on page 34 .
39
Geomatica Focus
Visual Clipping: The visual clipping section lets you choose a clip region from a list of clips that fall within your Area. Define Clip Region: The Define Clip Region button opens the Define Clip Region dialog box. Enable: The Enable option is available after you have chosen a clip region from the Define Clip Region dialog box. The Define Clip Region Panel: Allows you to choose a clip region from a list of data that falls within the area.(See Opening the Clipping/Subsetting panel on page 151 ) 1. Right-click New Area and click Properties. 2. In the Area Properties dialog box, click the Projection/Extents tab. 3. Click Define Clip Region. 4. From the Define Clip Region dialog box, choose the layer that you want to use to define the extents of the clip region from the Clipping Layer list box. 5. Click OK. 6. From the Visual Clipping area of the Area Properties dialog box, enable the Enable check box. 7. Click OK.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
image opens in a layer in an Area using the georeferencing saved in the file or pixel-based georeferencing if no georeferencing is available. When you choose the math model, the image is displayed as a layer and the Area is changed to a Math Model Area. In the Math Model Area the image is displayed without correction in the viewer, but accurate ground coordinates are calculated for each pixel using the pixel and line coordinates, the math model, and the digital elevation model (DEM), or an approximate elevation value that you provide. The advantage of using the math model is that you can display geocoded coordinates, overlay geocoded vectors, and digitize geocoded three-dimensional vectors on the raw image instead of going through the potentially time-consuming, labor-intensive process of orthorectifying or geometrically correcting the imagery. This process is also known as mono-restitution. 1. Open an image, see Opening a file on page 25 . 2. If you want to use the georeferencing saved in the file, click File. 3. If you want to display the image using the math model associated to the file, click Math Model. 4. Click OK.
each pixel using the pixel and line coordinates, the math model, and the digital elevation model (DEM), or an approximate elevation value that you provide. For more information, see Using a math model with images on page 40 . 1. In the Source of georeferencing list, select the segment containing the math model that you want to use in the Area. The projection, bounds, upper-left coordinate, lower-right coordinate, and pixel sizes are displayed under Georeferencing Information 2. To use a DEM as the source for your elevation values, click DEM. In the File box, type the path and file name of the DEM or click Browse to select the file. In the Layer list, select the layer that contains the DEM. In the NoData (background) value box, type the value that represents the pixels that lie outside the DEM area so they are not mistaken for elevation values. 3. To use an estimate of the elevation instead of the DEM, click Approximate elevation. In the Elevation value box, type the elevation value that you want to use. If you do not enter an elevation value, a value of 0 meters (Mean Sea Level) is used by default. 4. In the Elevation reference box, select Mean Sea
41
Geomatica Focus
Level (MSL) if the elevation values were calculated based on the geoid; select Ellipsoid (ELL) if the elevation values were calculated based on an ellipsoidal model of the Earth. 5. In the Elevation units box, select a measurement unit for the elevation values. 6. Click OK.
The Show Outline option outlines the Math Model Area in the view pane. Scale: The Scale box allows you to change the scale of a Math Model Area to several standard scales or to a custom scale. You can choose from the following scale options: 1:20000 1:50000 1:100000 1:1000000 Custom
When you choose Custom from the scale list, you enter your custom scale in the scale box. Preview: The Preview area allows you to see the scale and orientation of your Math Model Area relative to your map. (See Layout tab on page 38 )
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change generic information about your Math Model Area and preview the position of your area in relation to your map. Name: The Name box lets you change the Math Model Area name or description appearing in the Maps tree. Show Outline:
PCI Geomatics
Layout tab
The Layout tab lets you change the Math Model Area representation and position. You can also view position changes in a preview area. Representation:
42
Geomatica Focus
Lets you change the Math Model Area scale factor and the Math Model Area priority. Scale Factor: Changes the Math Model Area scale factor. (See Scaling an area on page 367 ) Priority: Changes the Math Model Area priority relative to other Math Model Areas in your project or file. (See Changing the layer priority on page 28 ) Position: Allows you to move your Math Model Area relative to the Map and to select a unit of measure for your Math Model Area. Left: Allows you to change the Math Model Area position to the left or right. Bottom: Allows you to change the Math Model Area position up or down. Size: The Size section is always disabled in a Math Model
PCI Geomatics
Area. The width and height of your Math Model Area are determined by the file. Automatic Resize: Automatically enlarges the extents of the Area to accommodate the extents of the data. Preview: The Preview area allows you to see the position and width and height changes for your Math Model Area relative to your map. (See Projection/Extents tab on page 38 )
Projection/Extents tab
The Projection/Extents tab allows you to view the Math Model Area projection and select a clip of image data that falls within the area. It lists the file that contained the math model segment, the name of the segment, and the source for the elevation values. Projection The coordinate system used in your Math Model Area is displayed. Bounds The Bounds list allows you to show the bounding coordinates of your file in either geocoded (Eastings and
43
Geomatica Focus
Northings) or geographic (latitude and longitude) units for UTM, SPCS, and other coordinate systems. Upper left The Upper Left boxes show the X, Y coordinates for the upper-left corner of the file. Values are in the units of the selected coordinate system. Lower Right
dialog box
The RGB Layer Properties dialog box allows you to change general properties, switch source images and lookup tables, adjust display properties, and set a zoom scale for your RGB layers. (See General tab on page 44 )
General tab
The Lower Right boxes indicate the X, Y coordinates for the lower-right corner of the file. Values are in the units of selected coordinate system. Visual Clipping The Visual Clipping section lets you choose a clip region from a list of clips that fall within your Math Model Area. Define Clip Region The Define Clip Region button opens the Define Clip Region dialog box, which allows you to choose a clip region from a list of data that falls within the Math Model Area. (See Selecting a clip region on page 158 ) Enable: The Enable option is available after you have chosen a clip region from the Define Clip Region dialog box. Under the General tab, you can change general information about your file and read other file information. Description: The Description box lets you change the file name or description appearing in the Maps tree. Read Only: The Read Only option lets you change the Read/Write properties of the RGB layer. Visible: The Visible option makes the RGB layer visible in the view pane. Priority: The Priority box changes the priority of the RGB layer in your project or file. (See Changing the layer priority on
44
Geomatica Focus
page 28 ) Resample Method: Allows you to select a resampling method for displaying the raster in the Focus view pane. The resampling does not change the data itself, it is only used to determine how to display the raster on your screen. You can choose from the following resample methods: Nearest Neighbor Bilinear Interpolation Cubic Convolution Layer Enhancement: Reports enhancements associated with the RGB layer. (See Changing a default enhancement on page 244 ) (See Source Images tab on page 45 )
Allows you to choose a different file from a list of files you have open in Focus. Layer: Lets you to choose a layer from the file you chose from the RedImage File box. GreenImage: Lets you select a new file and layer for the green image channel. File: Allows you to choose a different file from a list of files you have open. Layer: Lets you to choose a layer from the file you chose from the GreenImage File box. BlueImage: Lets you select a new file and layer for the blue image channel. File: Allows you to choose a different file from a list of files you have open.
Geomatica Focus
Layer: The layer list lets you to choose a layer from the file you chose from the BlueImage File box. (See Source LUTs tab on page 46 )
File: The File list allows you to choose a different file from a list of files you have open in Focus. Layer: Lets you to choose a layer from the file you chose from the GreenLut File box. BlueLut: Lets you select a new file and look up table for the blue image channel. File: Allows you to choose a different file from a list of files you have open. Layer: Lets you to choose a layer from the file you chose from the BlueLut File box. (See Display tab on page 46 )
Display tab
The Display tab has controls for changing the transparency and opacity of the RGB layer and for viewing #No data# values when they are included in an RGB layer.
PCI Geomatics 46
Geomatica Focus
Vector layers placed below a raster transparency in the Maps tree appear in the view pane but are not supported for printing. Transparency: Makes the Value boxes available. Red Values: Lets you enter a value or a range of values for red channel transparency. Green Values: Lets you enter a value or a range of values for green channel transparency. Blue Values: Lets you enter a value or a range of values for blue channel transparency. Opacity: Makes the Opacity slide control available for changing the opacity of the RGB layer. View 'No Data Value': When an RGB layer contains 'no data' values, the View 'No Data Value' option is available. When you choose the View 'No Data Value' option, you can select a color from
PCI Geomatics
the color list for displaying them in the view pane. (See Display within Zoom Scale tab on page 47 )
Geomatica Focus
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change generic information about your file and read other file information. Description: Lets you change the file name or description for the grayscale layer appearing in the Maps tree. Read Only: Lets you change the Read/Write properties of the grayscale layer. Visible: Makes the grayscale layer visible in the view pane. Priority:
Nearest Neighbor Bilinear Interpolation Cubic Convolution Layer Enhancement: Reports the enhancements associated with the grayscale layer. (See Changing a default enhancement on page 244 ) (See Source Images tab on page 48 )
Changes the priority of the grayscale layer in your project or file. (See Changing the layer priority on page 28 ) Resample Method:
Lets you to choose a layer from the file you chose from the grayscale file box. (See Source LUTs tab on page 48 )
Allows you to select a resampling method for displaying the raster in the Focus view pane. The resampling does not change the data itself, it is only used to determine how to display the raster on your screen. You can choose from the following resample methods:
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Lets you select a new file and look up table for the grayscale layer. File: Allows you to choose a different file from a list of open files. Layer: Lets you to choose a LUT from the file you chose from the LUT file box. (See Display tab on page 49 )
channel transparency. Opacity: Makes the Opacity slide control available for changing the opacity of the grayscale layer. View 'No Data Value': When a grayscale layer contains 'no data' values, the View 'No Data Value' option is available. When you choose the View 'No Data Value' option, you can select a color from the color list for displaying them in the view pane. (See Display within Zoom Scale tab on page 49 )
Display tab
The Display tab has controls for changing the Transparency and Opacity of the grayscale layer and for viewing #No data# values when they are included in a grayscale layer. Vector layers placed below a raster transparency in the Maps tree appear in the view pane but are not supported for printing. Transparency:
Makes the Value box available. Maximum Scale: Values: Lets you enter a maximum zoom scale. Lets you enter a value or a range of values for grayscale
PCI Geomatics 49
Geomatica Focus
Current Zoom Scale: Reports the current zoom scale for the RGB layer.
Read Only: Lets you change the Read/Write properties of the PCT layer. Visible: Makes the PCT layer visible in the view pane. Priority: Changes the priority of the PCT layer in your project or file. (See Changing the layer priority on page 28 ) (See Source Image tab on page 50 )
Labels tab
The Label tab on the Properties dialog box for the layer contains the label files associated with the project. For more information about labels see Managing the labels on page 356 .
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change generic information about your PCT layer and read other file information. Description: Lets you change the file name or description for the PCT layer appearing in the Maps tree.
PCI Geomatics 50
Geomatica Focus
Lets you to choose a layer from the file you chose from the PCTImage file box. PCT: Lets you select a new pseudo-color table file and layer. File: Allows you to choose a different file from a list of files you have open. Layer: Lets you choose a new pseudo-color table from the file you chose In the PCT file box. (See Display tab on page 51 )
View 'No Data Value' option is available. When you choose the View 'No Data Value' option, you can select a color from the color list for displaying them in the view pane. (See Display within Zoom Scale tab on page 51 )
Display tab
The Display tab has controls for changing the Opacity of the PCT image layer and for viewing #No data# values when they are included in a PCT image layer. Opacity: Makes the Opacity slide control available for changing the opacity of the PCT image layer. View 'No Data Value': When a PCT image layer contains 'no data' values, the
PCI Geomatics
Labels tab
The Label tab on the Properties dialog box for the layer contains the Label files associated with the project. For more information about labels see Managing the labels on page 356 .
51
Geomatica Focus
Changes the priority of the bitmap layer in your project or file. (See Changing the layer priority on page 28 ) (See Source Images tab on page 52 )
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change generic information and read other file information about a bitmap layer. Description: Lets you change the file name or description for the bitmap layer appearing in the Maps tree. Read Only: Lets you change the Read/Write properties of the bitmap layer. Visible: Makes the bitmap layer visible in the view pane. Priority:
Geomatica Focus
which lets you create a custom color. (See Display tab on page 53 )
Current Zoom Scale: Reports the current zoom scale for the bitmap segment.
Display tab
The Display tab has controls for changing the Opacity of the bitmap segment. Opacity: Makes the opacity slide control available. You can change the opacity of a bitmap segment when you want to see data from another layer through the bitmap in the view pane. (See Display within Zoom Scale tab on page 53 )
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change generic and display information and read other file information about a vector layer. Generic: Lets you change generic attributes of your vector layer. Description: Lets you change the layer file name or description of the vector layer shown in the Maps tree. Read Only: Makes the file read only. When you select this option you
53
Geomatica Focus
cannot save changes to the vector layer. Visible: Makes the vector layer visible in the view pane. Selectable: Allows you to select a vector in the view pane using the selection tools. (See Display within Zoom Scale tab on page 54 )
Labels tab
The Label tab on the Properties dialog box for the layer contains the label files associated with the project. For more information about labels see Managing the labels on page 356 .
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change generic information about your thematic layer and read other file information. Description: Lets you change the file name or description for the thematic layer appearing in the Maps tree. Read Only: Lets you change the Read/Write properties of the thematic layer.
54
Geomatica Focus
Visible: Makes the thematic layer visible in the view pane. Selectable: Allows you to select a thematic in the view pane using the selection tools. Priority: Changes the priority of the thematic layer in your project or file. (See Changing the layer priority on page 28 ) (See Display tab on page 51 )
Display tab
The Display tab has controls for changing the Opacity of the thematic image layer and for viewing #No data# values when they are included in a thematic image layer. Opacity: Makes the Opacity slide control available for changing the opacity of the thematic image layer. View 'No Data Value': When a thematic image layer contains 'no data' values, the View 'No Data Value' option is available. When you choose the View 'No Data Value' option, you can select a color from the color list for displaying them in the view
PCI Geomatics
Labels tab
The Label tab on the Properties dialog box for the layer contains the Label files associated with the project. For more information about labels see Managing the labels on page 356 .
Geomatica Focus
The RST Properties dialog box lets you change several aspect of an RST. General Tab Under the General tab, you can change the name of the RST file and change the current units of measure used by the RST. Description: Lets you change the name of the RST. Units: Reports the units of measure used by the RST. Modify: Opens the Modify dialog box. (See About the Modify dialog box on page 56 ) File Information The File information section shows the current path of the RST file and reports last date the file was modified. File Name: Reports the name and path of the RST.
From Ground To: Lets you choose a different unit of measure, select a standard scale from a list, or create a custom scale. Scale 1: Lets you enter a custom scale when you choose Custom from the From Ground To list.
56
Geomatica Focus
Reports the layer type. Size on Disk: Reports the size of the file on disk. Creation Date: Indicates when the layer was created. Last Update: Shows the last time the raster file was changed. Raster Size:
Reports the size of the bitmap layer in pixels and lines. (See History tab on page 57 )
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been applied to the data contained in the image channel. (See MetaData tab on page 57 )
General tab
Description: Lets you change the file name or description appearing in the Files tree. Type:
PCI Geomatics
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with metadata names and values associated with the Raster file.
57
Geomatica Focus
Name: Shows the name of the metadata file. Value: Lets you enter a new value for the metadata file. Add: Lets you add records to the MetaData table. Delete: Lets you remove records from the MetaData table. Delete All: Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the table.
Allows you to enter detailed information about a file. The description is shown in the Properties dialog box for the file. Type: Reports the file format. Size on disk: Reports the disk size of the file. Creation date: Indicates when the file was first created. Last updated: Shows when the last edit was made to the file. Raster Size:
If applicable, reports the size of the raster in pixels and lines. Interleaving type: Reports the type of interleaving used in the file. The following interleave methods are reported: BAND interleaved:
General tab
Description:
PCI Geomatics
58
Geomatica Focus
Stores all data for one band together. Gives superior performance when bands are not accessed continuously. Not supported for files larger than 2 GB. PIXEL interleaved: Stores data for all bands at a particular pixel. May give better performance when all bands are accessed at the same time. FILE interleaved: Similar to BAND interleaved, but image channel data is stored in external files, one file per band. Tiled: Files have image data organized in many square sub images. Tiling provides faster access when a sub-area is extracted for file viewing, and supports compression formats. Pathname:
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab has a table that displays metadata associated with the file. Add: Lets you add records to the MetaData table. Delete: Lets you remove records from the MetaData table. Delete All: Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the table. (See Projection tab on page 59 )
Projection tab
Reports the full path and name of the file. (See History tab on page 59 ) The Projection tab allows you to view and change the projection of your files. Coordinate System:
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been applied to the data contained in the image channel.
PCI Geomatics 59
Allows you to select a coordinate system for a file. The available systems are:
Geomatica Focus
Bounds: Allows you to show the bounding coordinates of your file in either geocoded (Eastings and Northings) or geographic (latitude and longitude) units for UTM, SPCS, and other coordinate systems. Bounding coordinates are not shown for the Pixel option. Long/Lat displays the bounding coordinates in geographic units only. Meter and foot displays the bounding coordinates in geocoded units only. Upper left:
Earth Model: Opens the Earth Model dialog box, where you can choose from a list of datum and ellipsoids to define your coordinate system. More: Opens the UTM, State Plane Zones, or the Projection definition panel if you chose UTM, SPCS, or Other from the Coordinate System box. UTM panel: Lists the following choices depending on the type of coordinate system you chose: Table 3. This Projection UTM SPCS Other Opens this panel Zone and Row State Plane Zone Set the Projection Definition
The Upper Left boxes show the X, Y coordinates for the upper left corner of the file unless the file contains a rotated raster. If the file contains a rotated raster, the Upper Left boxes indicate the coordinates of the first pixel in the file, which is not necessarily the upper left corner. For more information, see About rotated rasters on page 34 . Values are in the units of the selected coordinate system. Lower Right: The Lower Right boxes show the X, Y coordinates for the lower right corner of the file unless the file contains a rotated raster. If the file contains a rotated raster, the Lower Right boxes indicate the coordinates of the last pixel in the file, which is not necessarily the lower right corner. For more information, see About rotated rasters on page 34 . Values are in the units of the selected coordinate system.
PCI Geomatics 60
Geomatica Focus
Rotation: The Rotation boxes indicate the amount the data is rotated. For more information, see About rotated rasters on page 34 . Pixel Size X:
Lets you change the file name or description appearing in the Files tree. Type: Reports layer type. Size on disk:
Reports the horizontal pixel size in the units of the selected coordinate system. Pixel Size Y: Reports the vertical pixel size in the units of the selected coordinate system.
Reports the disk size of the layer. Creation date: Reports when the layer was created. Last updated:
Reports the last time the GCP file was changed. Number of GCPs: Reports the number of GCPs in the layer. (See History tab on page 61 )
The History tab allows you to review the processing history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been applied to the data contained in the image channel. (See MetaData tab on page 62 )
Geomatica Focus
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with metadata names and values associated with the pseudo-color table file. Name: The name column shows the name of the metadata file. Value:
change several of the attributes for look-up table (LUT) files. You can review the file history, and add or remove metadata. (See General tab on page 62 )
General tab
The General tab allows you to change generic information about your file and read other file information. Description:
The value column lets you enter a new value for the metadata file. Add:
Lets you change the file name or description appearing in the Files tree. Type:
Lets you add records to the MetaData table. Reports layer type. Delete: Size on disk: Lets you remove records from the MetaData table. Reports the disk size of the layer. Delete All: Creation date: Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the table. Reports when the layer was created. Last updated: Reports the last time the LUT file was changed. (See History tab on page 63 )
62
Geomatica Focus
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been applied to the data contained in the table. (See MetaData tab on page 63 )
Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the table.
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with metadata names and values associated with the Look-up Table (LUT) file. Name: The name column shows the name of the metadata file.
General tab
Under the General tab, you can change the description of an orbit file layer and read other file information. Description:
Value: The value column lets you enter a new value for the metadata file. Add: Reports layer type. Lets you add records to the MetaData table. Size on Disk: Delete: Reports the size of the layer in bytes. Lets you remove records from the MetaData table. Creation date: Delete All: Reports the layer creation date.
PCI Geomatics 63
Lets you change the file name or description appearing in the Files tree. Type:
Geomatica Focus
Last updated: Reports the last date the file was changed. (See History tab on page 64 )
Lets you remove records from the MetaData table. Delete All: Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the table.
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been applied to the data contained in the image channel. (See MetaData tab on page 64 )
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with metadata names and values associated with an orbit file. Name: The name column shows the name of the metadata file. Value: The value column lets you enter a new value for the metadata file. Add: Lets you add records to the MetaData table. Delete:
PCI Geomatics
General tab
You can change information about your file and read other file information. Description: Lets you change the file name or description appearing in the Files tree. Type: Reports layer type. Size on disk:
64
Geomatica Focus
Reports the disk size of the layer. Creation date: Reports when the layer was created. Last updated: Reports the last time the pseudo-color table file was changed. (See History tab on page 65 )
Lets you enter a new value for the metadata file. Add: Lets you add records to the MetaData table. Delete: Lets you remove records from the MetaData table. Delete All: Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the table.
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been applied to the data contained in the image channel. (See MetaData tab on page 65 )
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with metadata names and values associated with the pseudo-color table file. Name: Shows the name of the metadata file. Value:
General tab
You can change generic information about your file and read other file information. Description:
PCI Geomatics 65
Geomatica Focus
Lets you change the file name or description appearing in the Files tree. Type: Reports layer type.
Overviews: Reports available overviews in the raster file. Size on disk: (See History tab on page 66 ) Reports the size of the layer in bytes. Creation date: Reports when the layer was created. Last updated: (See MetaData tab on page 66 ) Reports the last time the raster file was changed. Locking Status: Gives the raster layer read only status. Read-only Raster layers appear in the Files Tree with a red #X# next to the raster icon. Raster Size: Reports the size of the raster layer in pixels and lines. Data Type: Reports the bit depth of the of the raster layer as one of the following data types:
PCI Geomatics 66
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been applied to the data contained in the image channel.
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with metadata names and values associated with the Raster file. Name: Shows the name of the metadata file. Value: Lets you enter a new value for the metadata file. Add:
Geomatica Focus
Lets you add records to the MetaData table. Delete: Lets you remove records from the MetaData table. Delete All: Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the table.
Reports layer type. Size on disk: Reports the disk size of the layer. Creation date: Reports when the layer was created. Last updated:
Reports the last time the Signatures file was changed. (See History tab on page 67 )
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been applied to the data contained in the image channel. (See MetaData tab on page 67 )
General tab
Under the General tab you can change information about your file and read other file information. Description: Lets you change the file name or description appearing in the Files tree. Type:
PCI Geomatics
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with metadata names and values associated with the pseudo-color table file. Name: Shows the name of the metadata file.
67
Geomatica Focus
Value: Lets you enter a new value for the metadata file.
Lets you change the file name or description appearing in the Files tree. Type:
Add: Reports layer type. Lets you add records to the MetaData table. Size on Disk: Delete: Reports the size of the layer in bytes. Lets you remove records from the MetaData table. Creation date: Delete All: Reports the layer creation date. Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the table. Last updated: Reports the last date the file was changed. (See History tab on page 68 )
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been applied to the data contained in the image channel. (See MetaData tab on page 68 )
General tab
You can change the description of your file and read other file information. Description:
PCI Geomatics
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with metadata names and values associated with a text file.
68
Geomatica Focus
Description: Lets you change the file description appearing in the Files tree. Name:
Lets you enter a new value for the metadata file. Add: Lets you add records to the MetaData table. Delete: Lets you remove records from the MetaData table. Delete All: Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the table. Lets you change the name of the vector layer appearing in the Files tree. Type: Reports layer type. Size on disk: Reports the disk size of the layer. Creation date: Indicates when the vector file layer was created.
Last updated: Shows the last time the vector file layer was changed. Data Type: Reports the type of vector data. Shape Count: Reports the number of shapes in the vector file layer.
General tab
PCI Geomatics
69
Geomatica Focus
Lets you delete all of the MetaData records from the table. (See Projection tab on page 70 )
History tab
The History tab allows you to review the processing history of the data as a list of algorithms that have been applied to the data contained in the image channel. (See MetaData tab on page 70 )
Projection tab
The Projection tab allows you to change the vector projection and select an Earth model and a UTM zone for the vector layer. Projection: Allows you to choose a different projection for the vector file layer. You can choose the following projections from the list box: Pixel UTM - Opens the UTM Zones dialog box. Lat/Long - Makes the Earth Model button available and reports the current Datum and Ellipsoid. Meter - Makes the Earth Model button available and reports the current Datum and Ellipsoid. Foot - Makes the Earth Model button available and reports the current Datum and Ellipsoid. SPCS - Makes the Earth Model button available, reports the current Datum and Ellipsoid, and opens the State Plane Zones dialog box. Other - Makes the Earth Model button available, reports the current Datum and Ellipsoid, and opens the Other Projections dialog box. (See About the Other Projections dialog box on page 71 ).
70
MetaData tab
The MetaData tab provides a table for working with metadata names and values associated with the vector file. Name: Shows the name of the metadata file. Value: Lets you enter a new value for the metadata file. Add: Lets you add records to the MetaData table. Delete: Lets you remove records from the MetaData table. Delete All:
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Earth Model: Opens the Earth Model dialog box. More: Opens the State Plane dialog box.
table. The RGB Mapping dialog box lets you change or map the channel data to a color element and show the changes in the view pane. Target Map Layer: Reports the source file that contains the image layers listed in the RGB Mapping dialog box. Red: Lists the channels available for red mapping. Green: Lists the channels available for green mapping. Blue: Lists the channels available for blue mapping. Image Layers: Lists the data layers in the target Map layer that can be mapped to red, green, and blue color elements. 1. Select an image layer in the Maps tree. 2. From the Layer menu, click RGB Mapper. 3. Click in the Red, Green, and Blue columns next to the image channel to which you want to apply that filter. You can assign only one color to a channel. The image in the view pane changes according to the new mapping.
71
Geomatica Focus
4. Click Close. Note: Changing band combinations cancels enhancements you have applied. To maintain an enhancement, you must enhance the image again. Remove an applied enhancement and then re-apply it.
Focus automatically adds a new vector layer to the Maps tree and a new vector to the view pane to calculate the vector profile. The Profile graph and table also appear.
1. With a raster file open, open a vector segment or add a new vector layer and draw a vector using the Vector Editing tools. 2. Select the image layer and click Layer and then click Profile. You can also right-click a raster layer in the Maps tree and click Profile. Focus automatically adds a new vector layer to the Maps tree and a new vector to the view pane to calculate the vector profile. The Profile graph and table also open. To display the image profile of the vector from the vector layer, select the vector layer in the Map tree. 3. Click the Vector Editing button. 4. Click the vector for which you want to make a profile.
72
Geomatica Focus
adjustments can be made. Sample: Reports an automatic increment for each pixel along the vector. Pixel 1 is the first pixel at the vector point of origin. Channel 1:
Lists the Y coordinate for each pixel along the vector. Distance: Lists the scale distance for each pixel relative to the image scale. Distances are expressed in units of measure corresponding to the image in the view pane. Close:
Lists all of the pixel values for the color you have mapped to channel 1. Channel 2: Lists all of the pixel values for the color you have mapped to channel 2. Channel 3: Lists all of the pixel values for the color you have mapped to channel 3. Pixel/Line:
Closes the Profile Table dialog box. Graph: Brings the Profile Graph dialog box to the front of your desktop. Statistics: Opens the Profile Statistics dialog box. (See below) Save: Opens the Save Table dialog box.
Lists a pixel and line coordinate location for each pixel along the vector. X position: Lists the X coordinate for each pixel along the vector.
Options: Opens the Profile Options dialog box. (See About the Profile Options dialog box on page 74 ) About the Profile Statistics Dialog Box:
Geomatica Focus
Profile Table dialog box and shows the statistics for each channel in a selected layer. The following statistics are calculated automatically: Sample Min Sample Max Sample Avg Weighted Avg
Reports the channels shown as plot lines in the Profile Graph and as channel columns in the Profile Table. Enabling a Visible column cell shows the corresponding line and column in the Profile Graph and the Profile Table dialog boxes. Current Channel: Lets you change the focus of the Profile Graph to the channel you want. Profile View: Lets you choose between a graph showing grayscale values along either a georeferenced or a sample point scale. Georeferenced: Switches the X axis of the graph to the linear scale view of your image. Sample Points: Switches the X axis of the graph to the pixel number view of the vector profile. 1. In the Profile Options dialog box, click a color chip for the corresponding channel. 2. In the Color Panel dialog box, make any changes to the basic color, color continuum, or intensity. 3. Click OK.
Statistics are a summary for the sample gray values along the profile. The weighted average is the most accurate measure of central tendency among the sample points. The weight of a sample gray value is the ratio of the length of a sample interval over the total distance of all the sample intervals.
Geomatica Focus
The Profile Graph dialog box lets you view the graph plotted from the information corresponding to the overlaid vector and the values listed in the Profile Table dialog box. You can zoom in the graph to look at a segment of the plot. Sample Profile of Selected Channels: Contains the graph with a profile of the channels you have chosen in the Visible column of the Profile Options dialog box. (See About the Profile Options dialog box on page 74 ) The vector profile is interpreted from left to right; however, if the end points of the vector occupy the same X position, the profile is interpreted from the top down. With closed shapes, the profile is interpreted in a clockwise direction from the start/end node. Gray-value changes are shown as a function of distance along the vector. The graph gives a profile of the image layer and the distance along the vector on the X axis. Gray Values: Shows the input channels plotted with the gray values along the Y axis of the graph. Sample Points:
green, and blue input channels. Both 16-bit and 32-bit real raster data can be graphed showing the 16-bit and 32-bit range of values. Distance: When you choose the Georeferenced option in the Profile Options dialog box, the X axis is measured in meters and represents the distance between the end points of the vector. The range of the X axis depends on the length of the vector and the scale of the area or the ground distance covered by the image. Mensuration Bars: Reports the position of the measuration bars in pixels or in scale distance along the vector, depending on the Profile View option, selected in the Profile Options dialog box. You can move the measuration bars on the graph by dragging the left side of the graph to the right. Left Bar X: Reports the X position of the left measuration bar. Left Bar Y: Reports the Y position of the left measuration bar.
When you choose the Sample Points option in the Profile Options panel, an 8-bit RGB image layer shows a range along the X axis of 0 to 255 and represents the 256 possible gray-level values for each pixel of the red,
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Right Bar Y: Reports the Y position of the right measuration bar. Difference X:
X View Range: Allows you to set the minimum and maximum ranges of the X axis of the profile graph. Min:
Reports the difference between the left and right measuration bars along the X axis of the graph. Difference Y:
Allows you to enter a minimum range for the X axis of the profile graph. Max:
Reports the difference between the left and right measuration bars along the Y axis of the graph. Close:
Allows you to enter a maximum range for the X axis of the profile graph. Y View Range:
Closes the Profile Graph dialog box. Show All: Restores the graph to a full view after the graph has been zoomed. Graph Controls: Opens the Graph Controls dialog box. Allows you to set the minimum and maximum ranges of the Y axis of the profile graph. Min: Allows you to enter a minimum range for the Y axis of the profile graph. Max: Allows you to enter a maximum range for the Y axis of the profile graph. Export: Allows you to choose a file and a format for exporting
76
Geomatica Focus
your graph. File: Opens a File Selector dialog box, where you can choose a target file for exporting your graph. File Format: Lets you choose a file format for exporting your graph. Options: Lets you show a legend on your graph, lock the aspect ratio of the X and Y axes, and change the background color of the graph. Show Legend: Shows or hides the legend on the Profile Graph dialog box. The legend is printed with the graph when this option is checked. Fix Aspect Ratio: Locks the aspect ratio of the X and Y axes of the graph. Background: Lets you change the background color of the graph.
The Graph Controls allow you to edit the X and Y axis of a profile. You can also change the graph colors. You can control the range with the Min. and Max arrows. The Fix Aspect Ratio option holds the X and Y axis to the original relationship. The range varies depending on the ground distance covered by the image and the length of the vector. The range default value depends on the image bit depth (for example, 8-bit, 16-bit, and so on). At the bottom of the Profile Graph dialog box, click Graph Controls. You can also right-click in the profile and click Graph Controls. Range Controls: The range of the graph is controlled with the Min. and Max arrows. The Fix Aspect Ratio option holds the X and Y-axis to the original relationship. To adjust the X and Y axis independently, make sure this option is disabled. You can return to the original values by clicking Show All at the bottom of the Profile Graph dialog box. The range varies depending on the ground distance covered by the image and the length of the vector. You can also interactively draw a box on your vector profile graph to zoom into an area of interest on the graph by dragging a box around the area of the graph into which you want to zoom. You can zoom back out to the original X and Y range by clicking Show All.
77
Geomatica Focus
Legend and Color Controls: You can show he legend for the color channels by enabling the Show Legend check box. Select a color from the Background list.
Exporting profiles
To export your profile information, you can: Save your graph as a PCIDSK (.pix), TIFF (.tif), bitmap (.bmp), or PostScript (.ps) file through the Graph Controls dialog box. Print the profile graph by clicking Print at the bottom of the Graph Controls dialog box. Save your profile table to a text file through the Profile Table dialog box. This text file can be imported to any spreadsheet for editing or analysis. You can change the file format before selecting the output file. 1. In the Export area of the Profile Graph dialog box, select a format from the Format list box. 2. Click File. 3. In the File Selector dialog box, navigate to and select a file. 4. Click Save. 5. In the Profile Graph dialog box, click Export.
2. In the Profile Options dialog box, click the field with an X in the Current Channel column. 3. Click Close. 4. In the Profile Table dialog box, click Graph. 5. In the Profile Graph dialog box, click Graph Controls. 6. In the Graph Controls dialog box, click Print. 7. In the Print dialog box, click OK.
Geomatica Focus
image to help discriminate certain features. The clone view command opens a second window for the current project. A copy of the project opens in the Maps and Files trees in the view pane. Clone views are independent of the source view showing in the original project window. Changes made to the project are not reflected in the cloned window. Once a Clone View is open, a new image can be opened in the project window with no effect on the cloned view.
pane. There are two ways to pan around images: you can click the Pan button in the Focus toolbar or you can use the bounding outline in the overview window. The extents for the overview window are based on the extents of all data loaded in the main viewer regardless of what data types you set to be shown. When you open image data in Focus, the overview window shows a smaller version of the image in the view pane. The overview window has a bounding outline that you can use to control the view in the view pane. You can click the bounding outline to pan around the image in the view pane and you can resize the bounding outline to zoom the image in the view pane. 1. In the overview window, pointer to a corner of the bounding box. 2. Drag the bounding box to a new size. Dragging the box in the overview window moves the image in the view pane without changing the zoom level.
79
Geomatica Focus
your named regions when you save the current project. If you add, remove, or edit the name of a Map or Area in the Maps tree, the information is updated in the Named Regions tree. The Named Regions dialog box has a tree similar to the one in the control pane. In the Named Regions tree, only the named regions are listed. New named regions are shown by either an Area-named regions icon or a Map-named regions icon. 1. In the Maps tree, choose an Area or a Map for defining your named region. 2. Use any of the zoom tools, including the bounding outline in the overview window, to define your region. 3. From the View menu, click Named Regions. 4. In the Named Regions dialog box, click the + button. 5. Type a name of the selected region in the Named Region 1 box. 6. Click OK.
the advanced features show raster coordinates for the image data open in the view pane. You can describe the bounds of your named region in Raster, Geocoded, Geographic, or MGRS units.
Panning an image
There are many ways to visualize image data in the view pane. This section covers all of the various methods and tools for looking at the parts of your image data that you want. Panning When you have a very large image file open or when your image is zoomed in, you can pan around the image in the view pane. There are two ways to pan around images: you can click the Pan tool in the Focus toolbar or you can use the bounding outline in the overview window.
80
Geomatica Focus
1. On the Focus toolbar, click the Pan button. 2. Drag the image where you want to go. You can also scroll an image using the standard scroll bars along the horizontal and vertical edges of the view pane. Zooming You can zoom in or out to a particular location even when you have multiple images opened.
Grid spacing
The Grid Spacing section sets the spacing for both the dots and lines. Horizontal: The default spacing is 1.00 Millimetre
PCI Geomatics 81
Geomatica Focus
Vertical: The default spacing is 1.00 Millimetre. The unit options for spacing are in standard paper units: millimetre, inch, point, and pica. The Keep Equal option forces the grid spacing to be equal in both directions. You can disable the option if you want different horizontal and vertical spacing. This option is checked by default.
option to show the grid. Snap to Grid: Switches the grid snapping behavior off or on. Enable the check box to make map elements snap to the grid. 1. From the View menu, click Layout Grid Setup. 2. In the Layout Grid Setup dialog box, click either the Dots or the Lines option. 3. Select a color for your grid from the Color list. 4. Select grid and index spacing by entering values in the Grid Spacing and Index Spacing spin boxes. If you want to display the grid in the view pane, enable the Show grid check box. If you want new objects in the view pane to snap to your grid, enable the Snap to grid check box. 5. Click OK.
Index spacing
Index spacing is based on your grid spacing. Horizontal: Spacing for the index is in grid units. The default is 10. Every tenth dot or line is an index dot or line. Vertical: Spacing for the index grid is also in grid units. The default is 10. Every tenth dot or line is an index dot or line. The Keep Equal option forces the index spacing to be equal in both directions. You can disable this option if you want different horizontal and vertical spacing. Show Grid: Switches the grid off or on in the view pane. Enable this
PCI Geomatics
Enhancing images
Images can be processed at several levels, from
82
Geomatica Focus
standard enhancements that filter images to fully customized enhancements using look-up tables and histograms. Unenhanced image files are often impossible to understand visually when they are opened in an image viewer. Enhancements make imagery clearer and easier to interpret. When you open an image file, it is automatically enhanced in the view pane. You can change the default enhancement. (See Changing a default enhancement on page 244 )
The first step in a project is to import data. If the data files are not in .pix format, you must obtain the data format. If the data is partitioned into different files, importing it in .pix format may require separate imports, transferring layers from one file into the final output file, or a single import. Mission and sensor metadata must be attached to the image data to make processing and analyzing it more efficient. The metadata must be formatted as an XML document in a text file. Metadata is read into the .pix file containing the image data as a metadata segment using the METAIN program. This can be opened through EASI or the Algorithm Librarian in Focus. Conversely, the METAOUT program will read the information in the metadata segment and export it as an XML document. The algorithm METAIN reads image metadata from an XML document that is stored in a text file, reformat the data, and stores them in a GDB file. The required format for an XML file can be found in the document PCIImageMetadata.xsd in the $PCIHOME\etc folder. The XML document file must be in the same folder and have the same base name as the GDB file. The XML document file must have an .xml file name extension. Global Metadata Many global metadata items are optional and can be absent from the data files you are working with. The following table is a list of both required and optional metadata items.
83
Geomatica Focus
Table 4. Required Text data set descriptions Number of image bands Number and sequence of radiometric transformations stored as band-specific metadata. Optional Name of the sensor model Name of the sensor type Location of image acquisition Time of image acquisition Heading of the platform Fore-aft sensor tilt relative to gravity vector Total sensor field-of-view
The METAIN is in the Algorithm Librarian. The Algorithm Librarian lists algorithms in a tree of file folders. The folders are organized by algorithm category. Some category folders contain a sub-category of algorithms. 1. From the Tools menu, click Algorithm Librarian. 2. In the Select Algorithm dialog box, expand the Analysis folder. 3. Expand the Hyperspectral Analysis folder. 4. Double-click the METAIN algorithm. 5. In the METAIN Module Control Panel, click the Input Params 1 tab and click Browse. 6. Navigate to the file you want, select it, and click Open. 7. In the METAIN Module Control Panel, click Run.
Band-specific Metadata Some band-specific metadata is also optional. The following table shows a list of both required and optional band-specific metadata items Table 5. Required Band-Specific Metadata Items Band ID number The number of the file channel that stores the band
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
2. In the Properties dialog box, click the MetaData tab. The global metadata is listed.
the unit for the coordinate#s display. SelectionValue: displays the pixel value at the cursor.
Geomatica Focus
tools require files with more than one image layer to be visible. The Loop tool requires a minimum of three layers to be open and the Cycle tool requires either an RGB or a hyperspectral file. The following screens provide information for using each of the visualization modes that are available. (See About the Visualization Tools dialog box on page 86 )
Allows you to change the frame rate of the flicker action. Actual: Reports the actual frame rate of the flicker when it is running. Control:
Allows you to start and stop automatic flicker and to manually cycle through the flicker visualization mode. Current Top Layer: Reports the name of the active layer in the view pane. Using Flicker: Switches your view between two layers within the same Map. When you select any two layers in the Maps tree, the associated images flicker from the front to the back of the view pane, making it easier to see subtle differences between them. 1. From the View menu, click Visualization Tools. 2. In the Visualization Tools dialog box, click the Flicker tab. 3. In the Maps tree, select two layers by holding the Ctrl key while clicking the layers you want to view. 4. Type a value for the flicker rate in the Speed [frame/sec] box. 5. Click the Start Automatic Flicker button.
Geomatica Focus
The Swipe tab controls the swipe visualization mode. Horizontal: Changes the swipe to a horizontal direction. Vertical: Changes the swipe to a vertical direction. Position [%]: Allows you to step through a swipe cycle while reporting the portion of the cycle as a percentage of the swiped images. Auto Mode The Auto Mode area lets you set and operate the automatic swipe features. Speed [frame/second]: Sets the frame rate of the image swipe. Actual: Reports the actual frame rate for the swipe operation. Control:
Step Size [%]: Lets you adjust the size of the swiped portion of the image in each step. Using Swipe: Displays a file in increments across another; at any point during the process, you can look at a specific percentage of the swiped file. 1. In the Visualization Tools dialog box, click the Swipe tab. 2. Click one of the following options: Horizontal: changes the swipe to a horizontal direction. Vertical: changes the swipe to a vertical direction. 3. Type a value for the size of the swipe percentage in the Position box. 4. Type a value for the flicker rate in the Speed [frame/sec] box. 5. Type a value for the step size in the Step size box. 6. Click the Start Automatic Swipe button. The swipe operation continues until you click the Stop Automatic swipe button.
Allows you to start and stop the automatic image swiping. Position [%]:
PCI Geomatics 87
Geomatica Focus
Allows you to step through a blend cycle while reporting the portion of the cycle as a percentage of the blended images. Auto Mode The Auto Mode area lets you set and operate the automatic blend features. Speed [frame/second]: Sets the frame rate of the image blend. Actual:
Blend tab. 2. Type a value for the position of the blend in the Position box. 3. Type a value for the flicker rate in the Speed [frame/sec] box. 4. Type a value for the step size in the Step size box. 5. Click the Start Automatic Blend button. The blend operation continues until you click the Stop Automatic Blend button.
Reports the actual frame rate for the blend operation. Control: Allows you to start and stop the automatic image blending. Step Size [%]: Lets you adjust the size of the blended portion of the image in each step. Using Blend: Merges two layers together at a specified rate. The transition from one view to another helps you see changes between layers. 1. In the Visualization Tools dialog box, click the
PCI Geomatics 88
Cycles the data forward from the lowest to the highest priority. Backward: Cycles the data backward from the highest to the lowest priority. Continuous Loop: Cycles the data continuously according to the direction option you choose. Speed [frame/second]: Sets the frame rate of the image blend.
Geomatica Focus
Actual: Reports the actual frame rate for the blend operation. Control:
Color Channel The Color Channel section provides options for viewing channels and channel combinations you want to cycle. Red:
Allows you to start and stop the automatic image blending. Current Top Layer: Reports the name of the active layer in the view pane. Using Loop: Loop mode is a multi-view tool that extends automatic file comparison capabilities to include three or more files. You must have at least three layers open to enable the Loop tab. To use the Loop tool, click the Loop tab. Specify the desired flicker speed (frames/sec) and click the Start Automatic Loop button. You can specify a forward (starting with the first file and ending with the last file in the maps tree) or backward loop by clicking in the Forward or Backward options. If the Continuous Loop option is enabled the files will continually flicker. If the Continuous Loop option is disabled the files will loop only once.
Lets you cycle only the red channels in your data file. Green: Lets you cycle only the green channels in your data file. Blue: Lets you cycle only the blue channels in your data file. File: Reports the color channel source data file. Cycle Through All Files: Lets you cycle through all of the color channels in your image data. Channel: Changes the file report to show the channel currently being cycled. Display Ranges:
PCI Geomatics 89
Geomatica Focus
Lets you enter a range or series of channel ranges to be cycled in the view pane. Forward: Cycles your data forward from the lowest to the highest priority. Backward: Cycles your data backward from the highest to the lowest priority. Speed [frame/second]: Sets the frame rate of the image cycle. Actual: Reports the actual frame rate for the cycle operation Control: Allows you to start and stop the automatic image cycling. Current Top Layer: Reports the name of the active layer in the view pane. Using Cycle: Cycle mode displays image data through the color component you specify. The color that image channels
PCI Geomatics
cycle through is set using the red, green, or blue color channel options. You can select image channels to use with the Display Ranges text box.You can also specify whether the image layers will be cycled through the color component forward, starting with the first image channel you specify or backward, starting with the last image channel specified. (See Using the Band Cycling tool on page 90 )
90
Geomatica Focus
More than one channel or wavelength range can be entered. Ranges are shown using a dash between the beginning and end of the range; multiple ranges are separated by a comma. For example 1-5, 15-20, 30-35 are valid entries for channel display ranges. 6. Select a cycle direction by enabling either the Forward or Backward option. If forward cycling is selected, the channel cycling order is 1-5, 15-20, and then 30-35; if reverse cycling is selected, the channel cycling order is 35-30, 20-15, and then 5-1. 7. Click the Start Automatic Cycle button. The cycling continues until you click Stop Automatic Cycle. The number at the bottom of the Visualization Tools dialog box represents the displayed channel. If you do not click Apply prior to clicking Close, the dialog box closes and the RGB layer reverts back to the original combination. Clicking Apply updates the RGB layer to reflect the new channel in the identified element and the layer name is updated. The following is a list of Band Cycling dialog box controls with details about what they do. Select Color Channel: Lets you specify the color of the view channel. The channels in the two colors that are not selected will not
PCI Geomatics
change. Next to the color is the file of the channel currently mapped to the color. If all the colors are mapped to a channel in the same file, these labels will not appear. Cycle through all files: Enable this check box when the active RGB layer contains channels from multiple files and you want to cycle through all the channels in all files mapped to the RGB layer. This function is only available when the colors of the active RGB layer are mapped to more than one file. Display Range: You can specify ranges of channels to cycle through a specified color component and you can specify either the channel number or wavelength. The system cycles through all available channels by default. Speed & Actual: Sets the channel cycle speed through the color element. The actual speed at which the channels are being cycled is also the speed they are displayed. Forward & Backward: Allows you to set the direction of cycling, either forward or backward. Control:
91
Geomatica Focus
Stop and play buttons activate the cycling. You can also step through the channels one channel at a time. The direction of the stepping is set by the Forward and Backward options selections. Current Channel: The current channel being cycled through the identified color element is displayed. When you presses the stop button, the last channel cycled through is displayed.
centered on the cursor in the image. In Black and White mode, you can click on an individual image from the tiled image array. Your image is then highlighted in white and displayed, full size, in the view pane as a black-and-white image. You can also work in RGB mode to select three images from the tiled image array, which are then outlined in red, green, or blue respectively. The corresponding composite RGB image is displayed, full size, in the Focus window. You then have the option of clamping and stretching the tiled image, or each of the RBG images individually to produce an optimal RGB image. With the Reload button you can limit the contents of the Thumbnails viewer to only the thumbnails that interest you. You can create thumbnails of a feature by magnifying the feature in the Focus view pane and then click Reload. Focus will recreate the thumbnails using the extents visible in the Focus view pane. You can set the options in the Thumbnails viewer and then click Reload. Focus will load the thumbnails according to the option that you set. For example, you can enter specific channels in the Display ranges box and when you click Reload only thumbnails of those channels will appear in the Thumbnails viewer. 1. Open a file that contains raster channels. 2. Click the layer in the Maps tree or in the Files tree. 3. From the View menu, click Thumbnails.
92
Geomatica Focus
The following is a list of the controls in the Thumbnails viewer: Display Range:
2, and so on). If the option is disabled, the minimum and maximum of the entire range of spectral bands in the file are used to apply the LUT. Grayscale:
Allows you to specify the channels to be viewed. The default is all channels. You can either specify the channel number or the wavelength. The wavelength is available only if the metadata contains band centers. Channel: Allows you to control the entries in the panel. If this is selected, then all of the entered values (display range, color components) correspond to channel numbers in the file. Wavelength: Allows you to control the entries in the panel. When selected, all of the entered values (display range, color components) correspond to wavelengths stored in the metadata segment in the file. When selected, the channel number has to be passed in order for the images to be displayed properly. Intensity Normalization: When selected, the LUT applied to each thumbnail is calculated using the histogram for that thumbnail (for example, the first thumbnail is channel 1 and the LUT applied to it will use the minimum and maximum from that channel. The second thumbnail is channel 2 and the LUT applied will use the minimum and maximum from channel
PCI Geomatics
Allows you to display a single thumbnail. This thumbnail is highlighted by a white box. Only one thumbnail in the viewer can be highlighted at a time. The channel number of the selected thumbnail displays in the box next to the Grayscale option. When the option is enabled, the Red, Green, and Blue buttons are unavailable. RGB: Allows you to select three thumbnails to display in an RGB format. This works in the same manner as the Add Layer Wizard. If you enable the RGB option, the Red box is active and the first thumbnail selected is assigned to the red color component and is highlighted with a red box. The number of the channel is displayed in the box next to the Red button. The second thumbnail selected is assigned to the green color component and is highlighted with a green box. The third thumbnail selected is assigned to the blue color component and is highlighted with a blue box. If you want to change a thumbnail in one of the color components, you must click the color component and select a new thumbnail. OK: Adds the selected thumbnails to the Maps tree. If no Map or Area is present, the thumbnails are added to the Map tree list. If you have only selected one thumbnail, it is
93
Geomatica Focus
displayed as a black-and-white layer. If you have selected three thumbnails, the layer displays as an RGB image layer. View: Allows you to view the selected thumbnails as full images in the view pane without closing the Thumbnails viewer. For each new selection, a new layer is added to the Maps tree. If no Map or Area is present, the thumbnails are added to the Map tree list. If you have selected one thumbnail, it is displayed as a black-and-white layer. If you have selected three thumbnails, the layer displays as an RGB image layer. Cancel: Closes the panel without saving. Help: Opens the Help for the panel. The Thumbnails tool bar has the following command buttons Zoom to Overview: allows you to zoom to the overview of the entire tiled image (all thumbnails). Zoom Interactive: lets you zoom into the tiled image.
PCI Geomatics
Zoom In and Zoom Out zooms in to and out of the tiled image. Thumbnail Overview: allows you to zoom to the overview of an individual tile within the tiled image. Pan: pans the tiled image. Select Channel: Selects a thumbnail for display. It is automatically active when you choose either the Grayscale or RGB option. 1. In the Thumbnails viewer, click Pick BW. 2. Click a thumbnail. 3. Click OK. Layer Selection When you have several layers in a file, you can quickly pick a single layer for input, output, or display with the Layer Selection tool.
Geomatica Focus
2. Click Channel if the values in the Display ranges box represent channel numbers or click Wavelength if the values represent wavelengths stored in the metadata segment in the file. 3. Enable the Intensity Normalization check box to use the minimum and maximum values in the image to calculate a histogram and apply it to the thumbnail. When the Intensity Normalization check box is disabled, the histogram includes the entire range of values from all the channels. 4. Click Grayscale if you want to view the image as a grayscale layer and click the thumbnail that you want to view. 5. Click RGB if you want to view the image as an RGB layer. Click in order the thumbnails that you want to use for the red, green, and blue channels. The thumbnail is highlighted in the color of the corresponding channel and the channel number is displayed in the corresponding box. 6. Click View.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
the data is not v-cube compressed data. You can use all data bit depths, but the 3-D Data Cube is optomized for 16-bit data. The 3-D Data Cube accepts compressed, decompressed, and raw hyperspectral files. Files must contain wavelength information. You can use the cube even if only one image channel has wavelength information. The 3-D Data Cube can display, rotate, and excavate three-dimensional data. The tool displays the cube in an arbitrary orientation, with a rectangular cutout, using parallel projection. 1. Select an image file in the Maps tree. You can use B&W, multispectral, and hyperspectral data. 2. From the View menu, click 3-D Data Cube. By default, enhancements applied to data layers in the view pane are applied the top layer in the 3-D Data Cube.
File: The File menu lets you import image files, load PCT layers, and exit the 3-D Data Cube. Import Image: Opens the Import Image dialog box. Load PCT: Opens the Select PCT Layer dialog box. (See About the Select PCT Layer dialog box on page 98 ) Exit: Closes the 3-D Data Cube. Edit: Lets you edit a PCT and change the background color of the 3-D viewer. Edit PCT: Opens the PCT Editing dialog box. (See Adjusting the pseudo-color for single values on page 241 ) Background Color: Opens the Change Color dialog box. View:
96
Geomatica Focus
Lets you show or hide the image layer and the cube sides, and allows you to zoom the image in the viewer. Image Layer: Shows or hides the image portion of the data cube. Cube Sides: Shows or hides the cube sides portion of the data cube excavation. Zoom To:
Displays an overview of the 3-D image. Zoom Window: Lets you zoom the image by clicking in the 3-D image in the 3-D window. Zoom In: Makes the 3-D image larger. Zoom Out: Makes the 3-D image smaller.
Opens the Zoom sub-menu. Zoom 1:1: 3-D Data Cube Toolbar Shows the 3-D image at 1:1 scale ratio. The 3-D Data Cube toolbar lets you save files, edit pseudo-color tables, zoom and pan your image, and enable the cube rotation. Save: Rotate: Opens the Export Image dialog box, which lets you save the file you are viewing to a new location. Pseudo-color Table: Opens the PCT Editing dialog box. (See Adjusting the pseudo-color for single values on page 241 ) Overview:
PCI Geomatics 97
Pan: Lets you pan the 3-D image within the 3-D window.
Lets you rotate the 3-D image along the X, Y, and Z axis. Cube Excavation The Cube Excavation Area has text and slide controls that let you view a rectangular section of the layers in the cube. You can change the shape and the depth of the excavation using the slide controls. When you use a
Geomatica Focus
wheel mouse, you can lock the excavation of the X, Y, or Z plains of the cube. You can also lock all three at once and change the view of the excavation with your wheel mouse. X:
Flips the Y axis from right to left. Flip Z: Flips the Z axis from top to bottom. Using the Excavation Controls:
Changes the horizontal axis of the cube excavation. The X option box lets you lock the horizontal axis excavation when you use a wheel mouse. Y: Changes the vertical axis of the cube excavation. The Y option box lets you lock the vertical axis excavation when you use a wheel mouse. Z: Changes the depth of the cube excavation. The Z option box lets you lock the depth excavation when you use a wheel mouse. Flip Controls The Flip controls change the orientation of the excavation. Flip X: Flips the X axis from right to left. Flip Y:
PCI Geomatics
You can control height, width, and depth of the excavated portion of the cube. When you use the slide control, the image and the number above the slide control are automatically updated. The minimum for each box is 1; the maximum number is the number of layers in the data set. The maximum for the X axis is the maximum number of pixels displayed in the Focus view pane. The maximum for Y is the maximum number of lines displayed in the Focus view pane, and the maximum for Z corresponds to the number of image channels in the file. If the image is at Zoom to Overview, the maximum X and Y are the extents of the image. Each single-digit increment removes one pixel, line, or channel from the display. The excavation is determined and applied by default when the cube is opened. The starting point of the excavation is the lower-right corner, X max and Y max, and the top most image layer Z min. You can flip the excavated area a full 180-degrees in the X, Y, or Z dimensions using the Flip buttons.
Geomatica Focus
displayed in the 3-D Data Cube viewer. Input: Provides a way to locate and apply a different PCT layer.
Basic Colors: This is a palette of 49 basic colors that are preset and cannot be modified. Color Continuum:
File: Lets you choose a file where the PCT layer is located. Browse: Lightness/Intensity Scale: Opens a File Selector dialog box to locate files not listed in the file box. Layer: Lets you choose a PCT layer from the file selected in the File box. This palette controls the brightness of the color you create. When you choose the Gray color model, the Lightness/Intensity Scale is the only available palette. The color you create using the palettes is displayed alongside the color that is being replaced. The numeric representation of the new color appears in a series of data entry fields. You can edit the entries in these fields and the new color changes accordingly. The number of fields present corresponds to the chosen color model. This is the palette of infinite colors in the middle of the dialog box. This palette is made up of all the possible hue/saturation combination of values.
Selecting colors
There are several cases where you need to create custom colors. For example, you can choose custom colors for vectors, points, polygon fills, training areas, and more. In each case a color selection panel is available for creating custom color. The color panel may differ, depending on the task you are performing. Custom colors are created using a combination of three basic color palettes.
Color models
RGB: This is one of the Additive Color models and is based on light emitted from a source, such as a computer monitor. It has three primary colors: red, green, and blue. All the colors on a screen are produced by combining these three colors in various proportions.
99
Color palettes
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
CMYK:
Geomatica Focus
2. Click OK.
Option Layer Manager OpenGL settings Setting shape and color preferences Setting up a digitizing tablet using Wintab Setting up a GPS receiver Measurement tools
Controls Visible column options 3-D Data Cube preferences View pane selection preferences Tablet setup Receiver setup Units and report preferences
Controls Cursor and menu preferences Interface warning preferences Zoom and raster preferences Default data-type representations Vector editing tolerances Undo, tiling, total, and vector caching Rasters, vectors, and colors X and Y sizes, tools, and status bars
General interface
The General interface option includes a Warnings preferences sub-category. General interface options include: Render white tiles Delays the rendering of the image when you pan until you release the pointer. When Render white tiles is enabled, previously unviewed sections of the image appear white as you pan until you release the mouse button. When Render white tiles is disabled, you can pan with continuous rendering of the image, which can result in decrease in performance depending on the size of the image. Reload previous project on startup
101
Geomatica Focus
Reloads the previous project on start-up. Show Shows and hides tabs, message bars, the overview window, the legend in the Maps tab, and ToolTips. Cursor Customizes the shape, size, and color of the cursor. You can choose from none, cross, empty cross, target, bracket target, and dot cursors.
Attempting to view data that has to be reprojected: This message appears when you try to add data to a project that is not the same projection as the active map. When you do this the new data is reprojected to the active Map projection. This warning message can remind you that the project has not been saved in the same projection. Creating a new area in order to view data that can#t be reprojected: This warning message appears when data that cannot be reprojected is added to an active Map that already has an assigned projection. Data that cannot be reprojected includes layers or files that have METER or PIXEL georeferencing assigned to them. In this case, a New Area is created for the layer. Modifying a layer's representation if it may affect other layers: This warning message appears when a representation that is linked to more than one layer is edited. By editing the representation style of one layer that is linked to an RST, the representation style of another layer that is also linked to the same RST may be changed if the same REPCODE is used by both layers. This warning message can let you know that the representation changes being made to one layer may also affect another layer. Required input is missing in the Layer Manager: This warning message appears when information for a
Warnings
The Warnings option allows you to disable common warning messages. By default, all warning messages are enabled. To deactivate a particular warning message, disable the check box next to it. You can choose from the following Warning messages: Attempting to view data with METER projection: This message appears each time you open a layer if Focus which has METER projection assigned. Some file formats do not save projection information but do have bounding coordinates. Such layers are assigned a METER projection by default. This warning message can be useful for remembering to assign the appropriate projection to the data.
Geomatica Focus
particular Layer Manager operation is missing and the system cannot carry out the operation you have requested. Fully within spatial operator not available for thematic rasters: This warning message appears as a reminder that you are attempting to use the Fully Within tool on a thematic raster.
When a new raster layer is opened, you can have a 1:1 zoom level applied by default. This is specified by enabling the Load Rasters at 1:1 resolution check box. If you open several rasters at the same time, the default enhancement may be unsatisfactory for all rasters. If you intend to regularly open several rasters at the same time, it may be advisable to clear the Load Rasters at 1:1 resolution check box. There are two menus in the Rasters area that specify the display properties of rasters when they are opened into Focus: the Default resampling method and Default visual enhancement. The Default resampling method specifies how the raster will be resampled for viewing when at greater than 1:1 resolution. The resampling options are Nearest neighbour, Bilinear interpolation, and Cubic convolution. The Default visual enhancement menu specifies the default visual enhancement that will be applied to a newly opened raster. The default visual enhancements offered are None, Linear, Root, Adaptive, Equalization, and Infrequency. The Default overview area contains a menu that allows you to specify the preferred overview generation method. The overview generation methods offered are Nearest neighbour, Block average and Block mode.
Layers
The Layers option allows you to specify various preferences for opening and displaying layers in Focus. For example, you can change the zoom level when adding a new layer to a project. This is controlled by the When Loading menu. The following zoom levels are available: Zoom to Overview Displays an overview of the map each time a new layer is opened. Zoom to Full Extents of Layer Displays the full extents of the newly opened layer. Don't Change the Zoom The current zoom level is maintained when a new layer is opened.
PCI Geomatics
Default representation
The Default representation option consists of a Data Type area and a Preview pane. You can change the
103
Geomatica Focus
default point, line, and polygon representations for vector layers. When you open a vector layer, the default representation set in the Options dialog box is applied to the layer. This default remains a property of the layer while the layer is open. Changing the default representation in the Options dialog box does not affect the vector layers that are currently opened in the viewer. Changes to the settings in the Options dialog box affect only those layers that are subsequently opened. Changes to the default representation for vector layers currently open in the viewer are made in the Default representation area of the Vector Layer Properties dialog box. You can also change the default point, line, and polygon representations for your vector layers, just like the Data Type area. The changes are applicable to the current session only. When you open the layers in a new session, the default representation set up in the Vector Layer Properties dialog box is lost and replaced with the settings in the Options dialog box. To make your settings permanent, set the default representation in the Options dialog box; also, set up the default representation before you open any vector layers.
and tolerances for Search, Snap, and Weed vertices tolerances in either pixels, meters, or feet. By default, the tolerances are measured in pixels. This option also sets the snap feature for digitizing operations. Snap Tolerance: The snap operation is only used on a line or at the start of an area edit function. When the choice is to snap a line or area start to a vertex or a line, the snap tolerance is used to limit the lines or vertices that are available to snap to, given the cursor's current position. Snap Automatically: Is only used in a line or at the start of an area edit function. The snap default dictates whether a line or an area is started or ended with a snap when you want to start or end the line, or begin the area while still within the distance specified by the Snap Tolerance. Search Tolerance: Limits the cursor search for a vector feature to select. Weed Vertices Tolerance: Is used when digitizing line and area data. The value of the weed vertices tolerance specifies the minimum distance between the last vertex digitized and the current pointer position within which another vertex can be digitized.
Vector editing
The controls in this option are used for creating and editing vectors. The Vector editing option sets the units
PCI Geomatics
104
Geomatica Focus
Memory cache
The Memory cache preferences let you configure system memory for various memory cache options. You can adjust for Undo/Redo, Tiling, Total limit, and Vector read cache. The memory cache panel provides a way to limit system memory usage for the current application. The total limit is the maximum amount of memory caching available on your system. Undo/Redo:
The Undo/Redo box lets you specify, in kilobytes (1024 KB = 1 MB), the amount of memory up to 25 MBs available for undo and redo steps. (See Optimizing the Undo/Redo options on page 106 ) Clear Undo/Redo cache: Clears all cached undo and redo operations from your system. Tiling:
Lets you specify, in kilobytes, the amount of memory available for raw image inputs and display caching output. (See Optimizing the tiling cache on page 106 )
105
Geomatica Focus
Clear tiling cache: Clears all cached tiling operations from your system cache. Total limit: Lets you specify, in kilobytes, the limit of memory allocation. When zero is entered, the system uses all of the available system memory as the memory cache limit. (See Setting the total cache limit on page 107 ) Default memory usage: Re-sets the total limit of cache to the default level. The default memory usage is one-half of the system memory. For example, if a system has total memory of 500 MB, the default memory usage command sets the cache to 250 MB. Vector read cache: Lets you enter a value for the number of lines, polygons, and points that can be cached by the system. The vector read cache is independent of values set in the Total limit box. (See Setting the vector read cache on page 107 ) Default read cache: Re-sets the default number to 4,000 cached shapes.
You can control how much memory Focus allocates to undo and redo operations. For example, when you are burning a shape within a raster image, the old state of the application is kept in memory. The size of the bounding box of the new shape, in pixels and lines for raster data types, and the number of input channels are all stored temporarily as an undo/redo step. This can use a lot of system memory. The number of undo steps cannot be computed based on the size of the undo/redo cache. Each undo step requires varying amounts of memory. The Undo/Redo box lets you enter a value in kilobytes. This setting is affected by the total limit setting which is composed of both undo/redo and tiling settings. Adjusting the undo/redo setting lets you make sure that the total limit is divided, based on the way you work, between undo/redo and tiling.
Geomatica Focus
size of the tiling cache, you increase the speed of image rendering.
indicates that the data type will be shown in the overview window. The View box color list box controls the color of the view box in the overview window. The View box color list box contains a color palette with 49 available colors. Additional colors are available by clicking More.
Zoom window
The Zoom Window option allows you to set the display properties of the zoom window. The default size of the zoom window that is launched is controlled by the Default X-size and Default Y-size spin boxes. These sizes can be adjusted by using the arrow keys in the Default X-size and Default Y-size spin boxes. Alternatively, you can type a desired default size directly into the boxes. If the Keep equal check box is enabled, the value of the X-size and Y-size of the zoom window will be the same. The Icon toolbar check box controls the Icon toolbar in the zoom window. If enabled, the Icon toolbar displays at the top of the zoom window. The Show status bar check box controls the status bar in the zoom window. If enabled, the status bar displays at the bottom of the zoom window.
Overview window
The Overview window option allows you to set the display properties of the overview window. For more information on the overview window, see Zooming using the Overview window on page 79 . In the Show area there are check boxes for both Raster and Vector. These control which type of data will be displayed in the overview window. A check mark
PCI Geomatics
Layer Manager
107
Geomatica Focus
The Layer Manager option allows you to specify the fields appearing in the Layer Manager. By default, all of the columns in the Layer Manager display. You can remove fields in the Layer Manager display by disabling the appropriate check box. (See Using the Layer Manager on page 31 )
Points: Allows you to change how selected points associated with a layer appear. The color option allows you to change the highlight color of selected points. The Width option is used to specify the width of the outline that appears around the points. The default value is 1. 1. With several points selected, choose a color from the Color palette. 2. Enter a value that represents the width of the outline that appears around the points from the Width spin box. 3. Click Apply. Lines: Allows you to change the color and width of a selected line associated with a layer. The Width option is used to specify the width of the line used to highlight one or more selected lines. The default value of the highlight width is 1.
Open GL settings
The Open GL settings has preferences for setting the maximum texture size of the 3-D Data Cube. The system can determine the maximum texture size or you can set the maximum texture size manually.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Polygons: Allows you to change the outline and fill of a selected polygon. Opacity refers to the degree of opaqueness. A value of 100%, means that you cannot see another object through the fill color. An opacity value of 0% means you can see through the fill color completely.
The Color option allows you to the change the insertion point and highlighted text color. The Highlight insertion point option allows you to see where text associated with a layer is inserted. The Highlight text option allows you to highlight the selected text.
To select a color other than those displayed in the color blocks, click More and create a new color. If you want to highlight the text insertion point, enable the Highlight insertion point check box. If you want to highlight the selected text, enable the Highlight text check box. 2. Click Apply.
Geomatica Focus
If your device is Wintab enabled, The Wintab device option is enabled by default, and the Device setup area is populated with the Wintab settings. 5. Enter the values of components by reading them from Wintab. 6. Click Test Connection. The Digitizing Tablet Connection Testing dialog box opens. See Testing the digitizing tablet connection on page 111
Geomatica Focus
tablet manufacturer specifications. 7. Click Test Connection. See Testing the digitizing tablet connection on page 111 The setup is successful if a device string appears in the Device String box in the Digitizing Tablet Connection Testing dialog box. If no device string displays, click OK to reset the device setup and communication settings.
2 3 4
1. Enter a puck button number in the Button spin box. If an action is already associated with this button, you can update both the Action and the Modifier list boxes. The Action and Modifier list boxes are set to None when neither an action nor a modifier are associated with a button number. 2. Choose an action from the Action list box. 3. Choose a modifier from the Modifier list box. 4. Click Apply.
Modifier None
111
Geomatica Focus
device is connected to a serial port on your computer. Device settings: The GPS receiver options are specifically related to setting up the GPS that you are using. The Device box specifies the port where you have attached your GPS. By default, this option is set to COM1. See the information provided with your GPS unit about which port to use. 1. Enter the connection port that will be used in the Device box. 2. Choose a baud rate, data bit, parity, and stop bit from the appropriate list boxes in the Communication settings area. You can change values back to the default values by clicking Restore defaults. 3. Enter a value that represents how frequently the points should be captured from the GPS, from four to 300 seconds, in the Capture every spin box. 4. Click Test connection. The GPS connection is automatically tested in the GPS Connection Testing dialog box.
Connection Testing pane. If the GPS connection is successful, the Device String box displays the current geographic coordinates from the receiver. The Location area shows the elevation as long as the GPS can display elevation. If the GPS connection is unsuccessful, an error message is generated. If an incorrect device (for example, a digitizing table) has been connected, the panel will show a device string. The location information will not be displayed. If you want to manually re-test the connection, click Try Again.
Measurement tools
You can set the behaviour of the Measurement tools in the view pane. Linear, Area, and Angle options are available. To read the measurements from the view pane, enable the Generate Report to Window check box. See Reading the Measure tool report on page 208
Geomatica Focus
turned off and the view pane appears less cluttered. (See About the Display Options dialog box on page 113 )
Displays the map with all the patterns visible. For example, a pattern can be a broken line or other symbol, such as sand, transmission lines, or forest. Text: Displays the map with its text attributes applied (for example, font, height, and so on). Scale representation when zooming: Changes the vector display size relative to the zoom level. When you zoom in, symbols get bigger and lines get wider.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Toolbar: Lists the available toolbars. Visible: Shows the option box for the toolbar listed in the Toolbar column. A check mark indicates that the toolbar is available.
Geomatica Focus
Chapter 3
Supported layer types
Generic Database (GDB) technology is available in Focus. You can work with dozens of file formats and convert them to PCIDSK. The following section outlines technical information for layers supported by GDB in Focus.
have the same width, measured in pixels, and height, measured in lines. Layers are presumed to correspond to the same real-world region. Focus supports four raster data types: 8-bit unsigned (8U): Each pixel is stored as one byte of data, and can have an integer value from 0 to 255. 16-bit signed (16S): Each pixel is stored in two bytes of data, and can have an integer value from -32768 to 32737. 16-bit unsigned (16U): Each pixel is stored as two bytes of data, and can have an integer value from 0 to 65535. 32-bit real (32R): Each pixel is stored as four bytes of data, and can have an IEEE floating point value between -1.2 x 1038 and 3.4 x 1038. Focus can also use bitmaps as 1-bit raster layers. When bitmaps are used as graphic masks, they are stored as separate layers. File formats supported by GDB are mapped to one of the four data types they most closely resemble. In some cases, mapping leads to loss of precision. For example, a file format that supports double precision (64-bit) floating point values is mapped to 32R with a corresponding loss of precision. A data type with 4-bit integers in TIFF files, are mapped to 8-bit unsigned format with no loss of precision. Raster layers are automatically numbered starting at 1. A 24-bit TIFF file is represented as a three-channel raster containing the following assigned channels:
115
Geomatica Focus
channel 1 - red channel 2 - green channel 3 - blue Raster pixels are addressed as pixel and line locations in the pixel array. The top-left corner is addressed (1,1) and appears at offset (0,0) from the origin. Pixel values increase to the right, along the X axis, and line values increase downwards along the Y axis. Some calculations require operations at a finer level. Pixel values are divided to allow for more data. For example, the upper-left corner of the upper-left pixel is at 0.0 and 0.0, and the lower-right corner of the upper-left pixel is at 1.0 and 1.0. The centre of the upper-left pixel is at 0.5 and 0.5. The centre of the lower-right pixel of a 1000 x 1000 image is at 999.5 and 999.5.
NO_DATA_VALUE - Image value indicating no data is available. ELEVATION_UNITS - May be UNKNOWN (implicit default), FEET, or METRES. Primarily intended for use with elevation channels and should be UNKNOWN for non-elevation data. Class_n_Name - Short name for a theme class in a raster with #n# being the class number. Should be less than 9 characters. Class_n_Desc - Longer description for a class in a raster. Class_n_Color - Color for displaying a particular theme class. Value is the color encoding using the RGB (rrr ggg bbb) convention as seen in the PCLColor class. ACQUISITION_DATE - Date and time an image was acquired. The format of date is YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS.
Metadata
Focus uses the following metadata tags for raster layers: DEFAULT_PCT_REF - Reference to the pseudo-color table (PCT) segment for displaying an image in pseudo-color mode. This entry defaults the image to pseudo-color display mode. DEFAULT_LUT_REF - Reference to a look-up table (LUT) segment for a default enhancement when displaying an image. SCALING_MIN - Default value to use as a minimum for scaling an image channel to 8-bit for display purposes. SCALING_MAX - Default value for maximum scaling in an image channel to 8-bit for display purposes.
PCI Geomatics
Segment organization
PCIDSK is a data structure for holding digital images and related data, such as LUTs, spectral signatures, ground control points, and other data types. Each PCIDSK database is a separately named disk file. You can have any number of PCIDSK files, limited only by the disk capacity of the computer. PCIDSK files can be shared with users on different computer platforms. Segments are the parts of a PCIDSK database which hold data related to the imagery in the database. Unlike image channels, disk space is not allocated for segments at the time the database is created; rather, disk space is dynamically allocated whenever a segment-generating program is executed. A database can store up to 1024
116
Geomatica Focus
segments, provided you have enough disk space. Twelve kinds of information are stored as segments, namely: Bitmaps [Type 101:BIT] Bitmap segments are pseudo-images. They have the same pixel and line dimensions as the image data on the PCIDSK file; however, each pixel of a bitmap is only 1-bit deep. In other words, the gray value of a bitmap pixel can be either zero (pixel not #on#) or 1 (pixel #on#). For viewing purposes, bitmaps are opened to video in graphic (or bitmap) planes. Bitmap pixels with a value of 1 are visible (they take on the color of the graphic plane). Bitmaps are used most commonly for delineating masks or training areas. Vectors [Type 116:VEC] Vector segments hold lists of (X,Y,Z) vertices, which define point and line structures representing river networks, political divisions, and so on. These segments also contain attribute information in a number of different formats and projection information. Signatures [Type 121:SIG] Signature segments hold statistical data that describe the spectral behaviour of a particular image feature (object). Signature segments are used as input during minimum distance, parallelepiped, and maximum likelihood classification. Text [Type 140:TEX]
PCI Geomatics
Text segments hold attribute data (some quality, such as land use, or quantity, such as temperature) linked to the gray levels of a particular image channel or free-form text (legend information used during map generation or commands to implement an analysis model). Other specifically formatted text segments include an AVHRR segment containing calibration and orbital data, including: Satellite ID (name), orbit ID, year, day of year. Spatial extent information. A single GCP corresponding to the exact center of the middle pixel from the first line of the output image. Orbital element/ephemeras data: epoch, inclination, right ascension, argument of perigee, eccentricity, mean motion, mean anomaly. Ascending/descending orbit flag. Platinum resistance temperatures. Internal target values for channels 3,4,5. Gray level of space values for channels 3,4,5. Up to 5 LUTs used to compress 10-bit data to 8-bit. If a particular output channel is not 8-bit, no LUT for that channel will be created. These LUTs are used by the program named SST. Georeferencing [Type 150:GEO] Georeferencing segments hold mathematical transforms that map all pixel locations in the database image to a georeferenced coordinate system (such as UTM). Orbit [Type 160:Orbit] Orbit segments hold satellite ephemeras data, used in the orthorectification process. This information is read
117
Geomatica Focus
from the original data source, or from a text file. Look-up Table [Type 170:LUT] LUT segments hold numerical tables that map image gray levels to new gray levels. Pseudo-Colour Table [Type 171:PCT] Pseudo-colour segments hold numerical tables which map image DN values to a specific color. Colors are defined by an intensity value (between 0 and 255) for each of a red, green, and blue component. Binary [Type 180:BIN] Binary segments are created and used by PACE programs. These contain internal-only information, such as orthorectification models and neural networks. Array [Type 181:ARR] Array segments hold an array of numbers. They are created and used by PACE programs. They contain information such as SAR-gain offsets and gain-scaling tables. System [Type 182:SYS] The system segment is used to hold binary information that you should not normally access directly. System segments are not displayed by utility programs and are used to hold information such as metadata, overviews, and tiled-image data.
PCI Geomatics
Ground Control Points [Type 214:GCP] GCP segments hold pairs of (X,Y) coordinate positions that locate a point in an image and some other frame of reference (either a vector segment, a map, another image, or keyboard input of coordinates) for purposes of image correction, registration, and mosaicking. Each segment has a numeric-type code. For example, GCP segments are type 214. This numeric code helps you locate a particular segment in a database. When listing segments with the program ASL, you can create a listing by segment type. If you do not know the numeric code for a particular segment type, consult the list above or use: AST Database Segment Type Codes Pseudo-color Tables A PCT segment contains an array of 256 colors and assigns color values to 8-bit images. A PCT always contains exactly 256 entries. File formats, such as TIFF, which may have color tables with less than 256 colors, assigns a value of zero to unused colors. There is no support for alpha channels in the table. Look-up Tables The LUT segment consists of 256 8-bit values, between 0 and 255. It is used to apply enhancements to raster data. It can also be used to encode thematic class mapping.
118
Geomatica Focus
Ground Control Points GCP segments contain up to 256 GCPs, which are used to associate projection coordinates with locations on an uncorrected raw image. GCPs can also be used to relate locations in any two georeferencing systems: in raw image coordinates and in a georeferencing projection system. The definitions of the georeferencing systems are kept as 16-character map unit strings. Projection parameters are not stored. Only projections that are fully defined by the map unit string can be used; for example, UTM, Long/Lat, or METRE. Complex projections, such as Transverse Mercator, cannot be used. Each control point can have an elevation associated with the location in an image. An elevation unit string is kept for each system with values in meters or feet. GCPs have the following associated values: Id: Unique numeric control point identifier. System 1 X: The X coordinate in the first georeferencing system and is a pixel located in the image. System 1 Y:
PCI Geomatics
The Y coordinate in the first georeferencing system and is a line location in the image. System 1 Elevation: The elevation of the location in the first georeferencing system. This has a zero value and is ignored by applications. System 2 X: The X coordinate in the second georeferencing system and is a location described in projection coordinates. System 2 Y: The Y coordinate in the second georeferencing system and is a location described in projection coordinates. System 2 Elevation: The elevation in the second georeferencing system. This has a zero value when it is not used. Bitmap (BIT): A bitmap segment is a raster layer where pixels have a value of 0 or 1. Bitmap segments are typically used to mask images when creating training areas in classification. Bitmaps are raster grids, similar to image layers, and must have the same number of pixels and lines as other raster layers in the database. The georeferencing
119
Geomatica Focus
associated with the raster layers is assumed to apply to bitmap layers. Vector (VEC) Vector layers or segments hold a set of related vectors and can be points, polylines (arcs), whole polygons, topological polygons, or additional database records. Vector objects in Focus are called shapes. A shape has a unique numeric identifier (ShapeId) greater than or equal to zero. A ShapeId is assigned chronologically beginning at zero. Each shape has an associated record of attributes stored in the layer as part of the shape. Each shape has a list of vertices recorded in double precision IEEE floating point numbers and has an X, Y, and Z value. Vertices are coordinates in the vector georeferencing system.
EndNodeId: Contains the GDBShapeId of the ending node for this arc. LeftAreaId: Contains the GDBShapeId of the left area polygon, or GDBNullShapeId if there is no area. RightAreaId: Contains the GDBShapeId of the right area polygon, or GDBNullShapeId if there isn#t such an area.
Node layers:
Node layers must contain the following attribute: ArcIdList:
Topological layers
Focus lets you work with the layer attributes for several topological file formats. The following information shows the required attributes for different formats:
(GDBFieldTypeCountedInt) List of arc ShapeIds starting or ending at this node. Each node should also have one vertex defining the position of the node. A node layer must have ARC_REF and AREA_REF metadata pointing to the related arc and area layers. It must also have a LAYER_TYPE of TOPO_NODES indicator in metadata.
Arc layers
Arc layers must contain the following attributes: StartNodeId: Contains the GDBShapeId of the starting node.
PCI Geomatics
Area layers
Area layers must contain the following attribute:
120
Geomatica Focus
ArcIdList: (GDBFieldTypeCountedInt) List of arc ShapeIds forming the border of this area in clockwise order. Each ring is separated by a GDBNullShapeId entry in the ArcIdList. A topological area shape should have either zero or one vertex. If it has one, it will be presumed to be an internal label point for the area. An area layer must have NODE_REF and ARC_REF metadata pointing to the related node and arc layers. It must also have a LAYER_TYPE of TOPO_AREAS indicator in metadata.
GeoGateway has the following drawing elements: Simple-line Dash-line Spaced-symbol Simple-point Point-symbol Vector-text Solid-polygon Patterned-fill Transparent-polygon
Parameters: Each element has a set of parameters affecting the display. For example, the parameters of the Simple-line element are width and color.
Geomatica Focus
is optimized to use the PCIDSK format. Focus has utilities to import, link, and translate file formats to let you get the most out of both PCIDSK- and GDB-supported file formats.
interleaving and compression methods available for raster data. Overview Options: An overview is a reduced-resolution version of the imported image. Focus can open overviews faster than full resolution images and automatically creates a set of overviews for an imported image. Overviews can increase the required disk space by as much as 15 percent. 1. From the File menu, click Utility and then click Import to PCIDSK. 2. From the PCIDSK Import dialog box, click Browse for the source file. 3. In the File Selector dialog box, locate the file you want to import and click Open. 4. From the PCIDSK Import dialog box, click Browse for the destination file. 5. Choose a location for your destination file. Note:You can also type the name of the file directly in the Destination File box. 6. 7. 8. 9. Type a name for your file in the File name box. Click Save. Select a format from the Format Options list box. Select a downsampling option from the Overview Options list box. If you want to disable the overview, select Disable Overview. 10. Click Import. The file is not opened in the view pane. You must
122
Geomatica Focus
The raster size and type are automatically displayed for the selected layer. 6. In the New Overviews section, click the Resampling type arrow and choose one of the following resampling types: Nearest neighbour downsampling Block averaged downsampling Block mode downsampling 7. Do one of the following: Click Number of Levels and choose a level. Click Overview Decimation Levels and type a number in the box. The maximum number of overview levels that can be created are displayed. 8. Click Run. The Existing Overviews section shows all overviews associated with a layer. The section lists the type of sampling, the associated number of levels, and the overview decimation levels.
Geomatica Focus
The Link utility protects source data by creating an empty PCIDSK database and allowing indirect access to imagery on both GDB-supported and PCIDSK files. Auxiliary information, such a LUTs or bitmaps are transferred to the newly created PCIDSK file. Linking files allows several users to work with data while preserving the integrity of the source files. You can access data across a network or on the same system disk without duplicating large files. Imagery is not copied or transferred; instead, pointers are created to describe the directory location and layout of data. Changes are saved to the linked file only. The link file copies auxiliary information such as LUTs, PCTs, bitmaps, vectors, and georeferencing information. You can link to a remote source file, select a destination file, and set overview options. Source File:The Browse button beside the Source File box opens a File Selector dialog box. Use it to select the file you want to link to. Destination File:Specifies the new version of the PCIDSK source file. Enter the file name directly in the Destination File box, or click Browse to open the File Selector dialog box and create a new path and directory for the link. Overview Options: Produces a reduced-resolution overview of the imported image. You can choose an option for creating overviews. You can also choose to disable the overviews.
PCI Geomatics
1. From the File menu, click Utility and then click Link. 2. In the PCIDSK Link dialog box, click Browse next to Source file. 3. In the File Selector dialog box, navigate to and select the source file for linking and click Open. 4. In the PCIDSK Link dialog box, click Browse next to the Destination file box. 5. In the File Selector dialog box, choose a location for your destination file. If necessary, create a new file folder. 6. Type a file name in the File name box. 7. Click Save. 8. In the PCIDSK Link dialog box, select an overview option from the Overview options list box. 9. Click Link.
Geomatica Focus
select the source file and click Open. 4. In the Translate (Export) File dialog box, click Browse next to the Destination file box. 5. In the File Selector dialog box, choose a location for your destination file, type a file name in the File name box, and click Save. If necessary, create a new file folder. 6. In the Translate (Export) File dialog box, select the format you want to use from the Output format list box. 7. In the Source Layers area, select the data files that will make up your destination file from the View list box. 8. Select an item from the Source Layers list and click Add. You can remove a layer from the Destination Layers list by selecting it and clicking Remove. 9. Click Translate.
your ASCII data the same way you would when using a common spread sheet application. In the wizard, selecting the Delimited option from the Data Format area allows you to specify a formatting character for the table columns. You can either select a delimiter or specify another delimiter by enabling the Other check box and identifying the character in the Other box. The Data PreView area displays an updated version of information. The wizard detects delimiters and file formats when you open a text file. When you select the Fixed Width data format and click Next, the dialog box allows you to identify the number of characters in a column within a fixed width formatted file. The Import ASCII Table/Points Wizard has three steps 1. Import and format delimited or fixed width ASCII files. When you select a file, you can overwrite an existing layer or create a new one. The Display Result option automatically shows results in the view pane when you have completed the step3 of the wizard. 2. Identify delimiters or set field widths before converting your ASCII data into tabular format.The Data Type area allows you to identify how the ASCII data is formatted; by a character or fixed width. In the Import Options area you can choose to either import all records or specify a range of records to import. 3. Select data types for the fields in your table and convert to vector points. Tabular ASCII data does not require georeferencing to be converted with the wizard. Degrees, minutes, and seconds are not imported as coordinates but as fields
125
Geomatica Focus
only. The wizard imports ASCII files only, but can output to PCIDSK (.pix) format. The preview area is similar to the Notepad text editor and allows you to see the ASCII information table before it is formatted. 1. Step 1 a. From the File menu, click Utility and then click Import ASCII Table/Points. b. In the Input area of the Import ASCII Table/Points Wizard, click Browse. c. In the File Selector dialog box, select an ACSII-format file and click Open. d. Enable one of the following options: e. Display - vector points are opened in the view pane and are not saved. f. Save - click Browse next to the File list box and choose a location for saving the output. If you want to save your output to a specific layer within the file, select one from the Layer list box. g. Enable the Delimited option in the Data Format area. If you want the first line of data displayed as a header row, enter a number of 1 or higher in the Header row spin box. h. Click Next. 2. Step 2 a. In the Delimiters area, enable a check box next to any correct delimiter type for your file.You can see the required delimiter in the preview area between each record.
PCI Geomatics
The Data preview area changes to a table when you choose the correct option. b. Click Next. 3. Step 3 a. In the Coordinate Fields area, select values from the X, Y, and Z list boxes. The remaining inputs for the Projection area are activated and the Import attributes list is updated. b. Enter the projection and bounds information in the Projection area. c. Click Finish.
Geomatica Focus
You can open data from an Oracle database, a Web service, a URL, and through Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) as long as the data formats are compatible with GDB technology. Focus supports read and write access to Oracle8i and Oracle 10g Spatial. For more information, refer to #ORACLE# in Supported File Formats under Technical References in the Geomatica Help. A Web service provides access to data published on the servers connected to the Web. You can access any Web mapping service (WMS) or Web feature service (WFS) complying with the OGC Web Mapping or Feature Service specifications, and display the data as a layer in the Focus project. The data is read-only. For details about the Web services, refer to #Selecting Data from Remote Data Sources# under Common Utilities in the Geomatica Help and the Geomatica WebServer Suite Installation Guide. ODBC creates a connection between Geomatica and a data source such as Microsoft TM Access. For more information, refer to #ODBC# in Supported File Formats under Technical References in the Geomatica Help. 1. From the File menu, click Open. 2. In the File Selector dialog box, click Remote Data.
box, locate and select your raw imagery and click Open. When you open raw images the Raw Imagery File Definition dialog box opens automatically, allowing you to define the raw imagery file format. The following controls are available to define data: Header Bytes Specifies the number of bytes to allocate for header information. The zero value, indicates that imagery data starts at the very beginning of the file. Image Size defines the X (Pixel) and Y (Line) size of the image file. These should be the full size of the image in the file, even if you only wish to open a sub-set of the file. Number of Channels Indicates the number of channels or planes of image data stored in the file. Data Interleaving Indicates how multiple channels of image data are interleaved. This field is not applicable for one channel image files. However, single-band data can have band interleaving. PIXEL: The channels are pixel interleaved. For example, in a
127
Geomatica Focus
three-channel file, the values in the file are 123123123..., with the channel values for a given pixel located together. LINE: The channels are line interleaved. The data for line 1 of the first channel occurs first, followed by the data for line 1 of the second channel and line 1 of the third channel. Next is line 2 of the first channel, and so on. For example, in a three-channel file, the values in the file would be (line 1) 111...222...333, (line 2) 111...222...333, and so on. BAND: The channels are band sequential. All the data for the entire first channel would be first, followed by all the data for the second channel, and so on. Data Type: The set of options to define the type of data. 8-bit Unsigned The data for each channel are 8-bit, unsigned. 16-bit Unsigned The data for each channel are 16-bit, unsigned. Values range from 0 to 65535, and are two bytes each. 16-bit Signed
The data for each channel are 16-bit, signed. Values range from -32768 to 32767, and are two bytes each. 32-bit Real The data for each channel are 32-bit IEEE floating point numbers. Each value is 4 bytes long. Byte Order options for storing the order of multiple-byte data words. Used for non-8-bit image data only, it can be ignored for files containing only 8-bit data. Least Significant Byte first (LSB) This order is common on IBM computers with Intel 80 x 86 architecture. It is sometimes known as swapped or little endian. In LSB order, a 16U-pixel value of 1 would be expressed as two bytes, the first a 1, and the second a 0. Most Significant Byte first (MSB) This is the order common on Sun, IBM, RS/6000, HP, SGI, and Mac systems. It is also known as unswapped, big endian, or Motorola order. In MSB order a 16U-pixel value of one would be expressed as two bytes, the first a zero, and the second a one. The default selected on the panel is the byte order of the local system. In the Raw Imagery Definition dialog box, click Accept. A new header file is created with the file name extension .pox.
Geomatica Focus
The new raw configuration file is an auxiliary file that contains layout information for the imagery that you provide. Focus automatically recognizes the new raw file without redefining it. The following is an example of the file produced for a simple 1000 x 1000 8-bit single-channel image. Auxiliary Target: rawimage.bil Raw Definition: 1000 1000 1 ChanDefinition - 1: 8U 0 1 1000 Swapped Once the .pox file is created, you cannot define the raw file again until the .pox file is deleted. When experimenting with possible raw file definitions, an .pox file is not recommended. You can work directly with all items in the control pane under both the Maps and Files tabs. You can rename and remove data whether or not you are working with a project file.
images and associated metadata are considered image data sets. Channels, other than those containing image data set bands, can exist in a PCIDSK file. Metadata is not associated with ancillary raster data or raster maps produced from image analysis. Focus supports image metadata to accommodate hyperspectral processing and analysis through PCIDSK files. Image metadata must be formatted as an XML document in a text file. The METAIN program reads the metadata from the XML document and writes it to a metadata segment in the PCIDSK file that contains the associated image data. Existing metadata is overwritten. The METAOUT program reads metadata from a segment in the PCIDSK file and formats it as an XML document. The required format of an image metadata XML document is specified by the XML schema stored in the PCI ImageMetadata.xsd file if the $PCIHOME/etc directory of the Geomatica installation CD.
Geomatica Focus
coordinates.
the top of the projection sub-topic in the PROJECTION section. Table 8. Supported Projections Code ACEA Class conic Name Albers Conical Equal Area Earth Model ellipsoid or sphere sphere
AE
CASS EC
Cassini (or ellipsoid or Cassini-Soldner) sphere Equidistant ellipsoid or Conic (or Simple sphere Conic, or Conic)
ER
Equirectangular (or Equidistant Cylindrical, or cylindrical Simple Cylindrical, or Rectangular, or Plate Carree) azimuthal pseudocylindric Gnomonic (or Gnomic) Goode#s Homolosine
sphere
GNO GOOD
Supported projections
The following table lists the projections supported in Focus. The information for each projection is repeated at
PCI Geomatics
130
Geomatica Focus
Code
Class
Name Krovak
Name Robinson Rectified Skew Orthomorphic Sinusoidal (or SansonFlamsteed) Space Oblique Mercator
Earth Model sphere ellipsoid or sphere sphere sphere ellipsoid or sphere Clarke 1866 (NAD27) or GRS 1980 (NAD83) ellipsoid or sphere ellipsoid or sphere ellipsoid or sphere sphere
KROV conic
LAEA
sphere
LCC
Lambert ellipsoid or Conformal Conic sphere ellipsoid or sphere sphere ellipsoid or sphere
Longitude/ LONG/ not a Latitude (or LAT projection Geographic) MC MER cylindrical Miller Cylindrical cylindrical Mercator Modif modif Stereographic azimuthal Conformal (or Alaska Grid) azimuthal Orthographic
usually State Plane conic or Coordinate cylindrical System Transverse cylindrical Mercator (or Gauss-Krueger) azimuthal Universal Polar Stereographic
MSC OG
OM
Oblique Mercator (or Oblique ellipsoid or cylindrical Cylindrical, or sphere Orthomorphic, or Hotine) conic Polyconic ellipsoid or sphere ellipsoid or sphere
PC PS
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
projection set. User-defined projections are shown under the User Projections tab in the Other Georeference Units dialog box. By accepting a user projection, the supported projection and the associated parameters are recognized. You can view the parameters for the projection by clicking More after accepting the User Projection that has been selected. New projections are stored in a text file named userproj.txt that may exist either locally or in the $PCIHOME/etc subdirectory, or both. New user projections may be brought into the system by editing userproj.txt with a text-editor and adding the parameters for the projection. A template of the fields supported is included in userproj.txt that exists in the etc sub-directory in the comment lines at the top of the file. When working with new projects, keep these rules in mind: Each non-comment line will consist of a field identifier (e.g. ProjectionName) and a value for the field (e.g. 'UKNatGrid'). There would be one or more spaces separating the field identifier and the field value. The field identifier and value must fit on one line. Although the present user projection examples have the field identifier first followed by the field value, the field value followed by the field identifier is also supported. Processing for the field identifiers is not case-sensitive, so it doesn#t matter if upper or lower case or some combination of the two is used. Blank lines are acceptable in the file and will be skipped. If a field value has spaces in it, it should be
PCI Geomatics
enclosed in double-quotes. For example, ProjectionDescription 'British National Grid.' Comments follow an exclamation mark. If the line begins with an exclamation mark, the whole line is a comment. Trailing comments in a given line are acceptable. Processing for a given projection begins when a 'ProjectionName' record is read and ends with the next 'ProjectionName' record or when the end of the file is reached. Other than that the order of the other records for the projection does not matter. Different projections require different parameters. These fields can be defined for any user-defined projection set: ProjectionName: This is the user-defined name that will be presented for the projection set. This can be 11 printable characters at most. For example, ProjectionName 'UKNatGrid.' ProjectionDescription: This is the descriptive text to present with the ProjectionName. Although there is no maximum size, the ProjectionDescription should be short and no more than 64 characters. If there are spaces in the description, it should be enclosed in double-quotes. For example, ProjectionDescription 'British National Grid.' MapUnits: These are the actual units of the projection set and would correspond to the units string built up by using the 'Generic Projections'. This can be 16 characters at most.
132
Geomatica Focus
For example, you can use either MapUnits 'tm e9' or MapUnits 'TM E009.'
(USA, NADCON)) #E008# (GRS 1980) defaults to #D-02# (NAD83 (USA, NADCON)) #E019# (Normal Sphere) defaults to #D800# #E012# (WGS 84) defaults to #D000# #E005# (WGS 72) defaults to #D186# New Ellipsoids A new ellipsoid not supported at present can be defined by adding an entry in the ellipsoid text file. To add the definition once so it is globally available to all users (and if you have write-permission to the file), the new definition would be added to $PCIHOME/etc/ellips.txt. Or the new definition may be added to a local copy of the file. (This would not be globally available to all users.) At the operating system level (on a Unix platform in this example), you could copy the files as follows: % cp $PCIHOME/etc/ellips.txt % chmod 644 ellips.txt A local copy of ellips.txt will be searched before (and so has priority over) $PCIHOME/etc/ellips.txt. To define a new ellipsoid, add the new ellipsoid definition as one line of text to the ellips.txt file. For example: #E910#,#ATS77#,6378135.0,6356750.305 Where the fields of the new ellipsoid record are as
133
Geomatica Focus
follows: E910 - A unique code for the ellipsoid.This would be one that does not already exist in the file. The first character would be E (or e), for ellipsoid, followed by an integer (maximum of 3 characters). ATS77 - A descriptive string for the earth ellipsoid. This descriptive isn#t used at present in the software but a field is expected. An empty character string could be used. 6378135.0 - The ellipsoid semi-major axis in meters. 6356750.305 - The ellipsoid semi-minor axis in meters. If datum shifts are involved, the datum that uses the new ellipsoid would have to be defined. To do this see the NEW DATUMS topic.
mathematical surface used to make geographic computations. An ellipsoid defines the dimensions of the earth. The datum includes the ellipsoid used and its position relative to the center of the earth. Each datum references one ellipsoid, but an ellipsoid can be referenced by one or more datums. If you compare the position of a point calculated using one datum and then calculate the same position using a different datum, the coordinates of the point will be different, even if the datums refer to the same ellipsoid. Since a datum is a mathematical surface used to make geographic computations, it is possible to convert from one datum to another. However, reprojecting a file from one ellipsoid to another will not provide the correct results because the critical information contained in a datum is not defined in the ellipsoid.
Reprojecting files
When you add new data, it is automatically reprojected based on the data you already have open. When you open large, secondary files of a different projection, they are also automatically reprojected, which can make the work slower. You may encounter this situation, for example, when a work file has a UTM projection and you open a file with an LCC projection. If you open the UTM data first, Focus must reproject the LCC to UTM. In such cases, it is recommended that you reproject the data manually and save it as a new file. You can reproject both raster and vector data if the data is in a valid projection, it is in a GDB-supported format, and you know which datums were used. A datum is a
PCI Geomatics 134
Geomatica Focus
Source Files: Reports your source files. Destination Files: Reports your Destination files. Output Format Allows you to choose a GDB file format for your output. Options: Lets you enter an option for your output data.
Lets you enter the number of lines for your reprojection. Pixel Size: Allows you to set the pixel size along the X and Y axes. X: Lets you enter a value for the pixel X size. Y: Lets you enter a value for the pixel X size. Projection Method: Lets you enter a value for the pixel Y size. Earth Model: Lets you select a projection method for your reprojection. More: Opens the Earth Models dialog box, where can select datums and elipsoids. Bounds: Lets you choose either geographic or geocoded bounds measurements. Upper Left:
Reprojection bounds
The Reprojection Bounds area allows you to select the combination of parameters to use for reprojection. It also lets you add your reprojection information. Size: Lets you enter the size of your reprojection bounds in lines and pixels. Pixels: Lets you enter the number of pixels for your reprojection. Lines:
Geomatica Focus
Lets you enter either geocoded or geographic coordinates for the upper-left corner of the reprojection. Lower Right:
Lets you enter either geocoded or geographic coordinates for the lower-right corner reprojection. Pixel Size X:
Lets you choose the data types you want to include in the reprojection. Select All:
Reports the size of the X pixels. Selects all of the data listed in the Source Layers area. Pixel Size Y: Add: Reports the size of the Y pixels. Resampling: Lets you choose a re-sampling method. Transform Order: Lets you choose an order of transformation. Sampling Interval: Lets you enter a sampling interval value. Moves the selected layers in the Source Layers area to the Destination Layers area. Destination Layers: Lists the layers that will be included in the reprojection. Remove: Removes selected layers form the Destination Layers list. Select All: Selects all of the layers listed in the Destination Layers list. Reprojection:
136
Geomatica Focus
Runs the reprojection. 1. From the Tools menu, click Reprojection. 2. In the Reproject dialog box, click Browse next to the Source file. 3. From the File Selector dialog box, locate and select the file that will provide the projection. 4. Click Open. 5. Click Browse next to the Destination file box and select a destination file from the File Selector dialog box. 6. Locate the directory where you want to save the reprojected file. 7. Type a name for your reprojected file in the File name box. 8. Click Save.
pixel size. You can choose from either geocoded or geographic reprojection bounds. Geocoded: Displays the upper-left and lower-right bounds in northings and eastings. Geographic: Displays the upper-left and lower-right bounds in latitude and longitude.
Geomatica Focus
UTM Zone 11 and E000 is the Ellipsoidal Earth model E000-Clarke 1866. This is shown in the text box to the right of the Earth Model button. 1. In the Reprojection Bounds area, click Earth Model. 2. In the Earth Models dialog box, click the Ellipsoids tab and select an Earth model. 3. Click Accept.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Generic Projections tab and choose a georeferencing unit. Click Accept. In the Projection Definition dialog box, type a longitude in the Longitude column of the True Origin box. Type a latitude in the Latitude column of the True Origin box. Click Accept.
138
Geomatica Focus
points based on the projection transformation. Exact Transformation The default order that performs a calculation for each pixel in the file. Polynomial Transformations As the polynomial order increases, the accuracy generally increases, but the reprojection process becomes slower. Thin Plate Spline Transformation Is based on fitting splines to the ground control points. The Thin Plate Spline method is more accurate than the polynomial methods but results in a slower reprojection process. The transform order approximation is only applied when reprojecting imagery and bitmaps. The vertices of vector layers are transformed exactly. For sampling intervals higher than one, the reprojected position is calculated at every sampling interval. A linear interpolation is performed for the in-between values. To control the spacing in the calculation of the reprojected position, set the sampling interval from one to a maximum value of four.
reprojection
After specifying your reprojection, you can select the layers to use for your destination file. You can list layers of a similar type that you wish to work with; for example, you can show all available files in the source list. 1. From the View menu, click BIT Segments. 2. In the Source File Layers list, choose a file name and click Add. If you want to reposition an item in the Destination File Layers list, select it and click the up or down arrow button. If you want to select the entire list in the Destination File Layers list box, click Select All. 3. Click Reproject. The reprojected file is not opened in the view pane. You must open the file separately.
Geomatica Focus
placing each layer on top of the other. In the Maps tree, each layer appears as a branch belonging to an area. Layers let you organize and edit the features in a map. You can break a map into multiple layers, each containing a portion of the overall content. Most layer tasks are specific to the layer type, but many functions are common to both image and vector layers. You can show or hide layers in the Maps tree. To work with a layer, you must make it active. Note: You can add new features to the active layer only. A pencil icon indicates the layer is active.
To move a layer
1. In the Maps tree list, drag the layer up or down in the tree. A line indicates where the layer will be placed.
To copy a layer
1. In the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click Copy. 2. Right-click where you want to paste the layer and click Paste.
To rename a layer
1. In the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click Rename. 2. Type a new name and press Enter.
Geomatica Focus
You can create a new layer by right-clicking an area icon and using the shortcut menu to add new raster, vector, or bitmap layers. When you create a new layer, you must set the parameters of the new area. New layers are automatically rescaled and georeferenced to the area. Any areas with undefined projections use the meter projection by default. You can change the layer type, data type, and the georeferencing when you set up the layer parameters. When you create a new layer, the parameters describe the amounts and kinds of data you can use in the layer properties.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click an area and click New Raster Layer. 2. In the New Raster Layer dialog box, enable an option in the Layer Type area. 3. In the Data Type area, enable an option for the data type you want. 4. Enable an option in the Georeferencing area and fill in the appropriate information. 5. Click OK.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Vector Layer. 2. In the New Vector Layer dialog box, enable a Layer Type option. 3. Enable a Georeferencing option and fill in the appropriate information. 4. Click OK.
To change the magnification of the preview image, click the zoom commands below the Preview area.
Geomatica Focus
Source File:
Transferring layers
Geomatica Focus
6. Choose a layer type from the View list box. 7. Select the layers that you want to transfer and click Add. 8. Click Transfer Layers.
saved. For each saved bitmap, both the file and layer names are displayed. Input: The Input section displays the name of the layer and the data type that you are about to save. Output: The Output section allows you to choose the target file and format in which you want to save the bitmap. You can also select a layer within the target file or create a layer for the bitmap. File: The File list allows you to select the file in which you want to save the bitmap. If the file is not listed, you can browse and select the file. Format: The Format list allows you to select the format in which you want to save the bitmap. Options:
The Options button opens the GDB Options dialog box. (See Selecting GDB format options on page 145 ) Layer:
144
Geomatica Focus
The Layer list allows you to select a layer within the target file or create a layer for the bitmap.
Lets you choose a target file for saving your new vector data, select a format for the new data, and choose or create a layer within your target file. File: Lets you select a target file for your new vector data from a list. Browse: Opens the File Selector dialog box, letting you choose a different target file, not showing in the File list. Format: Lets you choose an output format from the list of available formats. Options: Opens the GDB Options Editor. (See Selecting GDB format options on page 145 ) Layer: Lets you choose a target layer from a list of layers. You can also choose to save your new file to a new layer.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
GDB formats do not have data type options. 1. Click the Options button. 2. In the GDB Options Editor, choose any of the file options you want for your output data. For more information about the specific option for the selected file format, click the Help button on the GDB Options Editor. 3. Click OK.
Saves only the records that you have selected in the Attribute Manager. When no records are selected, the option is not available. Save selected fields only: Saves only the fields that you have selected in the Attribute Manager. When no fields are selected, the option is not available. Output: Lets you choose a target file for saving the layer, select a format for the new file, and choose or create a layer within your target file. File:
Lets you select a target file for your new layer. The Browse button lets you choose a file not showing in the File list. Format: Lets you choose an output format from the list of available formats. Options:
Raster only: Saves only the raster data. Save selected shapes only:
PCI Geomatics 146
Opens the GDB Options editor. (See Selecting GDB format options on page 145 ) Layer:
Geomatica Focus
Lets you choose a target layer from the list of layers. You can also choose to save your new file to a new layer. Properties:
Lets you select an available LUT and gives you the option to have no LUT for your file or to save an LUT as a new layer. Save as default look-up table:
Opens the Output Layer Properties dialog box. Lets you choose to assign an LUT as the file default.
Geomatica Focus
Output: Lets you choose a target file for saving your new bitmap, Select a format for the new file and choose or create a layer within your target file. File: Lets you select a target file for your new bitmap. The Browse button lets you choose a file not showing in the File list. Browse: Opens the File Selector dialog box.
Reports the location of the layer and the data type with which you are working. Output: Lets you choose a target file for saving your new RGB file, select a format for the new file, and choose or create a new layer within your target file. File: Lets you select a target file for your new RGB file. The Browse button lets you browse for a file not shown in the File list. Browse:
Format: Lets you choose an output format from the list of available formats. Description: Lets you change the name of the saved RST. Lets you choose an output format from the list of available formats. Options: Opens the GDB Options Editor. Layer: Lets you choose a target layer from the list of layers. You can also choose to save your new file to a new layer. Opens a File Selector panel so you can choose a target file at a different location. Format:
148
Geomatica Focus
There are three of these list boxes Properties: Opens the Output Layer Properties dialog box. There are three of these buttons.
Raster only: If the layer contains attributes, the Raster only option becomes available. When it is clicked, the raster data is saved without the attribute data. Save selected shapes only:
If the layer contains attributes and shapes are selected, the Save selected shapes only option is available. When it is enabled, only the records that you have selected in the Attribute Manager are saved in the file. If you have shapes selected and you want to overwrite the original segment, the option is disabled. Save selected fields only: If the layer contains attributes and fields are selected, the Save selected fields only option is available. When it is enabled, only the fields that you have selected in the Attribute Manager are saved in the file. Output: Lets you choose a target file for saving the layer and lets you choose or create a new layer within your target file. File: Lets you select a target file for your new layer. Browse: Opens the File Selector dialog box, where you can
149
Geomatica Focus
browse for a file not shown in the File list. Format: Contains only the PCIDSK format. Options:
Raster with attribute data: If you are saving the image with the LUT and the layer contains attributes, the Raster with attribute data option becomes available. When it is clicked, the raster and its associated attribute table is saved to the file. Raster only:
Opens the GDB Options Editor. (See Selecting GDB format options on page 145 ) Layer: Lets you choose a target layer from the list of layers. You can also choose to save to a new layer. Properties: Opens the Output Layer Properties dialog box.
If you are saving the image with the LUT and the layer contains attributes, the Raster only option becomes available. When it is clicked, the raster data is saved without the attribute data. Save selected shapes only: If you are saving the image with the LUT and the layer contains attributes and shapes are selected, the Save selected shapes only option is available. When it is enabled, only the records that you have selected in the Attribute Manager are saved in the file. Save selected fields only: If you are saving the image with the LUT and the layer contains attributes and fields are selected, the Save selected fields only option is available. When it is enabled, only the fields that you have selected in the Attribute Manager are saved in the file. Output: Lets you choose a target file for saving the LUT, select a format for the file, and choose or create a new layer
150
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
within your target file. File: Lets you select a target file for your LUT segment. Browse: Opens the File Selector dialog box, where you can browse for a file not shown in the File list. Format: Lets you choose an output format from a list of available formats. Options: Opens the GDB Options Editor. (See Selecting GDB format options on page 145 ) Layer: Lets you choose a target layer from the list of layers. You can also choose to save your LUT to a new layer. Properties: Opens the Output Layer Properties dialog box.
Clipping and subsetting data are effective methods working with large data sets. In research and testing situations, you may want to create subsets of a large data base. By working with small representative areas, you can reduce processing times or you can use file subsets to test an image process. When you obtain a promising result on a subset, you can repeat the process on a larger, more complex scene. Before creating a subset or a clip, you should consider the output format. A subset file is based on the file type of the source file by default. You can change the output format of a subset to any GDB-compatible data type. For some file types you may want to add or remove information. The Clipping/Subsetting process lets you choose the file data type for a clip or subset with the GDB Options Editor. When you have selected a file, you can work with the Available Layers list. The list of layers depends on the output format you have chosen. For example, if you select a format that only supports vector data (for example, SHP format), only vector layers are listed. Note: If vector georeferences are not compatible with the source file, vectors in the segment are not clipped. A warning message shows a list of incompatible vector segments. Georeferencing is compatible when they are equal, or when one is an under specified form of the other. From the Tools menu, click Clipping/Subsetting.
151
Geomatica Focus
If you want to give the initialization value the metadata tag of no data, enable the Set as No Data Value check box. 6. If you want to save the defined clip region boundary as a vector layer in the output file, enable the Output Clip Boundary Vector check box. 7. Depending on how you want to use to clip the image, select one of the following options from the Definition Method list box: User-entered Coordinates: enters the corner coordinates for the clip region. All layers will be clipped to fit that region. See Defining the clip region with user-entered coordinates on page 153 . Select a File: uses a smaller, intersecting file to define the bounds of a subset. See Defining the clip region by selecting a file on page 153 . Select a Clip Layer: uses a smaller, intersecting layer from a file to define the bounds of a subset. See Defining the clip region by selecting a layer on page 154 . Select a Named Region: bases the clip on a named region you created in Focus. See Defining the clip region by selecting a named region on page 154 . Select a Script Subset File: creates several clip regions on the same image. You can create a text file containing the coordinates and the output file name; Focus automatically produces the series of subset files. See Defining the clip region by selecting a script subset file on page 154 . Use Current View: bases the clip on the region displayed in the view pane. Only
152
Geomatica Focus
available from Area view. See Defining the clip region using the Zoom tools on page 158 . 8. Click Clip.
Geocoded offset/size: defines the clip region by identifying the georeferenced coordinates of the upper-left corner and providing width and length in the units of measurement of the input coordinate system. 3. In the Upper Left boxes, type the coordinates for the top-left corner of the clip region. If you selected Raster extents, Geocoded extents, or Long/Lat extents from the Coordinate Type list box, type the coordinates for the bottom-right corner of the clip region in the Lower Right boxes. If you selected Raster offset/size from the Coordinate Type list box, type a value representing the number of pixels in the Width box and type a value representing the number of lines that you want to form the clip region in the Height box. If you selected Geocoded offset/size from the Coordinate Type list box, identify the size of the clip region. Using the measurement unit of the projection, type the distance for the width in the Width box and type the distance for the height in the Height box. 4. Click Clip.
Geomatica Focus
You can use a smaller intersecting file to define the bounds of a subset. The Select a File Method requires two files. You use one file as input and the other to define the subset. The definition file must be smaller than the source file. The following procedures follow step 7 in Clipping and subsetting images on page 152 . 1. In the Define Clip Region area, choose Select a File from the Definition Method list box. 2. Choose a file from the File list box. If the file is not listed, click Browse and choose a file from the File Selector dialog box. 3. Click Clip.
selected shapes in the layer to define the clip region. To use only the selected shapes, enable the Clip using selected shapes only check box. 4. Enable one of the following options: Extents: uses the rectangular extents of the vectors as the clip region. Shape(s) Boundary: uses the actual area covered by the vectors as the clip region. 5. Click Clip.
Geomatica Focus
the series of subset files. For more information, see Creating the text file for Script Subset File method on page 155 . The following procedures follow step 7 in Clipping and subsetting images on page 152 . 1. In the Define Clip Region area, choose Select a Script Subset File from the Definition Method list box. 2. Choose one of the following formats from the Coordinate Type list box: Raster extents: if the clip region is defined by identifying upper-left and lower-right pixel and line coordinates. Geocoded extents: if the clip region is defined by identifying the georeferenced coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners. Long/Lat extents: if the clip region is defined by identifying the geographic coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners. Raster offset/size: if the clip region is defined by identifying the pixel and line coordinates of the upper-left corner and providing the number of pixels in width and the number of line in length. Geocoded offset/size: if the clip region is defined by identifying the georeferenced coordinates of the upper-left corner and providing width and length in the units of measurement of the input#s coordinate system. 3. Choose the text file containing the coordinates and the output file names from the File list box.
PCI Geomatics
If the file is not listed, click Browse and choose a file from the File Selector dialog box. 4. Click Clip. You can verify for errors in the Focus Message Center.
Creating the text file for the Script Subset File method
You can create several clip regions from one file by using the Script Subset File method. With this method you create a text file containing the bounds of the clip regions and list the output file names for each clip. Focus uses the text file to automatically produce separate files containing the subset of the data. When you create the text file, you need to define the bounds of the clip regions and the file names using a particular format, depending on what you selected in the Coordinate Type box on the Clipping/Subsetting dialog box and which file format is selected in the Format box under Output (see Clipping and subsetting images on page 152 ). Each line in the text file contains the data for one clip region. The line is divided into fields separated by spaces. Each field contains a piece of information about the size of the clip region and where to save the file. Raster extents: The clip region is defined by identifying upper-left and lower-right pixel and line coordinates. The format for
155
Geomatica Focus
listing the pixel and line coordinates and the file name is as follows: ul_x ul_y lr_x lr_y path and filename Where: ul_x is the pixel coordinate for the upper-left corner of the clip region ul_y is the line coordinate for the upper-left corner of the clip region lr_x is the pixel coordinate for the lower-right corner of the clip region lr_y is the line coordinate for the lower-right corner of the clip region For example: 82 115 254 302 C:\Clip1.pix
Where: ul_x is the x coordinate for the upper-left corner of the clip region using the same projection as the input file ul_y is the y coordinate for the upper-left corner of the clip region using the same projection as the input file lr_x is the x coordinate for the lower-right corner of the clip region using the same projection as the input file lr_y is the y coordinate for the lower-right corner of the clip region using the same projection as the input file For example: 433000.000 5876000.000 443000.000 5873000.000 C:\Clip1.pix 432567.973 5876348.000 435685.342 5874343.341 C:\Clip2.pix Long/Lat extents:
23 56 87 123 C:\Clip2.pix Geocoded extents The clip region is defined by identifying the georeferenced coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners. ul_x ul_y lr_x lr_y path and filename The clip region is defined by identifying the geographic coordinates of the upper-left and lower-right corners. The extents can be defined suing a number of different formats such as the following example. For more information, see the online help for LONG/LAT INPUT under Projection Reference in the Technical Reference. ul_x ul_y lr_x lr_y path and filename Where:
PCI Geomatics 156
Geomatica Focus
ul_x is the longitude value for the upper-left corner of the clip region ul_y is the latitude value for the upper-left corner of the clip region lr_x is the longitude value for the lower-right corner of the clip region lr_y is the latitude value for the lower-right corner of the clip region For example:
ul_y is the line coordinate for the upper-left corner of the clip region width is the number of pixels from the upper-left corner to the upper-right corner of the clip region height is the number of lines from the upper-left corner to the lower-left corner of the clip region For example 34 56 400 400 C:\Clip1.pix 135 127 300 100 C:\Clip2.pix
117d46'10"W 33d44'55"N 117d40'10"W 33d38'55"N C:\Clip1.pix 117d35'22"W 33d40'30"N 117d30'22"W 33d33'30"N C:\Clip2.pix Raster offset/size: The clip region is defined by identifying the pixel and line coordinates of the upper-left corner and providing the number of pixels in width and the number of line in length. ul_x ul_y width height path and filename Where: ul_x is the pixel coordinate for the upper-left corner of the clip region
PCI Geomatics
Geocoded offset/size: The clip region is defined by identifying the georeferenced coordinates of the upper-left corner and providing width and length in the units of measurement of the input's coordinate system. ul_x ul_y width height path and filename Where: ul_x is the x coordinate for the upper-left corner of the clip region using the same projection as the input file ul_y is the y coordinate for the upper-left corner of the clip region using the same projection as the input file width is the distance from the upper-left corner to the
157
Geomatica Focus
upper-right corner of the clip region. height is the distance from the upper-left corner to the lower-left corner of the clip region. For example: 433000.000 5876000.000 300.000 300.000 C:\Clip1.pix 32567.973 5876348.000 1500.000 2500.000 C:\Clip2.pix
Clipping/Subsetting dialog box preview window, the bounding outline is replaced by a grid to help you divide the data into the number and size of tiles you want. After you have selected and prepared the data you want to work with, you access the tile output controls by clicking the Tile Output command button. You can choose from two tiling methods and you can control the amount of overlap between each file. When you process the data, Focus creates a new file based on each tile and the input data you selected. 1. In the Clipping/Subsetting dialog box, click Tile Output. 2. In the Tile Definition area, choose one of the following options from the Definition Method list box: Use tile size and overlap:creates tiles based on the size measurement values that you enter in the Tile Size X and Y boxes. Use number of tiles and overlap: creates tiles based on the values you enter in the Number of Tiles X and Y boxes. 3. Choose a unit of measure from the Units list box. The Geocoded option derives the tile coordinates from the input data. You can move and re-size the tile bounding grid to any location within the preview window. 4. Enter values that represent the amount of overlap you want between each of your subset files in the Overlap X and Y boxes. 5. Click Clip.
Geomatica Focus
A clip region focuses attention on a location by hiding the rest of the area from view. The concealed areas remain available and are included in any processes that you employ. You can create a subset or clip of the data. (See Opening the Clipping/Subsetting panel on page 151 ) 1. Open the Clipping Layer list and choose the layer that you want to use to define the extents of the clip region. If you want to view only the selected shapes, enable the Clip using selected shapes only check box. 2. Click OK.
Geomatica Focus
For information on format options, click the ? button next to the Options box. When merged results are written to existing files, associated georeferencing parameter fields are not available in step 2 of the Data Merge Wizard. 3. In the Georeferencing Setup area, set the following items: Projection: You can get the map representation, assigned to the output file, from an existing file by selecting a file option or you can manually enter it. Extents: Are the upper-left and lower-right corner coordinates of the output file. The bounds can be based on an existing file, derived from either the union or intersection boundaries of all the input file, or it can be entered manually. Union: Output file extents are large enough to include all input file extents. No data is cropped. Intersection: The output file extents are based upon the region of overlap for all input files. Resolution: Pixel dimensions can be based on an existing file or can be entered manually. Reprojection Parameters have the following settings: Resampling: Bitmaps are automatically resampled using the nearest-neighbor, bilinear-interpolation, and cubic-convolution methods. Transform Order: You can choose from Exact, Thin Plate Spline, and 1st Order to
PCI Geomatics
5th Order polynomial transformations. Each pixel in a file is included in the calculation. Sampling Interval: For sampling intervals higher than 1, the reprojected position is calculated at each interval. A linear interpolation is performed for the values in between. 4. Click Next.
160
Geomatica Focus
Set Parameters: To edit parameters, double-click a layer in the Select Layer(s) list. A parameters dialog box opens for the selected data type. Click Finish.
Lets you choose a different transformation order for the bitmap output. The following transformation orders are available: Exact Thin Plate Spline 1st order 2nd order 3rd order 4th order 5th order
Sampling Interval: Allows you to change the sampling interval for the bitmap file.
161
Geomatica Focus
Reports the output layer where your input image is located. Output Layer: Allows you to choose an existing output layer or to create a new one. No Data Value: Lets you use a no-data value parameter in your output image file. Output Type: Lets you choose a bit-depth for your image output file. These output types are available: 8-bit unsigned 16-bit signed 16-bit unsigned 32-bit
Transform Order: Allows you to choose an order of transformation for your merged output. Sampling Interval: Allows you to change the sampling interval for the merged output.
Scaling Function: Lets you choose a scaling function for your output file. (See Available scaling methods on page 258 ) Resampling: Lets you choose a resampling method for your merged output. (See Maximum bounds and resampling methods on page 138 )
PCI Geomatics 162
Geomatica Focus
box
Chapter 4
Opening the Algorithm Librarian
The Algorithm Library contains a set of predefined and user-defined programs that are organized in a tree structure. You can expand a category in the tree the way you would any other Windows application by clicking on the + next to a folder. When you expand a category or a sub-category, the items inside each folder are arranged in alphabetical order. Some folders contain sub-folders and some contain only a list of algorithms. The Algorithm Librarian dialog box allows you to search the algorithm directory tree. You can also create your own user-defined category folders to hold the algorithms that you use most often. (See Algorithm categories on page 164 and reating user-defined categories on page 167 C ). From the Tools menu, click Algorithm Librarian. You can search through the categories within each folder using the Find utility or you can browse through the categories based on the directory topics found in each folder. (See Finding an algorithm on page 166 )
The Algorithm Librarian dialog box lets you work with the Algorithm Library. You can search the library and open a Module Control Panel (MCP) for the algorithms you want to use. (See Working with an algorithm MCP on page 170 ) Algorithm Library: Lists algorithms in a directory tree in the Algorithm Library pane on the left side of the Algorithm Librarian dialog box. You can expand the directory tree to browse, locate, and select algorithms. Open: Lets you open the Module Control Panel (MCP) for the algorithm you have selected in the algorithm library.(See Working with an algorithm MCP on page 170 ) Find: Opens the Find Algorithm dialog box. (See Finding an algorithm on page 166 ) Selected Algorithm: Displays the name of the algorithm and an icon representing the algorithm you have selected.
Algorithm licensing
Some algorithms may not be available with the
163
Geomatica Focus
Geomatica license you have purchased. Files in the Algorithm Library that have a lock icon to the left of the algorithm name are not available. Contact PCI Geomatics for more information on your license package and for advice on the best Geomatica license for your needs.
Data Interchange Image Correction Image Processing Radar Analysis Spatial Analysis Utilities
Algorithm categories
Algorithms are organized by themes or categories into a directory tree containing two top-level categories. The Algorithm list can appear in two different ways. If created from a user-defined category, the Algorithm Library list opens with the User Defined category expanded and at the top of the directory tree. The PCI Predefined directory is collapsed and at the bottom of the directory tree. If you have not added a user-defined category, the Algorithm Library list opens with the PCI Predefined directory. In the PCI User Defined category, algorithms are listed in sub-category folders within a top-level folder. Moving down the directory tree, the top-level algorithm categories are: User Defined (top-level directory) PCI Predefined (top-level directory) All Algorithms All Bitmap Algorithms All Image Algorithms All Vector Algorithms Geomatica Analysis Classification
Algorithm sub-categories
When you open the Algorithm Librarian dialog box, many of the top-level category folders contain several sub-category folders. The following lists show the sub-categories for each of the top-level folders. All Algorithms: Lists all the algorithms available in the Algorithm Library. All Bitmap Algorithms: Contains all the Geomatica algorithms that can be used with bitmap data. All Image Algorithms: Contains all of the Geomatica algorithms that can be used when working with Images. All Vector Algorithms: Contains all of the Geomatica algorithms that can be used with vector data. Geomatica:
Geomatica Focus
Lists algorithms on the basis of your Geomatica license. This folder may contain a combination of six sub-categories, depending on your license: Fundamentals Prime Optical ATCOR3 Radar Hyperspectral Hyperspectral Image Compressor Pan Sharpening
Unsupervised Classification Data Interchange: Contains six sub-categories of algorithms: CD Reading/Utilities Image Interchange Oracle Database Loading Tape Reading Tape Writing/Utilities Text File Interchange Vector Interchange
Analysis: Contains the following Geomatica algorithms for analyzing data: AVHRR DEM Analysis Favorability Analysis Geological/Geophysical Analysis Hydrological Analysis Hyperspectral Analysis Multi-layer Modeling Vegetation Analysis
Image Correction: Has four sub-directories: Atmospheric Correction AVHRR Orbital Navigation Geometric Correction Image Mosaicking
Image Processing: Has seven sub-directories: 3-D Rendering Data Fusion Enhancements Frequency Transforms Image Filtering Image Operations Image Transformations
Classification: Contains six sub-category folders: Advanced Classification Data Exploration Neural Networks Post-Classification Analysis Supervised Classification
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Airborne Radar Analysis Polarimetric SAR Analysis SAR Speckle Filtering SAR Radar Analysis
Spatial Analysis: Has five sub-directories: Utilities Proximity Analysis Overlay Analysis Topographer Conversion Tools
Browse on page 164 through the categories by clicking the folders and sub-folders in the Algorithm Library tree. Search on page 166 for an algorithm using the Find Algorithm utility. You can decide which method to use based on the information you have about the algorithm and what tasks you want to perform on your data. (See Searching for an algorithm by category on page 167 .)
Utilities: Has four sub-directories of utility algorithms: Interpolation PCIDSK Reports PCIDSK Utilities Vector Utilities
Finding an algorithm
All of the algorithms listed in the Algorithm Library show the name of an algorithm followed by a brief description of what it does. There are several ways to find algorithms: Open on page 164 the Algorithm Library and browse for algorithms that work with basic data types. For example, the PCI Predefined folder contains sub-folders for bitmap, image, and vector algorithms.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Library continuously until you decide to stop. 4. Click Find Next. The Algorithm Librarian automatically opens the folder where your algorithm is located and the algorithm is selected. If you want to find another algorithm with a similar name, click Find Next again. Note: To search the entire contents right-click the All Algorithms folder or right-click anywhere inside the Algorithm Library other than on a file folder. You can also use the Find button to search the entire directory tree as well as a selected category.
For example, with this option selected, a search on #Classify report# returns any algorithm with either of the words classify or report in the algorithm description. Match Algorithm description using all keywords: Lets you search the algorithm library based on all of the keywords you have entered in the Find what box. For example, with this option selected, a search on 'Lookup Table' returns only algorithms with both of the words Lookup and Table in the same algorithm description. Wrap around: The wrap around option lets you search through the algorithm library continuously until you decide to stop. When this check box is enabled, the Find Algorithm utility continues to show the results of the search each time you click Find Next. When this check box is disabled, the utility searches through the Algorithm Library once. When the search is completed, the Find Algorithm utility shows an End of search message. 1. Locate a category by scrolling down the Algorithm Library list and select the file folder for the category you want. 2. Click Find. 3. In the Find Algorithm dialog box, enter a name or keyword for the algorithm in the Find what box. 4. Enable a check box for any search criteria you want to use. 5. Click Find Next.
167
Geomatica Focus
The Algorithm Library contains a top-level, user-defined folder. You can create new folders in the User Defined folder to hold collections of your favorite algorithms. When you drag an algorithm icon from a PCI-predefined folder to a User Defined folder, a shortcut to the algorithm is created. A shortcut menu allows you to search user-defined folders, open and close any open MCPs, create new categories, show and hide folders, rename individual folders, and access online Help. The User Defined shortcut menu has the following options Find: Opens the Find Algorithm dialog box. (See Finding an algorithm on page 166 ) Close All Panels: Closes all open MCPs in the PCI-predefined folders. New Category: Adds a new folder to the User Defined folder. Hide: Hides the User Define folder. Show All: Shows all of the folders in the User Defined directory, including any folders that have been hidden using the
PCI Geomatics
Hide command. Rename: Lets you rename the User Defined directory. Help: Opens the Focus Help for the Algorithm Library. 1. From the Algorithm Librarian dialog box, right-click the User Defined folder and click New Category. 2. Type a name for the new category and press Enter. 3. If you want to add a second folder level to your new User Defined folder, right-click a new category folder and repeat the procedure.
Using an algorithm
Every algorithm in the Algorithm Library has a Module Control Panel (MCP) that you can open from the
168
Geomatica Focus
Algorithm Librarian dialog box. You use the MCP to control data inputs and outputs and to assign the required information for the results you want. In the Algorithm Librarian dialog box, right-click an algorithm and click Open. You can also double-click the algorithm.
algorithm you have selected. Most algorithm MCPs have Input Ports panes and Output Ports panes under the Files tabs and some MCP Files tabs have additional controls. Input Ports: Allows you to select the data you want to process with the algorithm you have selected. You can use data already open or you can use the Browse button to select other input data. Browse: Opens a file selection dialog box, where you can browse for input data. You can open data directly from any Algorithm MCP using the Browse button under the Files tab. Output Ports: Lets you direct the output to a viewer, to a project file, or to both. You can save the output to the location you are already working in or you can use the Browse button to save your output to another location. Browse: Opens a file selection dialog box, where you can save your algorithm output to another location. Input Params tab: Lets you set the parameters for the algorithm input data.
169
Geomatica Focus
Each algorithm has a unique set of parameters. Output Parameters Tab: Provides parameter controls for the output from your algorithm. Not all MCPs have an Output Parameters tab. Log tab: Displays run-time progress, including any run-time errors that occur when you run the algorithm. When you run your algorithm a progress monitor opens indicating the progress of the algorithm. When the algorithm has finished running the algorithm MCP automatically changes to show the Log tab information. Note: Some algorithms work only on a single layer, but in most cases algorithms can use most or all of the files and layers in a project.
All of the algorithms for Modeler and the Algorithm Library are listed in alphabetical order.
Geomatica Focus
Algorithm MCPs provide the controls for using the algorithms in the Algorithm Library and are linked directly to any open data. If you have data loaded in Focus before using the Algorithm Library, the data in the current project is listed under the Files tab in the Input Ports pane of the algorithm MCP. You can select the input layers you want to process under the Files tab in the MCP Input Ports pane before you run the algorithm.
Geomatica Focus
4. Select Untitled.pix. 5. Click Untitled.pix again, type Calculate surface Aspect.pix, and press Enter.
1. Click the Input Params 1 tab. 2. To change the Pixel X Size in meters, modify the value in the text field for the parameter as necessary. The default value is 30.0 meters. 3. To change the Elevation Step Size in meters, modify the value in the text field for the parameter as necessary. The default value is 1.0 meter. 4. To change the Zero Slope Image Value, modify the value in the text field for the parameter as necessary. The default value is none.
Geomatica Focus
The results are written to the aspect layer in the output channel, which is either the viewer or a .pix file. The correct calculation of the aspect values depends on the proper specification of the Pixel X Size and Pixel Y Size. Aspect Values: Aspect at a point is calculated as the orientation of the plane formed by the vector connecting the left and right neighbours and the vector connecting the upper and lower neighbours of the pixel or the angle between the top of the image and the projection of the normal vector of this plane onto the horizontal plane. True aspect values will always range between 0 and 360 degrees. Zero Slope Values: Areas where the slope is zero are treated as a special case and are assigned a user-specified aspect value from the Zero Slope Image Value input parameter. If this input parameter is not specified, a default value of 510 is assigned.
Geomatica Focus
located in the Geomatica program folders on your hard disk. Module definition files use the file name extension .def. New modules must be added to a specific package definition file in order to be accessible in the Algorithm Library. You can convert your PACE programs into Modeler modules or Focus algorithms without having to write scripts using the Geomatica Software Development Kit (SDK). The Geomatica SDK lets you create your own algorithms and add them to the Algorithm Library. Information for EASI and PACE programming languages is available in the Geomatica SDK. (See the PCI Geomatica SDK).
Geomatica Focus
Chapter 5
Starting a classification session
To start a supervised classification session
1. From the Map tab, right-click the layer you want to classify and click Image Classification and then click Supervised.
An unsupervised classification organizes image information into discrete classes of spectrally similar pixel values. To perform unsupervised classification in Focus, you work through panels and dialog boxes to configure your data files and to choose the number of classes that the computer differentiates. When you finish configuring a classification, you can run the process. Focus automatically classifies the spectral values in the image data. You can view the classification results in the view pane and as a classification report.
Unsupervised classification
PCI Geomatics
175
Geomatica Focus
A project can contain several classifications, each one using different sets of input channels. 3. In the Input Channels column, select channels you need for your project. 4. Select an output channel to store your classification by clicking in the Output Channel column for the channel you want to use. You can select an empty channel or you can over write an existing channel, such as a channel containing imagery of no consequence. If there are no desirable or available output channels, click Add Layer and enter values for channels in the Channels to add boxes for the appropriate channel types. Click Add. 5. Click OK. The Unsupervised Classification dialog box opens. Focus adds a classification metalayer to the Maps tree and the RGB reference image you specified opens in the view pane.
2. In the algorithm Parameters table, click in the appropriate box in the Values column and enter the criteria that you want in the classification. 3. In the Classifications Options area, enable any of the following check boxes: Show report Save signatures Create PCT 4. Choose a training site option from the Use bitmap as mask list box. If you choose an option other than None, choose a mask region from the Classify region list box. 5. Click OK. Note: It is recommended that you use many clusters (for example, the full 255 allowed in an 8U channel) and then perform aggregation to get the actual number of information classes you want. Note: To view the unclassified image, drag the unclassified image file layer to the top of the Maps tree above the Classification MetaLayer. The original image appears in the view pane.
Geomatica Focus
The report also lists the number of clusters created by the classification with the details for each cluster. Clusters are groups of pixels with similar spectral properties. The report tells you how many pixels make up each cluster, the mean brightness value, and the standard deviation for each of the input image channels.
Carrying out effective supervised classification may take practice. It requires you to develop the ability to recognize your target features and visual patterns in your image data. The process can be repetitive, depending on how quickly you can produce satisfactory results. The diagram below shows the task flow of the Supervised Classification process.
Supervised classification
In supervised classification, you must rely on your own pattern recognition skills and knowledge of the data in determining the statistical criteria (signatures) for data classification. To select reliable training sites, you should have some information, either spatial or spectral, about the pixels that you want to classify. The location of a specific characteristic, such as a land cover type, may be known through reports on ground truth. Ground truthing refers to the acquisition of knowledge about the study area from field-work analysis, aerial photography, or personal experience. Ground truth data is considered to be the most accurate (true) data available about the area you want to study and should be collected at the same time as the remotely-sensed data, so that the data corresponds as much as possible. Sometimes, ground truth data may not be accurate, due to errors, inaccuracies, and human error. Global positioning system (GPS) receivers are useful in conducting better ground truth studies and collecting training sites.
Geomatica Focus
same files without re-initializing a new session each time. Focus automatically assigns red, green, and blue (RGB) values to the first three channels. You can select the exact combination of channels by assigning the color channels that define the reference image for collecting your training sites and for doing any post-classification analysis. 1. From the Analysis menu, click Image Classification and then click Supervised. 2. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select an image file you want to classify. 3. Click Open. 4. In the Session Selection dialog box, click New Session. 5. In the Session Configuration dialog box, type a name for your classification in the Description box. Note: When naming classification sessions, enter a name in the Description text field that will distinguish your current classification from others you create.
Geomatica Focus
training areas from familiar colors in the ground cover. In such cases, you must change the RGB values to match the TM bands in the image data to produce a true color-reference image. The task of collecting training areas is made easier by working with a reference image that simulates normal or true color. However, personal preferences often guide the choice of band - color combinations for interpretive purposes. In some applications, you must use a different combination of color channels; for example, channels that fall outside the visible color range. Whatever your preference, it is unlikely that the default color assignment offered in the Session Configuration dialog box will coincide with your choice. You can reset the color assignments by clicking the corresponding cell of the desired channel in each of the Red, Green, and Blue columns. You can rearrange the color channels to see a true color rendition of the image in the view pane.
spectral discrimination in your training sites you can use the channel select (CHNSEL) algorithm in the Algorithm Librarian. Once you have set the RGB values for true color, you can define the spectral attributes for the ground cover you want to classify. You must choose a set of data channels that will define the spectral attributes or signatures in your classes.
Geomatica Focus
bit depth and number of new channels you want to add. 4. Click Add. If you want to close the Add Image Channels dialog box, click Close. Once you have added channels, you must select them in the Session Configuration dialog box so that they receive the classification output. If you have not added empty channels, you must select channels that you intend to overwrite.
colored regions or areas over the parts of the image that are likely to be the information classes you want to extract. You cannot know for certain what the actual ground cover in an image is by referencing only the image; therefore, samples (training sites) must be based on familiarity with the geographical region and knowledge of the actual surface cover types shown in the image. Training sites are areas in an image that are representative of each of the land cover classes that you want to define. Focus examines the pixel values within the training sites in order to compile a statistical signature for each training site class. The training signatures serve as the interpretation key for each pixel in the image. All pixels in the image are compared to the signatures and then classified. You can use the Training Site Editor to create training sites to supervise the classification. 1. From the Training Site Editor, click Class and then click New. 2. Double-click Class-01 in the Name column and type a name for the training site. 3. Click one of the following:
The training channel is now write-enabled and ready for you to begin collecting your training sites.
Once you have created a class with the Training Site Editor, you can draw training sites over the reference image in the view pane.
Geomatica Focus
1. In the Maps tree, select the Training areas layer in the Classification MetaLayer. 2. On the Editing toolbar, click the New Shapes arrow and choose Polygon. 3. Click the reference image within the bounds of the subject area where you want to start the training area outline. 4. Trace the outline of the polygon by clicking at the end of each line segment. 5. To complete the polygon, double-click near the first point in the training site. 6. Identify similar areas from the imagery that match your first polygon. The more areas you identify as training sites, the higher the accuracy of the classification.
polygon option and adjust the line width of the Raster Erase tool. Fill Polygon: Removes the inside of a polygon when using the Erase Polygon option. Line Width: Lets you enter a line width, in pixels, for the Raster Erase tool.
Note: Overlapping your training area boundaries reduces the reliability of your training sites.
Making corrections
1. On the Editing toolbar, click the Raster Erase arrow and choose an erase option. 2. Trace over the training site you want to remove from the image. 3. Double-click to erase. (See About the Erase Settings dialog box on page 181 )
Geomatica Focus
You can also import vectors, bitmaps, or signatures and use them as training sites. The Import Vectors dialog box uses rasterized vector polygons to define training sites. 1. In the Training Site Editor, right-click a class row. 2. Click Import and then clickVector(s).
Description: Displays the descriptions associated with each vector segment. Supported Vector Formats When importing vectors into a training site editing session, the following vector types are supported: ALL_POLYGONS GDBLTopoAreas This information can be found in the MetaData tab for the vector layer properties. 1. In the Import Vectors dialog, choose the file containing the vectors you want to import from the File list box. 2. If the file you want is not listed, click Browse, locate and select the file you want in the File Selector dialog box, and click Open. 3. Click in the Interior Points column next to the rasterized value you want to define. A check mark indicates the segment has been selected and will override any entry in the Field column. 4. Click in the Polygon Boundary column next to the rasterized value you want to define. A check mark indicates the segment has been selected. 5. Click in the Field column for a segment and choose a rasterization value to change the field used for rasterization. This column is ignored if the Interior Points column has been enabled.
182
Importing vectors
The Import Vectors dialog box lets you Import vector segments Choose which vector layer is to be rasterized Choose how a vector layer is rasterized Vectors Table The import table lists all the vector segments that are present in the selected file. There are five columns: Segment: Lists the number associated with each vector segment in the selected database. Interior Points: Identifies which vector segments contain the point information that will be used to define the rasterized value of the polygons. You can select more than one interior point segment. Polygon Boundary: Indicates which vector segments contain the polygon information that will define the boundaries of the rasterized polygons. You should select one or more of these segments. Field: For each selected vector segment, this choice determines which field value is used to grid the polygons. Numeric attributes are displayed. Some vector segments may contain different attributes.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
6. Click Rasterize. Importing a vector does not overwrite existing classes. The polygons are added to the image where no classes exist. This occurs for pixels with a value of zero.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Selection Criteria (Layer): Provides a list of files and lets you choose the input data for a seeding operation. Layers: Opens the Select Seeding Layers dialog box. (See Filling a polygon on page 185 ) Selection Layers: Reports the name and location of your input data files. Output Layer The Output Layer area shows the name and location of the output files. Selected Layer: Reports the name and location of the selected layers.
Properties The Properties area lets you set the Input Pixel Value tolerances and choose from either a four-connect or an eight-connect option. Input Pixel Value Tolerance: Lets you enter a pixel value as a seeding tolerance and choose an X value from a list.
184
Geomatica Focus
Neighborhood: Lets you choose either a four-connect or an eight-connect option to set the kernel size for the raster seeding operation.
The Merge command combines several classes into one. Merge affects the portion that is opened and the entire training channel. 1. From the Training Site Editor, click Class and then click Merge. 2. In the Merge Classes dialog box, select the classes you want to merge from the Source list. If you want to select multiple classes, hold down the Ctrl or Shift key and click the classes you want to merge. 3. Select a destination class in the Destination list. 4. Click Merge.
Filling a polygon
The Select Seeding Layers dialog box lists all of the available input layers and allows you to select the layers you want to include in the seeding operation. Clear: Clears all selected layers from the list. Select All: Lets you select all of the listed layers. Selected Layers: Reports the layers you have selected. 1. In the view pane, click a polygon. 2. On the Editing toolbar, click the New Shapes arrow and choose Raster Seeding. 3. In the Raster Seeding dialog box, select the layers with which you want to fill the polygon. 4. Click OK.
Merging classes
PCI Geomatics
185
Geomatica Focus
by creating a histogram in the Class Histogram Display dialog box. The histogram shows the frequency of training site pixels as a percentage of the number of pixels in your training sites. A histogram should have a uni-modal shape displaying a single peak. A multi-modal histogram indicates the likelihood that the training sites for that class are not pure, but contain more than one distinct land-cover class. From the Training Site Editor, right-click in a class and click Histogram. In the Class Histogram Display dialog box, the X-axis in the histogram represents the gray-level value for the image channel with a range of 0 to 255. The Y-axis shows the frequency count as a percentage of the total count of pixels in the training area corresponding to the gray value.
signatures of two classes; two indicates a complete separation between the two classes. These measurements are monotonically related to classification accuracies. Note: Higher separability values indicate a good classification result From the Training Site Editor, click Tools and then click Signature Separability.
is a relative measure used to control the radius of the hyperellipse for each class. By changing the threshold values, you can reduce the chances of pixels being classified into more than one class. Bias is a value from 0 to one, where higher values weigh one class in favour of another. It can also be used to resolve overlap between classes. You can use both of these measurements to test the training site separability.
186
Geomatica Focus
Maximum Likelihood with NULL class Parallelepiped Parallelepiped with MLC Tiebreaker Maximum Distance Show Training Sites 3. Click Save&Close.
Geomatica Focus
You can display the color scale legend on the side of the scatter plot in the Scatter Plot dialog box. 1. In the Scatter Plot dialog box, click Graph Controls. 2. Enable the Show legend check box.
parameters contained in the training channel. You can preview with the following commands: Maximum Likelihood Maximum Likelihood with NULL class Parallelepiped Parallelepiped with MLC Tiebreaker. Minimum Distance Show Training Sites
188
Geomatica Focus
You can create reports for a signature separability and save them to data files. 1. Click Save Report. 2. In the Save Separability Report dialog box, enter a file name for the separability report in the File box. 3. Click Save.
breaker, enable the With Maximum Likelihood as tie breaker check box. Minimum Distance: forces every pixel in the image to belong to one of the user-defined class types. Maximum Likelihood: allows a null-class parameter option. In some cases, you want to extract classes, but there are many more land cover classes represented in the imagery. Therefore, you want a proportion of pixels left unclassified, or null. 3. In the Classification Options area, enable any of the following check boxes: Show Report: generates a report of the classification data. Save signatures Create PCT: compares your classification with another classification. 4. Click OK. The report should show a high overall training site accuracy. The information from each pixel in the training areas is compared to the information determined by the classifier algorithm. The overall accuracy represents the percentage of training-area pixels that were correctly classified. Your training areas are ideal examples of the classes.
Geomatica Focus
represent the land cover. You can compare the statistics for several classes at the same time. 1. From the Training Site Editor, right-click a class and click Statistics. 2. In the Signature Statistics dialog box, click a class in the table to display its statistics. Note: Similarities cause errors during classification. Consider removing a channel from the list of inputs if you are not getting good results.
Geomatica Focus
Post-classification editing
In most cases, a classifier algorithm does not produce ideal results. There are often occurrences of single-pixel misclassification. A field may contain a few pixels of another class or there may be image data that falls outside training sites that affects the classification results. Class editing corrects errors by combining several classes.
Geomatica Focus
1. In the Class Editing dialog box, click Mask and then click Create Mask from new Bitmap. 2. Ensure the Mask visible check box is enabled. 3. In the Visible Image area, enable the Classified option. 4. In the Maps tree, click the bitmap layer. 5. On the Zoom toolbar, click the Zoom to 1:1 Image Resolution button. Note: Images must be displayed at 1:1 or higher to draw a bitmap mask over the view pane. The drawing tools are not available when images are zoomed to overview size.
2. In the Save Mask to Bitmap dialog box, select a bitmap segment in the Bitmap segments available list. 3. Click OK.
Geomatica Focus
Aggregation is the process of combining classes in order to create a new aggregate class. A maximum of 255 classes can be reassigned in a single session. Aggregation is often performed on the results of an unsupervised classification. A common approach in unsupervised classification is to generate as many cluster classes as possible. With the benefit of reference data or first-hand knowledge of the scene, the analyst aggregates the spectral clusters into meaningful thematic classes. 1. From the Analysis menu, click Image Classification and then click Post Classification Analysis and then click Aggregation. 2. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select a file. 3. Click Open.
channels. This is done using the Channel Setup dialog box. Input Channel This is the channel you want to aggregate and is typically the result of an unsupervised classification. Output Channel This is an empty channel. You store the results of the aggregation in this channel. 1. In the Channel Setup dialog box, select an unsupervised classification channel from the Channels available list. 2. Select an empty channel or an unfinished aggregation result from the Output list. 3. Click OK.
Setting up an aggregation
Channel Setup Before you can perform an aggregation, you must specify the database channels that serve as the input and output
PCI Geomatics
193
Geomatica Focus
Normal mode Displays the aggregate classes along with the original, as yet unassigned, classes. Input classes Displays all the original input classes. Current classes Displays the classes that are currently selected in the Input Classes list. Unassigned classes Displays only the unassigned classes. Input classes that have been assigned to an aggregate will be blacked out. Aggregate classes Displays all the current aggregates. Current aggregate classes Displays the aggregates that are currently selected in the Aggregate Classes list. Highlight color Lets you choose a color for the class. Input Classes
PCI Geomatics
This table lists all of the classes in the selected input channel. Use this table to locate and select the set of classes to include in each of the aggregate classes. You can select multiple classes by holding down Shift or Ctrl while clicking a selection. There are several tools available to assist you in the selection process: Select Class at Cursor Locates the class at the current cursor location within the view pane. Highlight Classes Displays the selected input classes in the chosen highlight color, as selected in the View Controls area. PCT Changes the current pseudo-color table. Aggregate Classes This table contains a list of all the aggregate classes. In addition, there are four tools available to assist you: New Creates a new aggregate class. Delete
194
Geomatica Focus
Removes an aggregate class from the list. Class Initialization Save Saves all the details of the aggregation session to a text file. The following example of a text file that describes three aggregate classes: 1 | Water |0 |0 |255| Water class | 10,20 2 | Crop |0 |255 |0 | Crops | 3 | Other Class |255|0 |0 | Water class | 40 To help you to identify and locate classes, use the Highlight color feature. The selected class(es) assume the highlight color. Use the Highlight color palette to change the color used for highlighting. 1. In the Aggregate Classes area, click New. 2. Double-click the Name column for the new class and type a name. 3. Click the Color column for the new class and choose a color. The Add and Remove tasks are only active after selections are made in both lists. 1. Select a row containing the class you want to add from the Input Classes area. If you want to select multiple rows, hold down the Ctrl or Shift key while selecting rows. 2. Select the row containing the aggregate class that is to receive the input class. 3. Click Add. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 until the input classes are assigned to the appropriate aggregate classes. 5. Click Apply to Output Channel.
Geomatica Focus
Generating a PCT
1. From the Aggregate dialog box, click PCT in the Input Classes area. 2. In the PCT dialog box, click the Generate PCT tab. 3. For each of the red, green, or blue channel designations, select a channel from the Channels available list. 4. Click OK.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Importing a PCT
1. From the Aggregate dialog box, click PCT in the Input Classes area. 2. In the PCT dialog box, click the Import PCT tab. 3. Click File. 4. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select the file containing the PCT segment you want to import, and click Open. 5. Click Open. 6. n the PCT dialog box, select a segment in the list. 7. Click OK.
Save intermediate results. Generate different aggregation scenarios. From the Aggregate dialog box, click Save. In the Save Aggregate Session dialog box, click File. In the File Selector dialog box, select a destination folder. Type a file name in the File name list box. Choose a file extension from the Files of type list box. Click Open. Click Accept.
Aggregate sessions are saved as .txt files by default. The following example shows a typical line in a saved aggregate text file. 1 | Rural | 0 | 204 | 0 | | 3, 4 This aggregate line shows the following information: Class value: 1 Class name: Rural RGB color: Red-0 Green-204 Blue-0 Description: None Input class codes: Classes 3 and 4 were combined to create the aggregate.
196
Geomatica Focus
2. In the Class Initialization dialog box, click the Text File tab. 3. Click Text File. 4. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select the aggregate text file, and click Open. If you want to overwrite the aggregate class, enable the Overwrite existing classes check box. 5. Click OK.
You can edit any of the following fields in the table for the selected channel: 6. 7. 8. 9. Value Name Color Description If you want to replace all current classes, enable the Overwrite existing classes check box. 10. Click OK.
To open a session
1. From the Analysis menu, click Image Classification and then click Post Classification Analysis and then click Class Labelling. 2. From the File Selector dialog box, locate and select a file, and click Open.
Geomatica Focus
Class labelling is normally done after an unsupervised classification, since the class values, names, and colors have not been previously assigned. Supervised: You can use the Class Labelling dialog box after a supervised classification to: Re-label characteristics that were labelled incorrectly in the Training Site Editor before classification. Label items that were not labelled prior to the classification step for whatever reason. Add a level of transparency. Add a more detailed description. You can change any of the items in the table. To keep a change, click Save.
Unsupervised:
PCI Geomatics 198
Geomatica Focus
Initializing a new set of classes for a class labelling session is done using the Class Initialization dialog box. You can import entries for the class table from a classification channel. 1. From the Class Initialization dialog box, click the Channel tab. 2. Click File. 3. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select the file containing the channel whose classes you want to import, and click Open. 4. In the Class Initialization dialog box, select a classification channel in the Channels available list. If you want to replace all current classes, enable the Overwrite existing classes check box. 5. Click OK.
To delete a class
1. In the Class Labelling dialog box, select a class. 2. Click Delete.
To initialize a class
1. In the Class Labelling dialog box, select a class. 2. Click Class Initialization. Class Initialization dialog box appears.
To save changes
1. Click Save.
Class or aggregate details are stored as .txt files. To import this information, it must conform to a single recognizable format. The file is limited to one class per line and has seven fields delimited by a | character: Value | Name | Red | Green | Blue | Desc | AssociatedDesc
199
Geomatica Focus
Value is an integer representing the class code. Name is a character string containing the class name. Red is a number between 0-255 depicting the red component of the RGB color. Green is a number between 0-255 representing the green component of the RGB color. Blue is a number between 0-255 representing the blue component of the RGB color. Desc is a character string that provides a description for the class. AssociatedDesc is only used in an Aggregation session. It contains the description of the original input classes that are associated with the aggregate. The following is an example of a text file that contains three classes: 1|Water|0 |0 |255| Water class| | 2|Crop |0 |255|0 |Crops| | 3|Other|255|0 |0 |Water class| | 1. From the Class Initialization dialog box, click the Text File tab. 2. Click Text File. 3. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select the file containing the classes you want to import, and click Open. If you want to replace all current classes, enable the Overwrite existing classes check box. 4. Click OK.
PCI Geomatics
200
Geomatica Focus
areas: Operations Select Classified Image Load Reference Image Generate Random Sample Samples from Vectors Accuracy Report Clear Sample List 1. From the Accuracy Assessment dialog box, click Load Reference Image. 2. In the Load Reference Image dialog box, select either one or three image channels from the Channels available list. If you choose only one channel, select a PCT segment from the PCTs availablelist. 3. Click OK.
Assign Reference Class to Sample This area contains a table listing all the categories in the selected classified image. The assignment of class and name values to the test pixels is based upon the entries in this table. Random Sample List This area contains an information table for all the randomly generated test pixels.
Stratify Samples to Class Percentages check box Enable this check box to randomly choose the number of samples from each class that are proportional to the percentage of the image occupied by each class. In other words, larger classes contain more samples than smaller classes.
201
Geomatica Focus
Include only existing classes check box Enable this check box to generate random samples only for classes in the reference class list. 1. From the Accuracy Assessment dialog box, click Generate Random Sample. 2. In the Generate Random Sample dialog box, enter a value for the number of sample points from the Number of samples spin box. If you want to randomly choose the number of samples from each class that are proportional to the percentage of the image occupied by each class, enable the Stratify Samples to class percentages check box. If you want to generate random samples only for classes in the reference class list, enable the Include only existing classes check box. 3. Click OK.
202
Geomatica Focus
The Accuracy Report dialog box creates three types of accuracy reports: Sample Report Listing: Shows which samples are correctly classified. Error (Confusion) Matrix: Displays the results of the accuracy assessment process. Reference data listed in the columns of the matrix represents the number of correctly classified samples. Accuracy Statistics: Lists different statistical measures of overall accuracy and accuracy for each class.
Geomatica Focus
Geomatica Focus
For charts, the Information Report displays attributes for the record corresponding to selected data in a chart.
Chapter 6
Information tools
Information tools include histograms, image statistics, digital number (DN) profiles or sections of an image, and scatter plots. These tools do not change or process images, but do allow you to get a better understanding of the data you are using. Information tools, such as image band correlation statistics and histogram statistics, help you decide how you can further process image data.
1. From the Tools toolbar, click the Information button. The Information Report appears. You can use the Information Report with both raster and vector data.
205
Geomatica Focus
1. From the Information Report, enable the Entries under cursor option in the Report on area. 2. In the view pane, click a vector. 3. On the Editing toolbar, click the Selection Tools arrow and choose Individual. 4. In the view pane, click a vector shape or segment. The Information Report shows the details of the selected vector.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Polygon: lets you measure a polygonal object Rectangle: lets you measure a rectangular object Ellipse: lets you measure an elliptical object
measuring. 5. Click the next polygon vertex. Repeat this as necessary until you have at least three vertices in the polygon. The area and perimeter of the polygon appear at the bottom of the view pane. If you want to stop measuring, double-click the view pane.
Measuring a line
1. With a file open, click the Measure arrow and click Linear Units. 2. Choose a unit of measurement. 3. Click the Measure arrow and choose Line. 4. In the view pane, click where you want to begin measuring. 5. Move the cursor to the end of the measurement area. If you want to continue measuring in a different direction, click where you want to change direction and continue measuring. The total length, segment length, and azimuth appear at the bottom of the view pane. If you want to stop measuring, double-click the view pane.
Measuring a polygon
1. With a file open, click the Measure arrow and click Area Units. 2. Choose a unit of measurement. 3. Click the Measure arrow and choose Polygon. 4. In the view pane, click where you want to begin
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
values can help you in your analysis of a geographical area. You can access both histograms and statistics from the raster maps layer, and access the statistics from the files raster. 1. In the Maps tree, select a raster map layer. 2. In the Focus view area, use the Zoom tools to select the area for which you want to view a histogram. 3. From the main menu, click Layer and then click Histograms. The Multi Histogram Display window appears if an RGB map layer is selected, otherwise, the Histogram Display window appears. 4. Proceed to Viewing a histogram on page 208 .
Viewing a histogram
You can view a histogram of a grayscale, pseudo-color, or an RGB map layer. A histogram of the currently viewed area is first displayed. For an RGB map layer, a histogram is displayed for each RGB channel. At a glance, you can view the distribution of pixels and then select a histogram to view its statistics. For more information, refer to Viewing histogram statistics on page 209 . You can also view a histogram of a region that is under a bitmap mask. For more information, refer to Viewing histograms under a bitmap mask on page 210 . 1. In the Multi Histogram Display or Histogram
208
Geomatica Focus
Display window, click a histogram to view the histogram statistics and other details. The Histogram with Statistics window appears displaying the histogram of the content currently viewed in the Focus viewer. 2. Proceed to Viewing histogram statistics on page 209 .
current count of pixels for a given pixel value. The Statistics section provides you with further statistical information about the histogram. 3. If required, in the Pixel Value and Pixel Count fields, enter values of a particular area of the histogram. Press Enter. The histogram view displays the portion of the histogram that corresponds to the specified values. 4. If required, click Zoom to Overview to revert to the original histogram view. For information about Mask contents, refer to Viewing Mask contents on page 209 .
Geomatica Focus
2. In the Histogram with Statistics window, select an option from the Mask list box. When accessed from the Maps tree, the Mask list box displays the entire raster, current view, and any bitmap layers that are in the current area. The bitmap layers are listed whether they are saved or not. When accessed from the Files tree, the Mask list box displays the entire raster and the bitmap layers that are saved in the same, active source file. The saved bitmap layers are listed with their file and layer names displayed. For more information about viewing histograms for a bitmap layer, refer to Viewing histograms under a bitmap mask on page 210 .
You can zoom into an area of a histogram that is displayed on the Histogram with Statistics window to view more detailed pixel values. 1. In the Histogram with Statistics window, position the cursor over the area of the histogram you want to zoom into. 2. Right-click and select Zoom In or drag a rectangle. You can click Zoom Out to revert to the previous view of the histogram and Zoom to Overview to revert to the original histogram.
Printing a histogram
You can print the displayed histogram or its zoomed version. 1. In the Histogram with Statistics window, select Fixed aspect ratio in the Options section, if required. 2. In the Background list box, select a background color for the histogram. The selected color appears behind the histogram. 3. Click Print and specify the printer settings. 4. Click Print.
Exporting a histogram
You can export the displayed histogram or its zoomed version to a file. 1. In the Histogram with Statistics window, click
210
Geomatica Focus
Export. The File Selector window appears. 2. Specify the file name, format, and location. 3. Click Save.
Enhanced Data: Switches numeric values to enhanced data values. Line Numbers: The gray column on the right of a numeric values table shows the numbers for each line in an image. Pixel Numbers: The gray row at the top of a numeric values table shows the numeric value for a single pixel. Red Channel Value: The red pixel value for a selected pixel in the view pane. A red channel value is indicated by a red border in the numeric values table. Green Channel Value: The green pixel value for a selected pixel in the view pane. A green channel value is indicated by a green border in the numeric values table. Blue Channel Value: The blue value for a selected pixel in the view pane. A blue channel value is indicated by a blue border in the numeric values table. 1. In the Maps tree, select an RGB layer. 2. From the Layer menu, click Numeric Values.
211
Geomatica Focus
You can export digital number (DN) values to a text file for further statistical analysis. You can also use the Numeric Values dialog box to change the DN values in an image.
The Numeric Values dialog can be expanded to display more values. Each table displays one color-highlighted cell containing the RGB value of a selected pixel/line coordinate. The other cells contain the RGB values of the surrounding pixel/line coordinates. RGB values show the position of the cursor in the view pane. Raw and Enhanced Data The Numeric Values dialog box allows you to view the digital number (DN) values for both raw and enhanced DN values. The raw data values represent the DN values that are read directly from the image file. The enhanced data values represent the DN values as they are currently displayed in the view pane. For more information on enhanced data values. (See Changing a default enhancement on page 244 ) To display the RGB values for raw or enhanced data, enable the appropriate option.
Geomatica Focus
Profiling can give you an idea of the spectral homogeneity for a feature. If profiles taken across a feature are all relatively flat, the feature is considered homogeneous for the particular wavelength in which the profile is taken. Relatively flat profiles indicate that a particular wavelength channel is a good input for a subsequent supervised classification where the extracted features are being investigated. As another example, you may want to establish a potential correlation between a characteristic of a feature in the scene and its spectral response. Such a correlation could be used in an image from the Coastal Zone Color Scanner (CZCS) satellite. The CZCS satellite measures important ocean properties from space. It was designed specifically to measure the temperature and color of the coastal zones of the oceans. The CZCS operates in six wavelength regions (bands), including bands in the visible, near-infrared, and thermal regions of the electromagnetic spectrum. The four visible bands are used to map phytoplankton concentrations and inorganic suspended matter, such as silt. The near-infrared channel can be used to map surface vegetation, while the thermal channel can be used to measure sea surface temperatures. You can use the Image Profile to examine changes in ocean properties as a function of distance from the coastline or along the perimeter of a coastline. You can demonstrate graphically how chlorophyll, temperature, suspended sediment, and gelbstoff (the yellow substance of interest to marine researchers) vary along the coastal waters in a CZCS image.
PCI Geomatics
Drawn across a DEM, a profile will give information on how the elevation changes from one point to another, giving a cross-sectional perspective of the terrain. 1. In the Maps tree, click an image layer. 2. From the Layer menu, click Profile. The vector profile is normally interpreted from left to right; however, if the end points of the vector occupy the same X position, the profile is interpreted from top to bottom. In the event of a closed shape, the profile is interpreted in a clockwise direction from the start/end node of the closed shape. The graph is a profile of the image layer and shows the input channels plotted with the gray values on the Y-axis, and the distance along the vector on the X-axis. The graph demonstrates how the gray values change with distance. Gray Values In the case of an 8-bit RGB image layer, the range of the Y-axis is 0 to 255 and represents the 256 possible gray-level values for each pixel of the red, green, and blue input channels. Distance The X-axis is measured in meters and represents the distance between the end points of the vector. The range of the X-axis depends on the length of the vector and the scale of the area or the ground distance covered by the image.
213
Geomatica Focus
extraction by configuring your data with the Spectra Extraction Configuration dialog box. Focus creates a hyperspectral metalayer to hold the extracted spectra. You must first specify the input file and channels you want to work with. You can select an existing channel or you can create a new one. (See About the Spectra Extraction Configuration dialog box on page 215 ) When you begin with no open data, the Spectra Extraction Configuration dialog box automatically creates a new Map and Area for your work. If a Map and an Area are already open in and the input file has the same georeferencing as the Area, a new metalayer is added to the Map and Area. When georeferencing is incompatible, a new Area is added to the existing Map. When you have configured a metalayer, you can access both the Scatter Plot and Spectra Plot dialog boxes from a menu in the Spectra Extraction dialog box. Scatter plots and spectra plots are automatically linked to the data you specify in the Spectra Extraction dialog box. (See Extracting spectra from a region of interest on page 215 ) The Spectra Extraction tools let you: Collect regions of interest from a hyperspectral image or a scatter plot. Review mean and ellipse information in a scatter plot for your spectra. Create and review spectra plots from a region of interest. Compare spectra signatures of regions with reference spectra from either a spectra library or another image. Save spectra to either an XLS or to an SPL library.
214
Geomatica Focus
Lets you create a region of interest by either selecting a layer from the input data or creating a new layer. You can also set the bit-depth of a new layer. Layer: Lets you choose a layer from an input data file or create a new layer. Type: Lets you choose a bit-depth for a new layer. Accept: Opens the Spectra Extraction dialog box and transfers the settings you made in the Spectra Extraction Configuration dialog box. (See About the Spectra Extraction dialog box on page 216 ).
Geomatica Focus
Metalayer analysis is based on wavelength metadata. Files must be either .pix format or linked to a .pix file. The region of interest channel must be added to a .pix file when using compressed data. 1. From the Analysis menu, click Spectra Extraction. 2. In the Spectra Extraction Configuration dialog box, choose an input file from the Input list box. If no file is available, click Browse, locate and select a file in the File Selector dialog box, and click Open. 3. In the Region of Interest Channel area, choose a region of interest channel from the Layer list box. If you want to change the bit depth of the layer, choose one from the Type list box. You must select a channel type if you are creating a new layer. 4. Click OK. (See About the Spectra Extraction Configuration dialog box on page 215 ).
The Spectra Extraction dialog box lets you specify details for a region of interest, edit the spectra list in the spectra table, change spectra attributes, and adjust layer opacity. (See Region menu on page 216 )
Region menu
The Region menu has options for adding spectra channels, importing bitmap and vector layers, merging channels, and exporting channels to create new files. New: Adds a new channel to the spectra table. Import: Lets you import vector or bitmap data to the spectra table. Vectors:
Allows you to import vector regions from an existing vector segment for regions of interest and opens the Import Vectors dialog box. (See About the Import Vectors dialog box on page 218 ) Bitmaps: Allows you to import bitmaps from an existing bitmap layer for regions of interest and it opens the Import Bitmaps dialog box. (See About the Import Bitmaps
216
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
dialog box on page 219 ) Merge: Allows you to merge multiple regions of interest that you select from a source region and opens the Merge Classes dialog box. (See Merging a spectra channel on page 220 ) Export Regions to Bitmaps: Lets you export a region to a bitmap. (See Edit menu on page 217 )
Deletes all of the channels listed in the spectra table. (See Tools menu on page 217 )
Tools menu
The Tools menu lets you access the Scatter Plot dialog box and the Spectra Plotting dialog box, and saves spectra to a Spectra Library. Scatter Plot: Opens the Scatter Plot dialog box. (See Viewing the scatter plot for a layer on page 232 ) Spectra Plot: Opens the Spectra plotting dialog box. (See Plotting spectra on page 221 ) Save Spectra Signatures: Opens the Save Spectra to Library dialog box. (See Saving a spectra plot on page 226 ) (See Spectra extraction table on page 217 )
Edit menu
The Edit menu has options that let you clear and delete the channels listed in the spectra table. Clear Selected: Clears a channel selected in the spectra table. Clear All: Clears all of the channels listed in the spectra table. Delete Selected: Deletes a channel selected in the spectra table. Delete All:
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Lets you change the channel value for a channel listed in the table. Name:
completely opaque. No underlying imagery is visible. An opacity value of zero makes the bitmap invisible. Underlying imagery is completely visible. Apply:
Lets you enter a new name for a channel. Color: Shows the color of the bitmap layer for the channel showing in the view pane. Plot Mean: Lets you include the plot mean information with the spectra channel when you save the spectra extraction information. Plot Ellipse: Lets you include plot ellipse information with the spectra channel when you save the spectra extraction information. Description: File: Lets you enter and edit a brief description for the spectra channel. Opacity: Destination Class: Lets you set an opacity value for the spectra bitmap. An opacity value of 100% makes the spectra bitmap
PCI Geomatics 218
Applies any changes you make with the Opacity slide control to the image in the view pane. Save and Close: Closes the Spectra Extraction dialog box and saves the changes you have made. Save: Saves the changes you have made but leaves the Spectra Extraction dialog box open.
Opens the File Selector dialog box, where you can change the source files from which to import vector data.
Geomatica Focus
Extraction dialog box to which you are importing vectors. Segment: Lists the ID for a segment in the source data. Interior Points: Lets you include interior point data with the imported vectors. Polygon Boundary: Lets you include polygon boundary data with the imported vectors. Field: Lets you choose the attribute you want to include with the imported vectors. Description:
The Import Bitmaps dialog box lets you choose bitmaps from your source data and import them to the Spectra Extraction dialog box. Import As: Lets you import a raster as a new channel in the Spectra Extraction dialog box or import it as the channel you have selected in the Spectra Extraction dialog box. New Class: Imports the raster and adds it to the Spectra Extraction table. Current: Imports a raster as the channel you have selected in the Spectra Extraction dialog box. Bitmap List Window: Lets you import the available bitmaps in the source data.
Shows the descriptions for the vectors from the source files. Rasterize: Uses the data and information you have set in the Import Vector dialog box and imports it to the Spectra Extraction dialog box as rasterized data.
Overwrite existing training areas: Lets you overwrite a selected channel in the Spectra Extraction dialog box. Import: Imports the selected rasters to the Spectra Extraction dialog box.
219
Geomatica Focus
Value: Reports the channel value for a channel listed in the destination table. Name: Reports the name of a destination channel. Color: Shows the color of the destination bitmap. Description:
Reports the channel value for a channel listed in the source table. Name: Reports the name of a source channel. Color: Shows the color of the source bitmap. Description: Reports the description for the source spectra channel. Select Destination Classes: Reports the value, name, color, and description of the available destination channels.
PCI Geomatics
Reports the description for the destination spectra channel. 1. In the Spectra Extraction dialog box, click Region and then click Merge. 2. In the Merge Classes dialog box, choose a source channel from the Select Source Classes table. 3. In the Select Destination Classes table, choose a destination channel. 4. Click Merge.
Geomatica Focus
file in the File Selector dialog box, and click Open. 2. Choose a mask to exclude any bitmap segment from the Spectral Extraction file from the Mask list box. 3. Enable one of the following Spectra Ranges options: Channel # expresses spectra ranges in channels (bands) 1, 2#100 Wavelength # expresses the spectra ranges in wavelengths (800um#12,000um) 4. Type a range based on the selected spectra range type in the Range Value box. For example, if a spectra range is for a channel, an entered range of 5, -20, 30, -40 will yield spectrum taken from channels 5 to 20 and channels 30 to 40; if spectra range is for a wavelength, an entered range of 800, -1200, 1400, -2000 will yield spectrum taken from a wavelength of 800um to 1,200um and a wavelength of 1,400um to 2,000um. 5. Enable any of the following check boxes: Save selected Spectra only # saves only the spectra that you have selected Save ROIs to Bitmap layers # saves the spectra as a bitmap layer 6. Click Save.
1. From the Maps tree, select a layer. 2. From the Layer menu, click Spectra Plot. (See About the Spectra Plotting dialog box on page 221 )
Plotting spectra
You can plot spectra with an interactive graph tool that can be used independently or with the spectra extraction tools allowing you to compare the signatures from a spectra library with the spectra in your regions of interest.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
The Radiometric Quantity vs. Wavelength graph allows you to read radiometric and wavelength values for both regions of interest and spectra library signatures in the same graph. The X and Y scales can be adjusted using the Plotting Ranges and Graph Option controls. You can zoom to a region within the graph window by dragging your mouse over the region you want to enlarge. Library: Measures radiometric quantities for spectra library samples. Band Number or Wavelength [nm]: Measures the band number or wavelength of both the library samples and your source data. The the graph shows the unit of measure as Band Number or Wavelength in nm depending on the presence of radiometric transformation metadata in the sample data. When no transformation metadata is present, the values are shown as band numbers. Image: Measures radiometric quantities for the source data. (See Displayed spectra on page 222 )
The table reports the spectra ID number, name, and color. The Displayed Spectra controls allow you to show, hide, and change the color of the spectra plot lines and to choose new samples from a Spectra Library and new areas of interest. ID: Assigns a number to spectra signatures in ascending chronological order. Name: Lists the names of each spectra signature. Color: Lists the plot line colors for each spectra signature in the table. You can change the color of a signature plot line in the graph. Show: Lets you show or hide a signature plot line. From Spectra File: Opens the Select Spectra From Library dialog box. You can change spectra libraries and choose more spectra signatures. (See Selecting a spectra library on page 225 ) From Regions:
Displayed spectra
The Displayed Spectra table and controls lists the spectra signatures available for viewing in the Spectra plot graph.
PCI Geomatics
222
Geomatica Focus
Imports spectra listed in the Spectra Extraction dialog box table and makes them available for viewing in the Spectra Plotting dialog box. From Image: Imports spectra from the cursor position within the view pane and adds the spectra values to the table, making them available for viewing in the Spectra Plotting dialog box. Clear Spectrum: Clears a selected spectrum from the Display Spectra table. Clear All: Clears all of the spectra signatures listed in the Display Spectra table. Save Spectra: Opens the Save Spectra to Library dialog box, where you can add a spectra to a Spectra library. (See Saving a spectra plot on page 226 ) Window Size Around Cursor: Lets you choose a kernel size for the sample taken in the view pane at your cursor location. Spectra Quantity to Sample:
PCI Geomatics
When your data contains radiometric transformation metadata, the transformed spectra are listed in the Spectra Quantity to Sample box. You can choose which of the transformation quantities you want to sample from the list. The possible radiometric transformations are: Uncalibrated digital number (DN) values Non-physical adjustment At-sensor (apparent) radiance Scene radiance Scene irradiance Reflectance
Hyperspectral Image: Let you work with hyperspectral image data. Wavelength First: Lets you adjust the starting wavelength value upward from the default hyperspectral wavelength, read from the file data. Last: Lets you adjust the last wavelength value downward from the default hyperspectral wavelength, read from the file data. Mask: Allows you to choose bitmap masks in your source files.
223
Geomatica Focus
Automatically adjusts the spectra plot to show all the values in the data. X-axis Min: Lets you enter a minimum range for the graph X-axis. Max: Lets you enter a maximum range for the graph X-axis. Image Min: Lets you enter a minimum range value for data plotted from the cursor position in the view pane. Max: Lets you enter a maximum range value for data plotted from the cursor position in the view pane. Library Min:
Graph options
The Graph options allow you to change the way the graph lines for the Spectra plot are shown. Overlay: Lets you show numbered scales on the graph for library, image, and wavelength values. Plot lines are superimposed so that the values can be compared directly. Stack: Shows a numbered scale for wavelength values only. Plot lines are separated so that the plot shapes can be compared. Offset: Lets you enter an offset for the graph plot lines. (See Plotting ranges on page 224 )
Lets you enter a minimum range value for data plotted from a spectra library signature file. Max: Lets you enter a maximum range value for data plotted from a spectra library signature file. Same As Image:
Plotting ranges
The Plotting Ranges area lets you set several parameters for a spectra plot. Adjust Plot Range To Data:
Geomatica Focus
Matches the graph values to the cursor values from the image in the view pane. (See Report on page 225 )
Wavelength: Reports the pixel wavelength value for the pixel/line location. Intensity: Reports the pixel intensity value for the pixel/line location. Hide Controls and Show Controls: Hides or shows all controls for the Spectra Plot panel. Zoom In: Zooms into the plot lines in the spectra plot graph.
Report
The report area reports information for spectra signatures selected in the Displayed Spectra table based on both the entire spectra and on specific pixel/line coordinates. Current Spectrum: Reports the ID for a spectra selected in the Displayed Spectra table. Wavelength:
Zoom Out: Reports the wavelength of a spectra selected in the Displayed Spectra table. Intensity: Reports the intensity of a spectra selected in the Displayed Spectra table. Current Pixel: Reports the pixel location. Current Line: Reports the line location.
PCI Geomatics 225
Zooms out of the plot lines in the spectra plot graph. Zoom Overview: Zooms the plot lines in the spectra plot graph to an overview showing the extents of the plotted values.
Geomatica Focus
Lets you enter a spectra file from which to choose spectra signatures. Browse: Lets you find a spectra file from which you can select files for export to the Spectra Plotting dialog box. Library window: Lists the spectra contained in an open spectra file. Add to Plot: Exports the selected spectra in the list in the Library window to the Spectra Plotting dialog box. 1. From the Spectra Plotting dialog box, click From Spectra File. 2. In the Select Spectra From Library, choose a library file from the Spectral Library list box. If no library file is listed, click Browse and locate and open a different spectra library file or folder. Spectra libraries use a .spl file name extension. 3. In the Spectra Library, select the spectra you want to add to the Spectra Plotting table. 4. Click Add to Plot.
Spectra File: Lets you enter a spectra file from which to choose spectra signatures. Browse: Lets you find a spectra file from which you can select files for export to the Spectra Plotting dialog box. Library window: Lists the spectra contained in an open spectra file. Add to Plot: Exports the selected spectra in the list in the Library window to the Spectra Plotting dialog box. 1. Choose either Channel Number or Wavelength from the X axis labelling list box. 2. Choose a wave record from the Wave record list box. 3. Choose a number to represent the window size from the Window size around cursor list box.
Geomatica Focus
2. Enable any of the following check boxes: Save selected Spectra only: saves only the spectra that you have selected Save ROIs to Bitmap layers: saves the spectra as a bitmap layer 3. Click Save.
3. Type the value assigned to pixels that have no elevation values because the image correlation failed in the Failed box. Some features are not accessible unless you enter a failed value. 4. Type the value assigned to the area that lies outside the DEM in the Background box. The background value can be a maximum or minimum value such as -150 or -999999. Some features are not accessible unless you enter a background value. If you want to see the results without saving the new layer, enable the Display option. If you want to save the new layer in the project, enable Save option and choose a file from the File list box. Type a name for the new layer or select an existing layer from the Layer list box. If you want to display the results in the view pane, enable the Display saved results check box.
Editing a DEM
5. If you want to apply the edits repeatedly and achieve a cumulative effect on the data, enable the Load results to input check box. You can use a mask to identify specific areas that you want to edit. The mask itself does not change the values in the area that it covers, but you can use the tools in the Area Fills Under Mask and Filtering and Interpolation areas to edit the data under the mask.
1. From the DEM Editing dialog box, choose a DEM from the File list box. If no DEM is available, click Browse and open a file from the File Selector dialog box. 2. Choose a layer that contains the DEM from the Layer list box.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
1. In the DEM Editing dialog box, click Open a Mask Layer. To create a mask, see Creating a mask on page 228 . To modify the values under the mask, see Replacing the elevation values under a mask on page 228 . To edit the DEM, see Filtering and interpolating DEM values on page 229 . 2. In the Select Layer dialog box, click Browse. 3. In the File Selector dialog box, navigate to and select the file. 4. Click Open. The file and its available layers are displayed in the Select Layer dialog box. 5. Select a layer and click OK.
about the New Shapes tools, see Adding points to an active layer on page 303 .
Creating a mask
A mask is a vector shape that identifies specific areas that you want to edit. The mask does not change the values in the area that it covers. 1. From the DEM Editing dialog box, click the New Mask Layer button. 2. In the Maps tree, select the new bitmap layer. 3. Use the New Shapes tools to draw a shape over the area that you want to edit. For more information
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Specified Value from the Fill using list box. 3. Type a value in the Value box. 4. Click Fill.
uses two filters to identify failed pixel values and their surrounding pixels: The first filter calculates the average and variance of the eight elevation values immediately surrounding each pixel, excluding failed and background pixels. If the center pixel is more than two standard deviations away from the average, it is replaced with the failed value. The second filter counts the number of failed values immediately surrounding each pixel. If five or more failed pixels border the center pixel, the center pixel is also set to a failed value. Erode holes Because pixels adjacent to failed pixels also tend to contain incorrect values, the Erode holes filter replaces the eight pixels around each failed pixel with the failed value. When you apply the filter under a mask, the mask enlarges to cover any additional pixels replaced by the failed value. Median Filter Ranks the pixel values within a 5x5 pixel frame according to brightness. The median is the middle value of those image pixel values, which is then assigned to the pixel in the center of the frame. Smooth DEM Is a Gaussian filter that calculates the weighted average of all the pixels in a 3x3 pixel frame and assigns the value to the center pixel in the frame. Failed and background
To remove a mask
1. In the DEM Editing dialog box, click the Clear Mask button.
To hide a mask
1. In the Maps tree, disable the new bitmap layer check box.
To save a mask
1. In the DEM Editing dialog box, click Save the Mask.
229
Geomatica Focus
pixel values are not replaced by the filter and are not used in the Gaussian calculation. Interpolate Replaces failed values with an estimate weighted by distance calculated from the valid pixels surrounding the failed pixel(s). The algorithm used to calculate the estimate is adequate for small areas of less than 200 pixels, but is not recommended for larger areas. To limit the filter to a specific area, you must create a mask. 1. From the DEM Editing dialog box, choose a filter from the list box in the Filtering and Interpolation area. 2. Enable one of the following options: 3. Click Apply. For more information, see Applying tool strategies for common situations in digital elevation models on page 230 .
Because lakes have no features that can be used for matching during DEM extraction, lakes in a DEM often contain failed pixel values or incorrect elevation values. 1. Create a mask over the lake. 2. Identify the elevation of the lake. 3. In the DEM Editing dialog box, choose Specified Value from the Fill using list box in the Area Fills Under Mask area. 4. Type a value for the lake elevation in the Value box. 5. Click Fill. 6. Click the Clear Mask button.
Geomatica Focus
1. Create a mask over the area. 2. In the DEM Editing dialog box, click Fill Mask from Failed. 3. Choose Interpolate from the list box in the Filtering and Interpolation area. 4. Enable the Use Mask option. 5. Click Apply. 6. Click the Clear Mask button.
2. In the DEM Editing dialog box, enable the Load results to input check box. 3. Choose Remove Noise Filter from the list box in the Filtering and Interpolation area. 4. Enable the Entire DEM option. 5. Click Apply. 6. Click Apply again. 7. Choose Interpolate from the list box in the Filtering and Interpolation area. 8. Enable the Entire DEM option. 9. Click Apply. 10. Choose Smooth DEM from the list box in the Filtering and Interpolation area. 11. Enable the Entire DEM option 12. Click Apply. 13. Click Apply again.
231
Geomatica Focus
1. From the Layer Selection dialog box, click Browse. 2. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select a file, and click Open. 3. In the Files pane, select a file. 4. In the Channels/Segments available pane, choose a DEM layer and click OK. (See Editing a DEM on page 227 )
for a classification. If two channels have a very high correlation, you can omit one or the other as input for the classification. You can also determine which portion of the spectra a given bitmap or training area occupies, and you can use a scatter plot to determine the homogeneity of a bitmap or training area. If the scatter plot for the bitmap is tightly clustered with few outlying pixels, the spectral response for that area is homogenous in the selected image layers. You can open the Scatter Plot dialog box from the Layer menu or from the training area collection window for a supervised classification. Plot Scale For 8 bit imagery, the scatter plot axis are 256 pixels by 256 pixels. The top-left pixel represents the number of pixels with a value of 255 for the input channel on the Y-axis and zero for the input channel on the X-axis. The bottom-right pixel represents the number of pixels with a value of 255 for the input channel on the X-axis and zero for the input channel on the Y-axis. When images are outside the 0-255 range, the imagery is scaled to fit within that range. When images are outside the 0-255 range, the maximum digital number (DN) value is used for the plot scale. Pixel Brightness Is determined by the frequency of pixels in the image with a given gray-level value. Bright areas indicate common combinations and black areas indicate combinations that rarely occur.
232
Geomatica Focus
1. From the Maps tree, select an image layer. 2. From the Layer menu, click Scatter Plot. Scatter plots typically show a bright smear in one area of the plot. By default, the plot appears with input channel 1 on the X-axis and input channel 2 on the Y-axis. In the controls area of the Scatter Plot dialog box, you can specify the channels you want to show as the X and Y axes. A color scheme for the plot and a look-up table (LUT) can be applied to either channel.
The Statistics section displays the linear equation derived from a linear regression calculation and the correlation coefficient associated with the scatter plot. A value of 'N/A' (Not Applicable) is given if these statistics cannot be calculated (usually if one of the selected channels is empty). The correlation coefficient measures the similarities of the two image channels. A value of one indicates a complete correlation between two images, whereas a value of zero indicates there is no correlation between images. The A -1 value indicates a negative correlation.
(For the Hyperspectral Scatter Plot only) To specify which values are compared
1. From the Hyperspectral Scatter Plot dialog box, enable one of the following options: Entire file: plots all the values in the two channels Selected classes: plots only the values in the selected regions of the two channels (the Mask list is disabled)
Geomatica Focus
Pseudo: displays the plot with pseudo-color representation Because the human eye can only detect approximately 16 shades of grey, the scatter plot is more easily interpreted when displayed in pseudo-color with a white background. You can apply an LUT to either input channel.
You can ensure the image information is not distorted by fixing the aspect ratio.
Geomatica Focus
You can control the range and hold the X and Y axes to the original relationship. 1. In the X View Range and Y View Range areas, enter a value in the Min and Max spin boxes. The default range of values for 8-bit imagery is 0 to 255. The range varies depending on the ground distance covered by an image and the length of a vector.
Exporting a profile
You can change the file format before selecting an output file. 1. In the Graph Controls dialog box, choose a file format from the Format list box. 2. Click File. 3. In the File Selector dialog box, enter a file name in the File name list box. 4. Click Save. 5. In the Graph Controls dialog box, click Export.
Geomatica Focus
Color editor based on the RGB color space. The color representation of the channel's profile on the graph is changed. Visible: A check mark in this field indicates that a particular channel is visible in the profile graph and profile table. Current Channel: Indicates which plotted channel is associated with the mensuration bars. There can be only one current channel, which is indicated by an X. To select the current channel, click the appropriate field under the Current Channel column. Profile View: Sets the coordinates for the horizontal axis of the Profile Graph. The sample point coordinates are based on the image pixel size, in meters. Choose between Georeferenced and Sample Point coordinates. If Georeferenced is selected, the values in the X axis are displayed in metres. If Sample Points are selected, the values in the X axis represent pixel units. For example, if a vector line is 8000 m long, the maximum value for the X axis if georeferenced is selected in the Profile options is 8000. If the imagery has a resolution of 30 m, the maximum value for the same line displayed using Sample points is approximately 267 (8000/30).
Color spaces have been developed as a means of describing color. Two of the most common color spaces are RGB (Red-Green-Blue) and CMY (Cyan-Magenta-Yellow). The former is used by monitors and the latter is usually used by printers. RGB and CMY can be difficult to understand. Another color space, IHS (Intensity-Hue-Saturation) give a more accurate representation of how the eye interprets color. IHS transformations are useful in digital image processing, as they allow for greater control over the components that make up color. You can change the color of any channel by clicking on its color chip. This opens the Line Color editor. The color representation of a channel#s profile on the graph is changed. 1. Click the color chip for the corresponding channel. 2. In the Line Color editor, move the Red, Green, or Blue slide controls to the left or right to adjust your colors. 3. Click Close. To customize the color of the profile vector, use the Set Line Color tool on the Display toolbar.
236
Geomatica Focus
arrow and choose a color from the color palette. (See About the Change Color dialog box on page 237 )
model. RGB: Is one of the additive color models and is based on the light being emitted from computer monitors. The three primary colors are red, green, and blue. Combining the red, green, and blue colors in various proportions produces all the colors on your screen. CMYK: Is one of the subtractive color models and is based on the amount of light being absorbed and reflected by an ink film. This model is often used in printing. The primary colors are cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. HLS/HIS: Is a more intuitive model based upon the way we perceive color. The primary components are hue (shade of color), lightness/intensity (brightness of color), and saturation (strength or purity of color). Gray:
237
Geomatica Focus
You can print the profile graph by clicking Print at the bottom of the Graph Controls dialog box. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the Profile Table dialog box. Click Options. In the Profile Options dialog box, click Close. In the Graph Controls dialog box, click Print.
The Cursor Control dialog box has four areas that display the cursor position in different coordinate systems. You can move the cursor in any of the supported coordinate schemes by changing the any of the coordinates. The Paper area measures the paper size set for the Map. It can be larger than the area view where imagery is displayed. The paper size can be changed in the Maps tree by right-clicking the Map layer and choosing Properties. From the Map Properties dialog box, choose Properties and then click the Page Setup tab. The cursor control panel shows the location in millimetres with the origin at the bottom right of the map. If more than one file is opened in the view pane, the coordinates are based on the selected database. You can change the database file. The result is the pixel and line that the cursor points to in the currently selected database. The file origin, (0,0) is the top left of the image or file. If the projection has not been set for a file, the database coordinates are not displayed. The Geocoded area displays the cursor coordinates in geocoded coordinates (for example, Eastings and Northings) according to the geocoding shown in the Cursor Control dialog box. If opened data has no associated geocoded locations, the geocoded location is shown in pixels and lines. The units displayed indicate the geocoding type. The User Defined Projection area shows Lat/Long coordinates as the default if sufficient geocoding information is available for the viewed data. Typically, UTM data with a valid zone number must be provided for
238
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
this transformation to occur. If a projection has not been set, the User Defined Projection coordinates are not displayed.
When the GPS Tool is active, you can use it to update the cursor position or to add vector data to an Area in the project.
Geomatica Focus
list and click Points. 7. In the GPS Tool dialog box, click one of the following buttons: Capture Stream: adds new points to your vector layer at the specified stream interval. If you want to stop the point capture, click Finish. Capture Point: adds a new point to your vector layer. You can continue to collect points by repeatedly clicking the button.
Geomatica Focus
2. Choose RGB2PCT from the Algorithm Library. 3. Select three raster layers you want to use as your RGB channels. 4. Select the PCT that was created using ADAPT. 5. Run RGB2PCT and save the results in the Maps tree. Also see PCTMAKE, CMPRSS8, and ERRDIFF in the Algorithm Library.
PCE encodes an input channel into three output channels (such as red, green, and blue components) using a PCT held in a database segment.
Editing a value
PCI Geomatics 241
Geomatica Focus
The Current Pseudo-Color Table displays color values for the current PCT. You can edit the breakpoint and RGB values in the table cells. 1. In the PCT Editing dialog box, double-click the cell you want to change and type a new value. If you want to select multiple PCT entries, drag over a series of list entries.
Geomatica Focus
1. From the Range-based page, enable the Custom option in the Color Selection area. 2. Drag the left and right markers to the positions you want on the color bar in the Color Selection area.
12. In the Histogram area, slide the markers or specify the values in the Min X and Max X boxes to define the section to which you want to apply the color range. 13. If required, go back to the color bar and slide its markers to narrow or widen the color range. You can also specify the values of the range in the Left Marker and Right Marker boxes. The color tabs of the histogram left and right markers change color accordingly. 14. Click one of the following options from the Values Outside Range list in the Setup Preview of New PCT section: Set to Black, which blackens the area of the histogram that is outside the specified range Set to White, which whitens the area of the histogram that is outside the specified range Ignore, which retains the original color of the histogram outside the specified range 15. Click Compress. The histogram reflects the new color range. The color bar below Compress changes to reflect the new color range and the option specified in the Values Outside Range list. The specified pseudo color range is rendered to the specified pixel values of the active raster.
Geomatica Focus
edit the raster (see Adding points to an active layer on page 303 ). 1. On the Editing toolbar, click the Raster Editing tool.
Specifying a value
1. In the Pixel value box, type the value that you want to use. 2. In the Pixel value box, type the value that you want to use. If you want to replace all the pixel values within the polygon instead of just drawing the outline of the polygon, select the Fill polygon check box. 3. In the Line width box, type a value that represents the thickness of the line in pixels. Click OK.
You can remove the default enhancement from the Raster toolbar by clicking the Enhancements arrow and choosing None. The enhancement is removed, and the view pane shows the image with no enhancement. You can also change the enhancement that is automatically applied to imagery when you open new files. 1. From the Tools menu, click Options. 2. In the Options dialog box, select Layers. 3. In the Rasters area, choose a default enhancement from the Default visual enhancement list box. 4. Click OK. There are three methods for enhancing images with Focus. For quick adjustments to your image data, you can use the Raster toolbar command buttons or the shortcut menu in the Focus Maps tree. For more detailed custom enhancements you can use the LUT Editor. The image enhancement is only applied through your system memory and must be saved if you want to use a particular LUT again or if you want to export the enhanced image.
Geomatica Focus
Removes all enhancements and displays the original uncorrected image. Linear Improves the overall contrast of an image by stretching the minimum and maximum values in the image uniformly over the entire available dynamic range. This enhancement is best applied to images that have a normal distribution of digital number (DN) values. Root Applies a square root enhancement, which compresses higher DN values in an image and disproportionately expands the darker values. Original darker values in the image are given more contrast than the original bright (high-DN) values. Adaptive Applies an optimal enhancement curve, which is an adaptive derivative of an image histogram. Equalization Applies a histogram equalization enhancement. Infrequency Applies an infrequency enhancement, which maps gray levels based on frequency of occurrence. The Linear stretch enhancement improves the overall
PCI Geomatics
contrast of an image by stretching the minimum and maximum values in the image over the entire available dynamic range. 1. On the Raster toolbar, click the Enhancements arrow and choose Linear.
245
Geomatica Focus
it uses less than half of the available range. When Focus collects statistics for applying an enhancement, the Tail Trim option omits the upper and lower 2% of the image histogram.
2. Choose a number that represents the percentage of tail trim. The enhancement must be re-applied to the new view pane. Exclude Min/Max If this option is enabled, the minimum and maximum values are not used as end points when applying the enhancement. The table below shows a simple pix file with only 7 pixels and 1 line. When the Exclude Min/Max option is enabled, the lowest and highest digital number (DN) values (excluding the outliers 0 and 255) are stretched to 0 and 255. When the Exclude Min/Max option is disabled, the original minimum and maximum values are used as anchors. The remaining values are stretched with respect to this range. Table 10. Pixel # of line 1 Raw Data DN 1 0 2 5 0 3 50 127 4 51 140 5 52 153 6 60 255 7 255 255
170
212
216
221
255
255
246
Geomatica Focus
Enhancing images from the shortcut menu Decreasing the image contrast
Interpreting image data is often simplified by adjusting the image contrast and brightness. You can increase or decrease the image contrast and brightness with the Raster toolbar controls. To increase the image contrast, click the Contrast button on the Raster toolbar. 1. On the Raster toolbar, click the Contrasts arrow and choose Decrease. You can see an approximate 10% change in the image contrast each time you click the Contrast button. You can also return the contrast level to the original enhancement before the contrast was changed by choosing the Reset option. The Brightness tool lets you increase, decrease, or reset the image brightness. To increase the image brightness, click the Brightness button on the Raster toolbar. Each click changes the image brightness by approximately 10%. You can also apply image enhancements with the shortcut menu in the Maps tree. The same image enhancement commands in the Raster Toolbar are found in the shortcut menu. 1. In the Maps tree, right-click a data file layer and click Enhance. 2. Choose an enhancement.
Geomatica Focus
markers. The Min LUT (X) and Max LUT (X) values encompass the range that marks the bit depth of the image. These values can change when you manually change them or slide the y-axis level markers.
248
Geomatica Focus
To allow tail trimming, enable the Tail Trim check box. In the Tail Trimming list box, select the tail trim percent from 1 to 5. You can also enable the Exclude Min./Max check box and enter values in the appropriate boxes. Once you apply an enhancement, you can customize it. The view with the changes in the histogram panel is automatically updated.
5. Click Toggle. You can also edit the LUT directly in a spreadsheet-style dialog box by selecting Edit Table from the Graph editing tools. To open the LUT for a histogram, click Edit Table in the Graph editing tools area. Some of the other graph editing tools include: Add Breakpoint, Move Breakpoint, and Delete Breakpoint. These options let you edit the LUT for a specific location on the original image histogram. To show the breakpoints on the curve from the view option list, choose Breakpoints. The Thin Breakpoints option removes excess breakpoints along straight stretches that are associated with a LUT.
Geomatica Focus
and custom filters. You can control the X and Y dimensions of the kernel in the Filter Size boxes. You can work with different filter types. 1. Select an image layer in the Maps tree. 2. From the Layer menu, click Filter. Filtering under a mask: You can apply the filters to all the data in the layer or you can create a bitmap mask to restrict the filtering process to a particular area in the layer. See Filtering under a mask on page 251 . Low Pass Tab: Low-pass filters pass only the low-frequency information or the gradual gray-level changes. They produce images that appear smooth or blurred when compared to the original data. Click the Low Pass tab to work with low-pass filters. See Using low-pass filters on page 251 . Speckle Filters: Also called adaptive filters, speckle filters are used with radar imagery to provide low-pass filtering. Speckle filters remove radar noise while maintaining high-pass information, such as edges. You can work with speckle filters under the Low Pass tab. (See Using low-pass filters on page 251 ) High Pass Tab: Pass only the high-frequency information or the abrupt
250
Geomatica Focus
gray-level changes. The high-frequency image contains all of the local details of the image, such as object edges. Click the High Pass tab to work with high-pass filters. (See Using high-pass filters on page 254 ) Custom Tab: Lets you design your own filter. You can specify the coefficients for a filter template, regardless of the actual coefficients. Custom filters perform spatial filtering on each pixel in an image using the gray-level values in either a square or a rectangular kernel. You create custom filters under the Custom tab. (See Creating custom filters on page 256 )
The Mask list box displays all of the bitmap layers that are in the current area. The bitmap layers are listed whether they are saved or not. For each saved bitmap, both the file and layer names are displayed. 5. If you want to display or save the results for the mask area only, enable the Output only mask area check box. The data that is not covered by the mask is set to the No Data value and is not saved in the output file.
Geomatica Focus
and preserving edges. In a 3x3 kernel, the median filter finds the median pixel value, the middle value in an ordered set, where an equal number of values are below and above the median. For example, 8 is the median value for the following 3x3 kernel in a gray-level values set:
times. In this case the Mode pixel of the filter kernel is calculated as follows:
Neither 3 nor 5 is at the center of the kernel. The 5 in the top row is encountered first and therefore becomes the mode value. 1. In the Filter dialog box, enter an X- and Y-filter kernel size in the Filter size spin boxes. The larger the kernel size, the smoother (more blurred) the image. 2. Click the Low Pass tab. 3. Enable one of the following filter options: Average Median Mode 4. Click Apply to View. The filter is applied to the image in the view pane only. If you want to adjust a filter or change to a different one, click Remove View Filter. Note: Image filters are not cumulative. Each filter is applied to the original data stored in the image file. Using Gamma filters:
Mode Filter computes the mode of the gray-level values that occur most frequently in the filter kernel. For example, in a 3x3 filter window with the following pixel values, the filtered pixel value of 3 occurs five times. The mode filter is calculated as follows:
Mode filters are typically used to clean up thematic maps for presentation purposes. This filter replaces small island themes with their larger surrounding themes. With the mode filter, the maximum kernel size is 7x7. The filter window can be rectangular. Sometimes, two values can be equally distributed within the kernel sample. In such cases, if the center value is one of the competing values, it becomes the kernel sample value. If not, the first instance of the competing values becomes the sample value. For example, in a 3x3 filter window with the following pixel values, the pixel values 3 and 5 each occur three
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
noise (speckling). While a low-pass filter reduces image speckles, it can also degrade some of the finer detail in the image. Special low-pass filters, called Gamma filters, can preserve image details by filtering on individual pixels in an image using the gray-level values in a square window surrounding each pixel. You can apply a speckle filter to preserve some of the linear features in the image. Gamma filtering is primarily used on radar data to remove high-frequency speckle, while preserving high-frequency features (edges). The input for the number of looks of the radar image is used to calculate the noise variance. You can specify an intensity or amplitude formate for the radar image. The dimensions of a Gamma filter must be odd-numbered and can be from 3x3 to 11x11 pixels. Filter size greatly affects the quality of processed images. If a filter is too small, the noise filtering algorithm is not effective; if a filter is too large, subtle details of the image will be lost in the filtering process. A 7x7 filter usually gives the best result. All pixels are filtered. In order to filter pixels located near edges of an image, edge pixels are replicated to give sufficient data. For example: Table 11. a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9
In a 3x3 filter window Algorithm: The resulting gray-level value R for the smoothed pixel is: R = I for Ci less than or equal to CuR = (B*I + SQRT(D))/(2*ALFA) for Cu < Ci < CmaxR = CP for Ci greater than or equal to Cmax where: NLOOK = number of looksVAR = variance in filter windowCP = center pixel gray-level valueI = mean gray-level in the filter windowCu = 1/SQRT(NLOOK)Ci = SQRT(VAR)/ICmax = SQRT(2)*CuALFA = (1 + Cu**2)/(Ci**2 - Cu**2)B = ALFA - NLOOK - 1D = I*I*B*B + 4*ALFA*NLOOK*I*CP For the amplitude image, each gray level will be squared before applying the algorithm, and the square root of the calculated pixel is returned as the final result.
Geomatica Focus
4. In the Number of Looks box, enter a value that represents the number of noise-variation calculations of the radar image that you want to use. 5. In the Image Format list box, choose one of the following: Amplitude Power DB 6. Click Apply to View. If the filtered image is hard to see at your current resolution, you can zoom the image to see the filter effects. The Gamma filter suppresses the image speckles, while the linear details are preserved. Note: You must enter correct image mode values for the image data files you are working with. The number of looks and the image amplitude information is available in the format definition included with your data. (See Using high-pass filters on page 254 and aving a S filtered image to a new file on page 257 )
is used as a band-pass filter to blur an image. This filter uses the following Gaussian function to compute the filter weights: G (i, j) = exp ( -((i-u)**2 + (j-v)**2) / (2 * SIGSMQ) ) where (i, j) is a pixel within the filter window, (u, v) is the center for the filter window, and SIGMSQ is set to 4. The filter weights W(i, j) are the normalized values of G(i, j) over the entire filter window; therefore, the sum of all weights is 1. The gray level of a filtered pixel is the sum of W(i, j) *V(i, j) over all pixels in the filter window, where V(i, j) is the original value at location (i, j). Note: In order to filter pixels located near the edges of the image, edge pixel values are replicated to give sufficient data. Laplacian Edge Detector Filters generate sharp edge definition of an image. These filters can be used to highlight edges that have both positive and negative brightness slopes. The two Laplacian filters have different weight arrangements, as shown below: Table 12. Type 1 Type 2
254
Geomatica Focus
0 1 0 1 -4 1 0 1 0
-1 -1 -1 -1 8 -1 -1 -1 -1
where the sum of all weights = 0 Example of 3x3 Laplacian filters Note: In order to filter pixels located near the edges of the image, edge pixel values are replicated to give sufficient data. Sobel Edge Detector Filter creates an image where edges (sharp changes in gray-level values) are shown. Only a 3x3 filter size can be used with this filter. This filter uses two 3x3 templates to calculate the Sobel gradient as shown below: Table 13. -1 0 1 -2 0 2 -1 0 1 X Templates Table 14. a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9
PCI Geomatics 255
X = -1*a1 + 1*a3 - 2*a4 + 2*a6 - 1*a7 + 1*a9 Y = 1*a1 + 2*a2 + 1*a3 - 1*a7 - 2*a8 - 1*a9 Sobel Gradient = sqrt (X*X + Y*Y) Note: In order to filter pixels located near the edges of the image, edge pixel values are replicated to give sufficient data. Prewitt Edge Detector Filter creates an image where edges (sharp changes in gray-level values) are shown. Only a 3x3 filter size can be used with this filter. This filter uses two 3x3 templates to calculated the Prewitt gradient value, as shown below: Table 15. -1 0 1 -1 0 1 -1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 -1 -1 -1 Templates Table 16. X Y
1 2 1 0 0 0 -1 -2 -1 Y
Geomatica Focus
a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9
Note: In order to filter pixels located near the edges of the image, edge pixel values are replicated to give sufficient data. 1. In the Maps tree, right-click an image layer and click Filter. 2. In the Filter dialog box, enter an X- and Y-filter kernel size in the Filter size spin boxes. 3. Click the High Pass tab. 4. Enable a filter option. 5. Click Apply to View. The high-pass filter changes the image in the view pane. You can save a filter view by clicking Apply to File. The Save New Filtered Image Layer dialog box opens. You can either save the filtered image to a new image layer, or overwrite the existing layer. (See Creating custom filters on page 256 and aving S a filtered image to a new file on page 257 )
where a1 - a9 are gray levels of each pixel in the filter window Apply the templates to a 3x3 filter window. X = -1*a1 + 1*a3 - 1*a4 + 1*a6 - 1*a7 + 1*a9 Y = 1*a1 + 1*a2 + 1*a3 - 1*a7 - 1*a8 - 1*a9 Prewitt Gradient = sqrt (X*X + Y*Y) Note: In order to filter pixels located near the edges of the image, edge pixel values are replicated to give sufficient data. Edge Sharpening Filter uses a subtractive smoothing method to sharpen an image. First, an average filter is applied to the image. The averaged image retains all low-spatial frequency information, but has its high-frequency features, such as edges and lines, attenuated. Consequently, the averaged image is subtracted from its original image and the resultant difference image will primarily have the edges and lines remaining. After the edges are deternimed in this manner, the difference image is added back to the original image to give an edge-enhanced image. The resultant image will have clearer high-frequency detail; however, there is a tendency for noise to be enhanced.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
1. Click the Custom tab. 2. Enter your filter parameters in the matrix provided. For example, for a 3x3 filter you can use a1 a2 a3, a4 a5 a6, or a7 a8 a9, and so on. When you enter a range of a1 - a9, the filter is placed over the image so that the target pixel is covered by a5. The neighbourhood pixels are then multiplied by the corresponding values in the filter and then summed. The pixel at a5 is replaced by this sum. 3. To read a kernel from a specific file, click Import. The number of entries in the first line of the file determines the number of columns in the kernel. All lines of data that follow have the same number of entries. If there are more, they are ignored. If there are less, then zeros are used to make up the difference. Data entries should be separated by spaces, tabs, or new lines. 4. To write a kernel to a file, click Export. 5. Click Normalize. The Normalize button divides all entries by the sum of the kernel entries. All other filtering algorithms normalize their respective kernels before performing the filtering operation. You can reset kernel entries to zero by clicking Reset. (See Saving a filtered image to a new file on page 257 )
Save New Filtered Image is used to select where the output of the applied filter should be saved. A file and channel must be specified for each color element composing the filtered layer: three for RGB layers and one for grayscale and PCT layers. 1. From the Filter dialog box, click Apply to File. 2. In the Save New Filtered Image dialog box, choose a file from the File list box. If a file is not listed, click Browse, locate and select it, and click Open. 3. Choose a layer from the Layer list box. If you want to create a new layer, choose New Layer and enable the Load filtered layer check box. 4. Repeat steps step 2 and step 3 for the remaining channels. 5. Click OK.
Scaling images
Remote sensing data is structured in 8-bit, 16-bit, and 32-bit formats. There are many instances where you may need to scale data from a higher to a lower bit depth. For example, you can prepare data for visual display by scaling it from 16-bit or 32-bit to 8-bit. You can also scale data to a lower bit depth before you export it to applications that do not support data bits greater than 8. Scaling will let you change 32-bit real data from a real number to a whole number and you can scale to reduce the size of your imagery. However, there is a risk of losing information when you scale to reduce file size.
257
Geomatica Focus
Image Data and Scaling For 8-bit data, the digital numbers (DN) assigned to each pixel are between zero and 255. For 16-bit data, DNs can fall between zero and 65,535. Because eyes are not sensitive to subtle differences in grayscale or color, we cannot visually benefit from images composed of thousands of shade variations. Focus can also perform color and shade scaling to help you control a large range of data values. Scaling an image often makes the data easier to manage and interpret.
and select it, and click Save. 3. Choose a format from the Format list box. If you want to reconfigure a format, click Options and make any changes in the GDB Options Editor. 4. Click Properties. 5. In the Output Layer Properties dialog box, choose a bit-depth for your output from the Output type list box. 6. Choose a scaling method for your output from the Scaling list box. 7. Click OK.
LIN: The linear function scales data values equally from the input range to the output range. Other non-linear functions also perform compression and/or stretching. SQR: The square function compresses the lower end of spectrum and stretches the upper end. The image gray levels are shifted towards the lower end so the image appears darker in comparison to the linearly scaled result. ROOT, LOG: The logarithmic and square root functions compress the upper end. The square root is stronger than logarithmic, so the image is made brighter.
Geomatica Focus
NQ: The automatic normalized quantization method transforms a typical input image of a unimodal histogram into a near-symmetric, Gaussian-like distribution with the median input level transformed to the mid-point of the output range. The algorithm applies a smooth nonlinear function to gradually compress the extreme high or low portions of input range. The middle portion of the data range is mapped with little distortion. This method is recommended for image quantization to a lower number of gray levels. It is robust in handling 32-bit input images. EQ: The equal-area quantization method maps an image to the output range with an equalized output histogram. For example, each output level has approximately the same number of pixels. POW: The general power function fine-tunes the amount of compression and shifting each way with a user-supplied exponent value. If the exponent is greater than 1, the effect is shifting down; if the exponent is less than 1, the effect is shifting up. For both the input and output the entire range of digital numbers (DN) is used in determining the range. Using the Save As feature may be appropriate for scaling to 8-bit data, but situations may arise where you need control of the input and output range. If this is the case, you must use the SCALE algorithm in the Algorithm
PCI Geomatics
Library.
Geomatica Focus
Input Gray Level Value are specified, this range is used for every input channel. Tail Trimming: Optionally specifies the amount of tail trimming of input image histogram before scaling. If Minimum Input Gray Level Value and Maximum Input Gray Level Value are specified, the specified input range is used, while Left Tail Trimming% and Right Tail Trimming% are ignored. If the two trimming parameters are not specified, the minimum and maximum of image data for every input channel is used for input range. The two trimming parameters are useful only for scaling algorithms (LIN/SQR/LOG). The two quantization algorithms squeeze tails automatically. Minimum and Maximum Output Gray Level Value: Specifies the minimum and maximum output gray-level values after scaling. If the number of channels is greater than one, the values are used for every output channel. Scaling Function: Specifies the scaling function or quantization algorithm. The following scaling functions are available #d289e3_id on page 258 Linear. #d289e3_id on page 258 Square. #d289e3_id on page 258 Square root and Logarithmic.
PCI Geomatics
#d289e3_id on page 258 Power with a specified exponent as defined by Exponent. #d289e3_id on page 258 Automatic normalized quantization #d289e3_id on page 258 Equal-area quantization Output Type: Specifies the sub-data type of one or more resulting images. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 8-bit unsigned 16-bit signed 16-bit unsigned 32-bit real Open SCALE from the Algorithm Library. Select one or more raster layers for scaling. Fill in the input parameters for the file. Run SCALE. Right-click the new layer and click Save.
Geomatica Focus
black-and-white intensity image The result is an output RGB color image with the same resolution as the intensity image. If the input and output files are different, the input RGB color image is resampled using the specified resampling method. Either the Hexcone or Cylinder IHS color model is used for data fusion. IHS converts red, green, and blue image channels to intensity, hue, and saturation image channels, which enhances and controls the output colors for a given set of input red/green/blue imagery. CYLINDER was the original method used by the IHS and RGB programs in previous PCI software releases (Version 6.0.1 and earlier). The Hexcone model is used by many commercial image processing software programs. One model can produce more visually pleasing results than the other, depending on the circumstances. The Hexcone model runs about 15% faster than the Cylinder model. Running FUSE is similar to running IHS and RGB. IHS separates an RGB channel into three color space components (intensity, hue, and saturation) and places each in a separate channel. The RGB program can then be used to convert intensity, hue, and saturation channel output by IHS back to red, green, and blue channels. The IHS and RGB programs can enhance and control the output colors more easily for any three channels in an image database file. In computer imaging, colors are produced as combinations of the additive primary colors (red, green, and blue). Another means of color definition is in terms of
PCI Geomatics
intensity, hue, and saturation. Intensity is the lightness or darkness of a color. For example, in an axis that is equidistant from the three primary color axes, which are orthogonal or perpendicular to each other, zero intensity represents black. As the intensity is increased, the lightness increases and the darkness decreases. Full intensity (for 8-bit data, this is 255) represents white. Hue refers to an actual color and is defined as an angle on a circle that is centered and perpendicular to the intensity axis. For the Hexcone model, zero degrees represents red and hue values cycle through Red-Green-Blue-Red; whereas, in the Cylinder model, zero degrees represents blue and hue values cycle in the opposite direction through Blue-Green-Red-Blue. The following table shows the unscaled and scaled hue values for both IHS models: Table 17. Hue Angle Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Magenta Red Hexcone Unscaled 0 60 120 180 240 300 360 Model Scaled 0 42 85 127 170 212 255 Cylinder Unscaled 240 180 120 60 0 or 360 300 240 Model Scaled 170 128 85 42 0 or 255 212 170
261
Geomatica Focus
Saturation is the amount of color present or the radius of the circle described by the hue. Zero saturation represents no color and would appear as a gray shade depending on the associated intensity; full saturation (1.0 for unscaled Hexcone model or 208.2066 for 8-bit unscaled Cylinder model) represents full color. Full saturation accentuates the RGB components at the expense of other hues, in that other hues peak in their saturation at less than the maximum possible saturation. IHS is an easier means of controlling the output color than RGB. For example, it is easier to comprehend lightening an image (increasing the intensity) or adding more color (increasing the saturation) than it is to comprehend the effects of increasing or decreasing the RGB values. One possible application of IHS is to produce channels from three input channels, stretch the saturation channel, and then convert the IHS channel data back to the equivalent RGB channels for video display. The output image would have a better saturation range without changing the colors of the original image. The following diagram shows the geometric relationship between the RGB and IHS coordinate systems for representing color. The hexcone or cylinder is oriented so that the angles between the Intensity axis and the primary RGB color axes are the same. The Saturation axis is perpendicular to the Intensity axis. Hue is the angle between the radius of the circle defined by the RGB value and the Saturation axis.
Geometric relationship between RGB and IHS 1. With a multispectral and panchromatic images open, open the Algorithm Library, and locate and double-click FUSE. 2. Select the panchromatic image layer as input to the Intensity Layer. 3. Select the multispectral image layers as input into the Red, Green, and Blue image layers. 4. Click the Input Params 1 tab and choose a type of resampling you want to use from the Resample Mode list box. 5. Choose a model from the IHS Model list box. 6. Click Run. An advantage of running IHS and RGB instead of only
Geomatica Focus
running FUSE is that you can enhance the output from IHS individually, and then use the enhanced output in RGB.
be fused with multi-spectral imagery simultaneously acquired by the same sensor or with images from different sensors. The best results is achieved when the imagery is collected simultaneously and the resolutions of the panchromatic and multispectral data are closely matched. The spectral characteristics of the original data will be preserved in the resulting high resolution color imagery. This means that analysis such as classification can be done on the pan-sharpened imagery with the added benefit of higher spatial resolution. For more information, visit the PCI Web site at http://www.pcigeomatics.com/support/ quickguide/pansharp.pdf. For information about orthorectifying QuickBird and IKONOS data for QuickGuides, go to: http://www.pcigeomatics.com/support/ quickguide/QuickBird.pdf http://www.pcigeomatics.com/support/ quickguide/IKONOS_Help_v2.pdf Note: Landsat 7 pan and ms data is co-registered at the satellite; therefore, the geocorrection step is not necessary when using this data. 1. Ensure the panchromatic (PAN) channel and multi-spectral (MS) channels are co-registered, geo-corrected, or orthorectified. 2. Open the PAN and MS images. 3. Open the Algorithm Library, and locate and double-click PANSHARP.
263
Geomatica Focus
4. Choose the pan image channel from the InputPan port. The input reference image channels should be selected so that the ms bands cover the frequency range of the panchromatic channel as closely as possible. The channel number given in the above table is the standard ordering on the sensor and may differ from the order in an actual data file. 5. Select the MS channels to use in the Input port. The best pan-sharpening results are obtained from MS channels whose wavelengths lie within the spectral frequency range of the pan data. 6. The output can either be sent to the viewer or can be saved to a new .pix file. Note: To avoid reducing the radiometric resolution of the data, process and save all the image bands in signed 16 bits. Testing demonstrated that 16 bits for intermediate data are enough; 32 bits are not necessary. The following is a list of the reference bands for some well-known satellite sensors: Table 18. Sensor Landsat 7 (ETM+) SPOT 1, 2, 3
PCI Geomatics
Reference Bands Green 2 Green 1 Green 2 Green 2 Red 2 Red 3 Red 3 Near IR: 4 Near IR: 4
QuickBird Blue 1
There is only one optional parameter in the InputParams 1 tab. For a description of the No data image value parameter, see PANSHARP in the online Help. The automatic image fusion algorithm was developed by Dr. Yun Zhang from the University of New Brunswick. For more information and comparative results, see the below references: Zhang, Yun. Problems in the fusion of commercial high-resolution satellite, Landsat 7 images, and initial solutions. ISPRS, Vol. 34, Part 4, #Geospatial Theory, Processing and Applications#, Ottawa, 2002. Zhang, Yun. A new automatic approach for effectively fusing Landsat 7 and IKONOS images. IEEE/IGARSS'02, Toronto, Canada, June 24-28, 2002.
264
Geomatica Focus
Category
Functions Feet2Meters, Meters2Feet Div, Mod Exp, Pow, Sq(a), Squr, Sq (a,b), hyp Min, max, round, floor, ceil Cosh, Sinh, Tanh, ACosh, ASinh, ATanh Ln, Log, Alog Rand, Seed If a = b, If a <> b, If a > b, If a < b, If a >= b, If a <= b Abs, Neg, Sgn Cos, Sin, Tan, ACos, Asign, Atan, Atan2 @x, @y, @dbx, @dby, @meterx, @metery, @geox, @geoy, @sizex, @sizey String, integer, float, double
Special Values Category Attribute Statistics Functions FieldValue - min, max, mean, sum, mode, std, median, count, first, last, wgtavg Channel - min, max, mean, sum, mode, std, median, count E, PI, 2*PI, PI/2, PI/4 Rad2Deg, Deg2Rad, Variables
Geomatica Focus
advanced mode. Advanced mode provides more category and function options and allows you to choose from several attributes that can be used in your calculations.When you use the Raster Calculator, new output layers are added to the Focus window.
Opens the File to Save dialog box to save an expression using the EASI file format (.eas) Run: Runs the expression you are working with on the data you have selected in the Channels and Bitmaps list. (See Channels and Bitmaps) Run and Close: Runs your expression and closes the Raster Calculator.
Expression
The Expression menu lets you start a new expression, open a saved expressions, export an expression as and EASI file (.eas), and run an expression on chosen data. New:
Close Window: Starts a new Expression sessions. Closes the Raster Calculator. Open: Opens saved expressions. Save: Opens the New Expression Name dialog box to save an expression. Save As: Opens the New Expression Name dialog box to either save an expression or save an expression with a new name. Export to EASI:
Edit
The Edit menu lets you work with the text in the Expression area. You can undo text edits, cut, copy, paste, and delete text in your expression. Undo: Cancels the last action within the Expression area. Cut: Cuts selected text in the Expression area. Copy:
Geomatica Focus
Copies the selected text in the Expression area. Paste: Pastes cut or copied text at the cursor location. Delete: Deletes selected text in the Expression area.
New: Starts a new expression. Open: Opens the Expression name dialog box, where you can select a saved expression from a list. Save:
Select All: Selects all the contents of the Expression area. Opens the New Expression Name box so that you can enter name for a new expression. Run: Runs the expression you have selected. Stop: Stops an expression operation.
View
The View menu lets you choose either basic or advanced mode for the Raster Calculator. Basic: Changes the Raster Calculator to Basic mode. Advanced: Changes the Raster Calculator to Advanced mode.
Expression
The Expression area shows the numeric values and the expressions used in a calculation. You can add values and, in Advanced mode, you can add expressions by selecting a category and choosing a function. Input: Lets you choose file data and specify the layers of a file.
267
Geomatica Focus
Browse: Opens the File Selector dialog box. Channels and Bitmaps: Lets you choose a channel or bitmap from the list for the expression. Attributes: Lists the attributes in the data.
Single Value: Gives a numerical output value. When you disable the check box, the Mask, Type, Display, and Save options are available. Mask: Lets you choose a bitmap mask from within your source data. Type: Lets you choose the bit depth of your output raster data. Display: Shows the output of your expression in the view pane. Save:
Calculator keys
The Raster Calculator Keys include most standard calculator keys and numbers. In Advanced view, additional functions are available. Advanced functions are divided into 15 categories. Categories:
saves the output to a selected file and layer. Lets you choose a category of functions you can use in your expression. Functions: Lists the functions for the category you have chosen. File: Display Saved Results: Opens your results in the view pane after you have run an expression.
Output parameters
The Output parameters area lets you set the parameters for your Expression output data.
PCI Geomatics
268
Geomatica Focus
Opens a File Selector dialog box, where you can choose a target output file. Layer: Lets you select a target output channel. Status bar: Reports single-value results and the status of an expression.
5. Enter an equation in the Expression box that results in a single integer value. When no output parameters are specified, the Raster Calculator checks for errors in the equation (such as parentheses not closed), calculates the result, and displays it in a new window. Many of the same formatting rules for EASI Modeling apply to the Raster Calculator. (See Opening the EASI Modeling dialog box on page 269 )
Geomatica Focus
than the display. When you review the results on-screen, you can delete the new layer by right-clicking the layer in the Maps tree and clicking Remove. For details on numeric, string, logical, and modeling (channel, bitmap and special variable) expressions, see the EASI topic in the Geomatica Help. The online Help provides details on the entire EASI scripting language. EASI Modeling is designed primarily for simple image modeling. While all options are available for PACE MODEL scripts run at the EASI prompt, only a subset of these commands can be used in the EASI Modeling window. For more information on EASI Modeling with Geomatica, go to http://www.pcigeomatics.com/support/ quickguide/EASIModelinginFocus.pdf on the PCI Geomatics Web site. 1. From the File menu, click Open. 2. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select the file on which you want to run an EASI script, and click Open. The image and bitmap layers must exist in the database .pix file prior to running the model. 3. From the Tools menu, click EASI Modeling.
pane. Input File: Lets you select an input file from the list box. Browse: Opens the File Selector dialog box. Run: Runs the EASI script loaded in the EASI Modeling dialog box. Clear: Clears all text appearing in the EASI Modeling dialog box. Load: Opens a File Selector dialog box, where you can select pre-written or saved EASI Modeling files. Save: Saves scripts opened in the EASI Modeling dialog box. Save As: Lets you save an EASI script using another file name. Display Results:
270
Geomatica Focus
assigns the average numeric value of image layers 1 and 2 to image layer 3. %3 = (%1 +%2)/2
The assignment is evaluated for every pixel in image layer 3, using the corresponding pixel values from image layers 1 and 2. You can also assign a constant value to an entire image layer. %1 = 255 A standard set of arithmetic operations is available in modeling expressions: a + b Addition a - b Subtraction a * b Multiplication a / b Division a ^ b Exponentiation (a) Parentheses, also square brackets [].
- a Unary negation The following mathematical intrinsic functions are also available:
Geomatica Focus
sin(), cos(), tan(), asin(), acos(), atan(), ln(), log10(), exp(), exp10(), rad(), deg(), abs(), int(), random() and frac() All the rules previously indicated for image layers also apply to bitmap layers, except that the variables are prefixed with two percent signs instead of one. A bitmap layer can have a value of either 1 (ON) or 0 (OFF). For example, if image layer 1 has a digital number greater than 50, then set bitmap layer 15 to 1. If %1 > 50 then
endif The following example shows a more complex procedure to turn on bitmap layer 2 (%%2), where image layers 1, 2, and 3 are equal to 255. if (%1 = 255) and (%2 = 255) and (%3 = 255) then %%2 = 1 else %%2 = 0
% %15 = 1 endif endif The possible comparison and logical functions are:
a > b a greater than b a < b a less than b a = b a equals b a <> b a not equal b a <= b a less than or equal b a >= b a greater than or equal b a OR b a is true or b is true a AND b a is true and b is true
272
Geomatica Focus
!a a is not true You can also use brackets to ensure operations take place in the expected order. Detailed Examples In the following example, a 'Vegetative Index' calculation using image layers 1 and 2 is performed and the results are saved to image layer 13 of the same file. Next, a 32-bit real image layer is added to the sample data file irvine.pix to store the results. 1. With irvine.pix open, click the File tab. 2. Right-click irvine.pix and click New and then click Raster Layer. 3. In the Add Image Channels dialog box, enter a 1 in the 32 bit real box and click Add. 4. From the Tools menu in the Focus window, click EASI Modeling. 5. In the EASI Modeling dialog box, enter the following model in the model box: %13=(%1-%2)/(%1+%2); To output to an 8-bit image layer, some scaling and adjustment is necessary. 6. Click Run.
Results check box. if (%1 < 55) and (%2 < 55) and (%3 < 55) then %%33 = 1 else %%33 = 0 endif The demo file irvine.pix does not contain a black 'no data' area outside the image. For the purpose of the following example, a digital number of less than 55 in image layers 1, 2, and 3 was used to create the bitmap layer. If you are creating an actual mask for the 'no data' area, you use (%1 = 0) and (%2 = 0) and (%3 = 0) in the IF statement. Change area under bitmap to white in image layers 1, 2, and 3; if %%33=1 then %1=255 %2=255 %3=255
Geomatica Focus
%8 = ((@x-1)*255) / @dbx Perform a 3x3 smoothing filter on image layer 8. Back slashes are used to extend a statement over multiple lines. Also note that the Algorithm Library program FAV performs this operation more efficiently. %8 = (%4[@x-1,@y-1] + %4[@x,@y-1] + %4[@x+1,@y1] + \ %4[@x-1,@y ] + %4[@x,@y ] + %4[@x+1,@y ] + \
%1 = %1 %2 = %2 %3 = %3 endif See 'Special Variables' for details on the use of @geox/ @geoy & @sizex/ @sizey. Blending examples Create an image which smoothly blends image layer 1 into image layer 2 as you move across the image. The output is placed in image layer 8. %8 = ((@x-1)/@dbx)*%2 + ((@dbx-@x)/@dbx)*%1 5) Create a gray level ramp of 0 to 255 across an image layer. %4[@x-1,@y+1] + %4[@x,@y+1] + %4[@x+1,@y+1] ) / 9 When processing pixels on the border of the image, the neighbourhood of the current pixel extends off the database. To ensure that referenced pixels that are off the database (such as%4[@x-1,@y-1] in the top left corner) are usable, the image values are replicated out from the edge of the database to supply values that are missing. The following section describes EASI Modeling syntax in more detail.
Geomatica Focus
The first case is the image layer sign (%) followed by a literal numeric value, such as 1, 2 or 3, indicating layer 1, 2, or 3 of the implicit database (such as the input file). The second example is similar, but the image layer number may be a numeric expression that is evaluated to be the image layer number. The third case is more general yet. The file_spec may be a database file name or a file handle returned by DBOpen(), and the image layer number is evaluated as an expression(#n#). For simple models, you cannot reference files other than the input file selected from the list box. EASI Modeling generally operates on a single file for both input and output. For example, you cannot run the following model if your input file is D:\Geomatica_V82\demo\irvine.pix. %13 = %{"D:\Geomatica_V82\demo\eltoro.pix", 1} However, you can override this by using the DBOpen() function to open any number of database files. To copy image layer 1 from eltoro.pix to image layer 12 in irvine.pix: local integer fdinput, fdoutput fdinput = DBOpen("D:\Geomatica_V82\demo\eltoro.pix", "r")
PCI Geomatics
call DBClose(fdinput) call DBClose(fdoutput) The irvine.pix file is 512x512 and eltoro.pix is 1024x1024. The previous operation copies image layer 1 of eltoro.pix to image 13 of irvine.pix, but because irvine.pix is the implicit database (such as the input file), the area of operation is 0, 0, 512, 512; only the top left quarter of eltoro.pix is copied into channel 13 of irvine.pix. The second part of the image layer specification is an optional subscript specification. In the above case, the default subscript specification used is x --> x, y --> y. The subscript specification allows you to indicate the pixel that should be operated on for the current value of X and Y, and may be given as an expression. The following example assigns a sampled copy of eltoro.pix to irvine.pix. The @x and @y symbols are the current pixel location when the expression is evaluated for each pixel. local integer fdinput, fdoutput fdinput = DBOpen( "D:\Geomatica_V82\demo\eltoro.pix", "r")
275
Geomatica Focus
%%n [(x_expr, y_expr)] %%{ n } [(x_expr, y_expr)] %%{ file_spec, n } [(x_expr, y_expr)]
call DBClose(fdinput) call DBClose(fdoutput) X and Y vary from 0 to 511 as the implicit window of operation is 0, 0, 512, 512... the area of irvine.pix. However, image layer 1 of eltoro.pix is sampled for values of 1 to 1023. As @x and @y value from 0 to 511, the expression @x*2+1 varies from 1 to 1023. It is also legal for the subscript expressions to extend of the source database. In this case image values from the edge of the database are replicated out as far as is needed to satisfy requests. Thus, a simple filter such as example 6 above the following will work in a reasonable manner, even on the edge of the database. Bitmap Layer Variables Bitmaps layers are basically one bit deep image layers, used primarily to serve as masks for regions where operations are to take place and may be specified in a manner very similar to image layers. All the rules previously indicated for image layers also apply to bitmap layers, except that the variables are prefixed with two percent characters instead of one. Also, the index number is the segment number of the bitmap layer to be used.
PCI Geomatics 276
Bitmap layer variables will only assume values of zero or one. Any non-zero value assigned to a bitmap layer will be treated as one.
Geomatica Focus
then %1 = 0 %2 = 0 endif Special Variables Allow access to information about the size and georeferencing information of channels being operated on and the position of the current pixel. The following special variables may be treated as elements in modeling expressions. @x current x (pixel) processing location @y current y (line) processing location @dbx size of database in x (pixel) direction @dby size of database in y (line) direction @meterx size of a pixel in x direction in meters @metery size of a pixel in y direction in meters @geox x georeferenced centre of current pixel @geoy y georeferenced centre of current pixel @sizex x size of a pixel in georeferenced units
PCI Geomatics
@sizey y size of a pixel in georeferenced units Note that @x, @y, @geox and @geoy change value for each pixel processed, while @dbx, @dby, @meterx, @metery, @sizex and @sizey remain constant over the whole image. It is usually necessary to use the @x and @y special variables when constructing subscript expressions for channel expressions. For example, the following assignment would mirror an image across a vertical center line. The @dbx is used in computing the center line. %2 = %1[@dbx-@x+1,@y] Numeric Expressions Numeric expressions in EASI are normally operated on in double precision floating point. Values with less precision are promoted to double precision before operations are performed. A wide set of built-in operations are available in numeric expressions and are listed below with a short description. a + b Addition a - b Subtraction a * b Multiplication a / b Division
277
Geomatica Focus
a ^ b Exponentiation ( a ) Parenthesis, also square brackets []. - a Unary negation A numeric element can be any of the following: A numeric constant. An EASI variable of type byte, int, float or double. An element of a numeric variable array. A numeric intrinsic function. A numeric user defined function. A subscripted numeric parameter.
Example
if (%1 = 255) and (%2 = 255) and (%3 = 255) then %%2 = 1 else %%2 = 0 endif Logical Logical expressions in EASI are used to compute TRUE/FALSE results for use with the IF and WHILE conditional statements. There is currently no way to store a pure logical value in an EASI variable. Logical expressions consist of comparisons between numeric and string expressions combined with the use of the logical operations AND, OR, and NOT. The equality and inequality tests may be used with two numeric expressions. The equal sign (#=#) is used to test for equality, while inequality is tested with #<># or #!=#.
Numeric constants can be entered as decimal or scientific notation numbers with an optional negative sign. Scientific notation is denoted with the #E# or #D# character - for example 123000 can be written as 1.23e5, 1.23 * 10 ^ 5 Comparison and logical functions a > b a greater than b a < b a less than b a = b a equals b a <> b a not equal b a <= b a less than or equal b a >= b a greater than or equal b
PCI Geomatics
278
Geomatica Focus
Examples
If( %1 = 0 ) then ... while( flag <> 1 ) ... The ">", "<", ">=" and "<=" operations may only be performed on numeric expressions.
endif if( A = 1 & b = 1 )then ... endif The IF statement is used to conditionally execute statements. IF( logical_expression )THEN statement_list
Examples:
while( total <= 100 ) while( total < 101 ) while( NOT total > 100 ) while( NOT total >= 101 ) The logical operations AND and OR operate on two logical expressions, while NOT operates on one logical expression. The symbols #&#, #|# and #!# are considered to be equivalent to AND, OR, and NOT. [ELSEIF( logical_expression )THEN statement_list] [ELSE statement_list] ENDIF logical_expr - a logical expression as described in #Logical Expression.# statement_list - a list of one or more statements.
Examples:
if( A = 1 AND B = 1 )then ...
PCI Geomatics
Each logical_expression is evaluated in turn until one of them evaluates to be true. When one is true, the corresponding statement_list will be executed, and
279
Geomatica Focus
control will continue beyond the ENDIF. If none of the logical expressions is true and an ELSE clause exists, the associated statement_list will be executed. The WHILE command provides a general purpose looping construct. WHILE( log_expr ) statement_list ENDWHILE log_expr - a logical expression which is evaluated before each iteration of the loop. The logical expression in the WHILE statement is evaluated. If the result is true, the statement list is executed; otherwise, control skips to the statement following the ENDWHILE. Once the statement list has been executed, control returns to the WHILE statement to test the logical expression again. It is possible to jump into, or out of, the WHILE loop using the GOTO statement, but this is poor style and may not work in future versions of EASI. The FOR command provides a simple looping construct over a series of numeric values. FOR iter_var = start_val TO end_val [BY incr_val] statement_list
PCI Geomatics
ENDFOR iter_var - the iteration variable. This may be any numeric variable type, including a parameter. start_val - this initial value to assign to the `iter_var'. end_val - when `iter_var' passes this value, iteration stops. incr_val - a value by which to increment `iter_var' each iteration. The default is 1. The FOR statement initializes the iteration variable to the initial value, checks it against the end value, and if the end value is not exceeded it executes the statement list. When the ENDFOR statement is reached, the iteration variable is increased by the increment value and compared to the end value. If the end value is not exceeded, the statement list is executed again. The start value may be greater than the end value and the increment value may be negative, but if the increment value does not take the iteration variable value closer to the end value each iteration, the FOR loop will never terminate. It is possible to alter the value of the iteration variable inside the FOR loop and also to use GOTO to escape or enter the loop, but this is poor style and may cause problems in future versions of EASI.
Example:
280
Geomatica Focus
The following example runs the PACE task CLR on the first 128 channels of the PCIDSK file irvine128.pix in groups of 16 channels at a time. local i,j valu = 0 file="C:\Geomatica_V82\demo\irvine128.pix" for i = 1 to 128 by 16 for j = 1 to 16 dboc(j) = i + j - 1 endfor run clr endfor Multiple statements can be placed on the same line by separating the statements with a statement separator. The back slash and semi-colon characters can be used interchangeable for this purpose. A line of input may be almost any length.
File = "C:\Geomatica_V82\demo\irvine.pix"; run clr Single Statements You can split very long statements over multiple lines by placing a back slash character, not a semi-colon, at the end of each incomplete line.
Examples
File = "C:\Geomatica_V82\demo\irvine.pix" \ run clr
PCI Geomatics 281
Geomatica Focus
Geomatica Focus
Chapter 7
Understanding atmospheric correction
The data obtained by optical satellite sensors with high spatial resolution has become an invaluable tool for many groups interested in studying, managing, developing, and protecting our population, environment, and resources. Unfortunately, satellite images are often obscured by atmospheric effects like haze as a result of conditions in the atmosphere at the time the image was captured. Atmospheric correction is a process used to reduce or eliminate atmospheric effects and reveal more accurate surface reflectance values. Two atmospheric correction processes are available: ATCOR2, which is used for correcting satellite imagery over flat terrain, and ATCOR3, which is used for correcting satellite imagery over rugged terrain. Both are algorithms that work with a database of atmospheric correction functions, which are stored in lookup tables. The algorithms have been developed mainly for satellite sensors with a small swath angle such as Landsat and SPOT, but some wide field-of-view (FOV) sensors such as IRS-WiFS are supported as well. For more information on the atmospheric correction, please see the following articles:
PCI Geomatics
R. Richter, 'A spatially adaptive fast atmospheric correction algorithm' Int. J. Remote Sensing, Vol. 17, 1201-1214 (1996) R. Richter, 'Atmospheric correction of satellite data with haze removal including a haze/clear transition region', Computers & Geosciences, Vol. 22, 675-681 (1996) R. Richter, 'Correction of satellite imagery over mountainous terrain', Applied Optics, Vol. 37, 4004-4015 (1998)
Preparing data
Before you begin setting up the atmospheric correction process, the data must be in one PCIDSK (.pix) file with all the channels in the same bit depth and resolution. Focus supports 8-bit unsigned, 16-bit unsigned, 16-bit signed, and 32-bit real bit depths. 1. Transfer the data from the CD to PCIDSK (.pix) files, see Transfer data to PCIDSK on page 283 . 2. Reproject the thermal data, see Reprojecting data on page 284 . 3. Assemble the data into one PCIDSK (.pix) file, see Assembling data into a file on page 285 .
283
Geomatica Focus
extracts the metadata, and saves the satellite path information in a segment. By preparing your imagery this way, Focus can automatically set or calculate several parameters when you configure the atmospheric correction. The number and types of bands on the CD depends on the sensor used to capture the data. Usually, the visible, thermal, and panchromatic bands are in different resolutions. Some sensors may not provide thermal or panchromatic bands. Read the bands of the same resolution at the same time into one file. For example, Landsat 7 data usually has eight bands: bands 1 to 5 and 7 are the visible wavelengths with a 30-meter resolution, band 6 contains two thermal wavelengths with a 60-meter resolution, and band 8 is the panchromatic with a 15-meter resolution. You would use the CDLAND7 algorithm to read bands 1 to 5 and 7 into a file, then band 6 into a file, and then band 8 into a file. If you do not intend to use the thermal or panchromatic bands in the atmospheric correction process, then you do not need to read those bands into a file. The CD read algorithms are available through EASI, Modeler, OrthoEngine, and Focus. 1. In the main menu, click Tools and then click Algorithm Librarian. 2. Under PCI Predefined in the Data Interchange folder, open the CD Reading/Utilities folder. 3. Click the appropriate CD read algorithm for the
PCI Geomatics
data. 4. Click Open. 5. Enter the required information on the Files and Input Params 1 tabs. 6. Click Run. 7. Repeat for each set of bands with the same resolution.
Reprojecting data
If you intend to use a thermal band in the atmospheric correction (ATCOR) process, you need to reproject it to the same resolution as the visible bands. For Landsat 7 data you can use either the high gain or low gain thermal channels with ATCOR. For ASTER data use band 13. For example, Landsat 7 thermal bands have a 60-meter resolution while its visible bands have 30-meter resolution. Therefore, the thermal bands have to be reprojected to a 30-meter resolution. 1. In the main menu, click Tools and then click Reprojection. 2. Click the Browse button beside Source file and select the file that you want to reproject. 3. In the Destination file box, type the path and file name for the reprojected data. 4. In the Output format box, click PIX:PCIDSK. 5. Under Reprojection Bounds, click Use bounds and resolution in the list. 6. In the Pixel Size boxes in the X and Y boxes, type the new resolution. 7. In the Resampling list, click the resampling method of your choice. Nearest: Nearest Neighbor resampling
284
Geomatica Focus
identifies the gray level of the pixel closest to the specified input coordinates and assigns that value to the output coordinates. Although this method is considered the most efficient in terms of computation time, it introduces small errors in the output image. The output image may be offset spatially by up to half a pixel, which may cause the image to have a jagged appearance. Bi-Linear: Bi-linear resampling determines the gray level from the weighted average of the four closest pixels to the specified input coordinates and assigns that value to the output coordinates. This method generates an image with a smoother appearance than Nearest Neighbor resampling, but the gray level values are altered in the process, which results in blurring or loss of image resolution. Cubic: Cubic resampling determines the gray level from the weighted average of the 16 closest pixels to the specified input coordinates and assigns that value to the output coordinates. The resulting image is slightly sharper than one produced by Bi-linear resampling, and it does not have the disjointed appearance produced by Nearest Neighbor resampling. 8. Under Source Layers, click Select All. 9. Click Add. 10. Click Reproject.
correction process, you need to add the thermal band to the file containing the visible bands. The thermal band must be in the same resolution as the visible bands. For Landsat 7 data you can use either the high gain or low gain thermal channel with ATCOR. For ASTER data use band 13. 1. From the Files tree, right-click the thermal channel. 2. Click Export (Save As) and click To existing file. 3. Beside Destination file click the Browse button and select the file containing the visible bands. 4. Under Source Layers, click Select All. 5. Click Add. 6. Click Transfer Layers.
285
Geomatica Focus
image. 9. If the date is included in the metadata, the Date boxes are set automatically. If not, in the Date boxes click the month, day, and year when the image was taken. 10. The Tilt list is available only when the sensor selected provides the tilt capability. If the sensor was tilted when the image was taken, click the title angle used in the Tilt list. If the metadata describes the tilt angle in terms of left and right, right means West and left means East. 11. In the Calibration file list click the calibration file for the image and sensor type or click Browse to select a file. In most cases you can use the file with #standard# (or std) in the file name. For more information, see Editing an existing calibration file to create a new file on page 292 . 12. In the Atmospheric definition area list, click the aerosol type for the image. For more information see About aerosol types on page 287 . 13. In the Condition list, click the standard atmosphere present when the image was taken. For more information see About standard atmospheres on page 287 . 14. If you also selected a thermal band to correct, in the Thermal atmospheric definition list click the standard atmosphere present when the image was taken. For more information see About standard atmospheres on page 287 . 15. If the date, time, and position are included in the metadata, the solar zenith value will be calculated automatically. If they are not, in the Solar zenith box type the solar zenith value or click Calculate to calculate the value (see Calculating the solar zenith and azimuth on page 290 ).
286
Geomatica Focus
16. (Available for ATCOR3 only) If the date, time, and position are included in the metadata, the solar azimuth value will be calculated automatically. If they are not, in the Solar azimuth box type the solar azimuth value or click Calculate to calculate the value (see Calculating the solar zenith and azimuth on page 290 ). 17. In the Visibility box type the visibility value. For more information, see About visibility on page 291 . 18. In the Adjacency box type the adjacency value. For more information, see About adjacency on page 291 . 19. (Available for thermal bands only) In the Offset to surface temperature list, type the value used to compensate for a systematic error in the conversion of radiance values to temperature values. For more information, see Determining the offset to surface temperature value on page 291 . 20. Click OK.
dust-like and organic particles. It is predominant in continental areas whose atmosphere is not strongly influenced by urban or industrial centers. It is recommended for areas such as forested, agricultural, or snow-covered areas. Urban: The urban aerosol type is composed mostly of particles such as sulfate aerosols resulting from combustion and industrial activities. If you do not know the composition of the atmosphere, the rural aerosol type is recommended. Desert: The desert aerosol type is composed mostly of large dust-like particles. If you do not know the composition of the atmosphere, the rural aerosol type is recommended. Maritime: The maritime aerosol type is composed mostly of sea-salt, dust-like and organic particles. If you do not know the composition of the atmosphere, the rural aerosol type is recommended.
Geomatica Focus
image was captured and the location. The standard atmospheres are: Dry or Dry Desert: A dry atmosphere has a total water vapor content of 0.41 (g cm-2). Fall (spring): A fall (autumn) atmosphere has a total water vapor content of 1.14 (g cm-2). Humid: A humid atmosphere has a total water vapor content of 4.94 (g cm-2). Mid-latitude summer: A midlatitude summer atmosphere has a total water vapor content of 2.92 (g cm-2). Mid-latitude winter: A midlatitude winter atmosphere has a total water vapor content of 0.85 (g cm-2). Sub-Arctic summer: A sub-arctic summer atmosphere has a total water vapor content of 2.08 (g cm-2). Sub-Arctic winter: A sub-arctic winter atmosphere has a total water vapor content of 0.42 (g cm-2). Tropical: A tropical atmosphere has a total water vapor content of 4.11 (cm or g cm-2). Arid: An arid atmosphere has a total water vapor content of 2.15 (g cm-2). US standard: The 1976 US Standard atmosphere has a total water vapor content of 1.42 (g cm-2).
mandatory for ATCOR3. The Sky View and Shadow calculations are optional. These calculations can be automatically calculated from the DEM or you can import them in the Elevation Information Setup dialog box if you have already created a file containing these values. If you click Calculate for Slope, Aspect, Sky View, or Shadow, PCIDSK files are automatically created in the user folder where you installed Geomatica when you perform the atmospheric correction. By default each file name is the original input file name prefixed with 'slope_', 'aspect_', 'skyview_', or 'shadow_'. The Slope algorithm measures the angle of the incline for each pixel, which is expressed as a value between 0 and 90 degrees. The value is calculated from the plane formed by the vector connecting the left and right neighbours of the pixel and the vector connecting the upper and lower neighbours of the pixel. The Aspect algorithm measures the orientation of the slope of each pixel, which is expressed as a value between 0 and 360 degrees relative to the top of the image. The value is calculated from the orientation of the plane formed by the vector connecting the left and right neighbours of a pixel and the vector connecting the upper and lower neighbours of the pixel. The angle is measured between north (top of image) and the projection of the normal vector of this plane onto the horizontal plane. The Sky View algorithm uses a ray tracing program to determine the proportion of the sky hemisphere visible for each pixel of the terrain.
288
Geomatica Focus
The Shadow algorithm uses a ray tracing program and the solar zenith and azimuth angles to calculate the cast shadows. 1. Open the Atmospheric Correction Configuration dialog box, see Opening the Atmospheric Correction Configuration dialog box on page 285 . 2. Under Elevation Information Setup, click the Setup button.
that contains the aspect values or click Browse to select the file. In the Layer list, click the layer of aspect values. 5. Under Sky View, either: Click None if you do not want to include sky view factor in the atmospheric correction. Click Calculate to calculate the sky view factor automatically. Click From file to import the sky view factor from a file. In the From file list, click the file that contains the sky view factor or click Browse to select the file. In the Layer list, click the layer with the sky view factor. 6. Under Shadow, either: Click None if you do not want to include shadow data in the atmospheric correction. Click Calculate to calculate the shadow data automatically. Click From file to import the shadow data from a file. In the From file list, click the file that contains the shadow data or click Browse to select the file. In the Layer list, click the layer of shadow data. 7. Click OK.
Geomatica Focus
dialog box, see Opening the Atmospheric Correction Configuration dialog box on page 285 . 2. Under Sensor Information, click the Band Setup button.
using a CD read algorithm, the values can be extracted from the metadata. 1. Open the Atmospheric Correction Configuration dialog box, see Opening the Atmospheric Correction Configuration dialog box on page 285 . 2. Under Correction Parameter, click the Calculate button.
Geomatica Focus
1. In the Date boxes click the month, day, and year when the image was taken. 2. In the Time boxes, type hours, minutes, and seconds when the image was taken. 3. In the Latitude box, type the y-coordinate of the center of the image. 4. In the Longitude box, type the x-coordinate of the center of the image. 5. Click Calculate. 6. Click OK.
Visibility is used to more accurately specify the atmospheric conditions at the time the image was taken. If the metadata that came with the image does not include the visibility values, you can obtain it from the following sources: USA: http://www.noaa.gov/wx.htmlCanada: http://www.weatheroffice.ec.gc.ca/canada_e.html
About adjacency
Adjacency is the effect of backscattering on neighboring pixels. It is used to more accurately specify the atmospheric conditions at the time the image was taken. The adjacency effect is calculated for an area around each pixel up to a maximum of 200 pixels. For example, an image with 30-meter resolution like Landsat will have a maximum Adjacency value of 6, because 200 multiplied by 30 meters is 6000 meters, which is 6 kilometers. Therefore, an Adjacency value of 0 would not take the adjacency effect into consideration while 6 would calculate the maximum effect. The default is 1 and is suitable for most cases.
About visibility
Visibility, or optical depth, is a meteorological statistic that calculates the opacity of the atmosphere at a certain time and place. It measures the furthest distance that a person can see a prominent object. In Focus the range is between 5 and 180 kilometers. Focus uses the value set in the Visibility box. For more information, see Opening the Atmospheric Correction Configuration dialog box on page 285 for the Spatially Varying Conditions, and for Constant Conditions options, see Opening the Run Atmospheric Correction dialog box on page 294 . When you use the Spatially Varying Conditions option, Focus calculates the visibility for each pixel in the image using the Visibility value as a starting point for the calculation. When you use the Constant Conditions option, Focus uses the Visibility value as a constant for each pixel in the image. The calculation results in a Visibility layer that is a temporary PCIDSK (.pix) file with its default file name being the the original file name prefixed with 'hot_level_'.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
the region at the time the image was captured. These temperature samples are sometimes referred to as 'ground truths'. If you compare the ground truths to the results from the same points collected on a temperature layer using the Spectral Plot, the temperature for each point in both should be the same. If you observe a consistent difference in temperature, you can enter the value in the Offset to surface temperature box. For example, you compare the actual water temperatures of three lakes to their temperatures reported in the Spectral Plot and discover that there is a difference of 2 degrees between the ground truths and the Spectral Plot. Therefore, you type 2 in the Offset to surface temperature box. 1. Configure and run the atmospheric correction. For more information, see Opening the Atmospheric Correction Configuration dialog box on page 285 and Opening the Run Atmospheric Correction dialog box on page 294 . 2. Position the cursor precisely on the feature that you can clearly identify in the image for which you have a known ground temperature. 3. In the Maps tree, right-click the ATCOR MetaLayer. 4. Click Spectra Plot. 5. On the Atcor Spectra Plotting dialog box, click From Image. 6. Compare the actual temperature of the feature to the temperature displayed under Report. 7. Repeat step 2 to step 6 for each ground truth.
Geomatica Focus
comparing the water reflectance values in the NIR band to the reflectance values in the snow band (1.6 um band). In most cases the default values for reflectance thresholds will identify water and snow in image. However, you may have to iteratively adjust the threshold values and recreate the mask to achieve the desired results. 1. In the Maps tree, right-click the ATCOR MetaLayer. 2. Click Define Haze and Cloud.
Geomatica Focus
5. In the Water Refl. Threshold in Snow (1.6um) (%) box, type the value in percent representing the limit below which is considered water reflectance values in the 1.6 um sensor band. 6. In the Cloud Refl. Threshold in Blue (<0.8um) (%) box, type the value in percent representing the limit below which is considered cloud reflectance values. 7. Under Output, click either: Display to show the mask in the Focus view pane. Save to save the mask layer in a file. In the File list, click the file where you want to save the mask or click Browse to select the file. In the Haze Layer list, click the layer where you want to save the haze mask. In the Cloud Layer list, click the layer where you want to save the cloud mask. 8. Click Create Mask.
1. Right-click the ATCOR MetaLayer. 2. Click Edit Cloud Mask. 3. Use the New Shapes tools to modify the bitmap. For more information, see Adding points to an active layer on page 303 .
Geomatica Focus
To use the Spatially Varying Conditions option, you must have the Red, near-infrared (NIR), and Short Wavelength Infrared (SWIR) bands, and you must have reference areas of known reflectance such as a section of dense vegetation or a body of water present outside the haze to use as a reference target. When you use the Spatially Varying Conditions option, Focus calculates the visibility for each pixel in the image using the value set in the Visibility box on the Atmospheric Correction Configuration dialog box as a starting point for the calculation. Use the Constant Conditions option when you are missing one of the bands, the image does not contain a reference target, or you are sure that the image represents an area with constant atmospheric conditions such as an area without rugged terrain, large bodies of water, or mountains. When you use the Constant Conditions option, Focus uses the value set in the Visibility box on the Atmospheric Correction Configuration dialog box as the visibility for each pixel in the image. The result of the atmospheric correction is a scaled surface reflectance image with a range of 0 to 255 for 8-bit data and 0 to 65535 for 16-bit data. If you want unscaled values or percent reflectance values, divide the scaled values by 4 for 8-bit data and by 10 for 16-bit data. For example, 150 divided by 10 equals 15% reflectance for a 16-bit image. 1. In the Maps tree, right-click the ATCOR MetaLayer. 2. Click Run Atmospheric Correction.
1. Click Constant Conditions if you want to perform the correction assuming relatively uniform atmospheric conditions over the image. 2. Click Spatially Varying Conditions if you want to perform the correction assuming differing atmospheric conditions throughout the image. 3. Under Corrected Output, in the File box click the file where you want to save the corrected data or click Browse to select a file.
Geomatica Focus
fraction of photosynthetically active radiation (FPAR) equation on page 297 . 5. To calculate ground reflectance, select the Surface Albedo check box. 6. To calculate the difference between the emitted atmospheric radiation and the emitted surface radiation, select the Thermal Flux Difference check box. 7. To calculate the exchange rate of energy between the earth#s surface and the underground, select the Ground Heat Flux check box. 8. To calculate the shortwave solar radiation absorbed by the surface, select the Absorbed Solar Radiation check box. 9. To calculate the exchange rate of stored heat energy between the air and the earth#s surface, select the Latent Heat check box. Latent heat flux is measures the amount of energy needed to change matter from one state to another (from solid to liquid to gas). 10. To calculate the exchange rate of excess heat energy between the air and the earth#s surface, select the Sensible Heat check box. Sensible heat flux measures the amount of energy needed to change air temperature. 11. To calculate the difference between absorbed and emitted shortwave and longwave radiations, select the Net Radiation check box. 12. Click Run Correction.
The leaf area index (LAI) is the density of the green leaves in an area. It is a measure of the green leaf area (one-side) per unit of surface area. You can choose one of two equations to calculate the density: the Soil Adjusted Vegetation Index or the Normalized Difference Vegetation Index. Both equations contain three parameters whose values depend on the type of vegetation being measured and on the season in which they are being measured. The LAI can only approximate typical trends in the vegetation. It should not be used to replace or confirm field measurements of other types of vegetation in different seasons. The defaults provided for the equations are typical for soybean crops (Choudury et al. 1994). By using a constant set of values, either custom or default, to calculate the LAI for images of the same area over time, you can uncover trends in the vegetation. SAVI uses the red and near-infrared bands to measure the density and vigor of green vegetation by attempting to eliminate the reflectivity of the ground beneath the canopy. NDVI uses the visible and near-infrared bands to measure the density and vigor of green vegetation by comparing the amount of visible light reflected to the amount of near-infrared light reflected. 1. Open the Run Atmospheric Correction dialog box, see Opening the Run Atmospheric Correction dialog box on page 294 . 2. Under Value-Added Data Output, select the Leaf
296
Geomatica Focus
in different seasons. The defaults provided for the equations are typical values based on several studies (Asrar et al. 1984, Asrar 1989, Wiegand et al, 1990, 1991). By using a constant set of values, either custom or default, to calculate the FPAR for images of the same area over time, you can uncover trends in the vegetation. 1. Open the Run Atmospheric Correction dialog box, see Opening the Run Atmospheric Correction dialog box on page 294 . 2. Under Value-Added Data Output, select the Fraction of Absorbed Radiation check box. 3. Click the FPAR Options button.
Changing the values for the fraction of photosynthetically active radiation (FPAR) equation
The Fraction of Photosynthetically Active Radiation (FPAR) equation uses the red and near-infrared bands to calculate the fraction of radiation between 400 and 700 nm absorbed by green vegetation. The FPAR equation contains three parameters whose values depend on the type of vegetation being measured and on the season in which they are being measured. The equation also includes the result from the leaf area index (LAI) equation that you selected (see Opening the Leaf Area Index Model dialog box on page 296 ). The FPAR equation can only approximate typical trends in the vegetation. It should not be used to replace or confirm field measurements of other types of vegetation
PCI Geomatics
297
Geomatica Focus
7.
8.
9.
10.
includes a thermal band) In the Temperature gradient box, type a value representing the number of degrees Celsius at which the temperature will change per 100 meters of elevation. (Available for ATCOR3 only and only if your data includes a thermal band) In the Water vapor partial pressure box, type a value representing the rate at which the pressure will change per 100 meters of elevation. In Threshold T1 box, type the value representing the limit below which is considered bare soil or other nongreen materials. For more information, see Setting the thresholds for the reference pixels on page 299 . In Threshold T2 box, type the value representing the limit below which is considered high NIR reflectance. For more information, see Setting the thresholds for the reference pixels on page 299 . In the Reflectance % in RED band box, type the value in percent representing the limit below which is considered vegetation. For more information, see Setting the thresholds for the reference pixels on page 299 . (Available for ATCOR3 only) Under BRDF Correction, click Empirical Correction if you want to correct view and illumination angle effects or click No Correction if you do not. To specify which empirical correction function you want to use, click BRDF Options. For more information about the Bidirectional Reflectance Distribution Function (BRDF), see Opening the Empirical BRDF Correction dialog box on page 299 .
11. (Available for ATCOR3 only) Under Terrain Reflectance, you select the method that you want
298
Geomatica Focus
to use to calculate the terrain reflectance for each pixel, which is used to calculate the adjacency correction and the spherical albedo effect. You can click either: 3 iterations to calculate the average terrain reflectance. The equation is computed iteratively with the terrain view factor and sky view factor calculated from the digital elevation model (DEM) to achieve convergence. No iterations to calculate the terrain reflectance without iterative calculations to improve the accuracy. 12. Click OK.
considered bare soil or other nongreen materials. Threshold T2 identifies pixels with low reflectance in the NIR band. The threshold marks the value representing the limit below which is considered materials with high reflectance. It is used to exclude vegetation with high reflectance, therefore identifying dark vegetation. Reflectance % in RED band identifies the value in percent representing the limit below which is considered vegetation. The reflectance values for dark vegetation are typically between 1 to 3% in the RED band. Dr. Richter recommends that you begin with a value of 2% and compare the result to the original image to determine if the identified targets are acceptable reference pixels. See Opening the Advanced Option dialog box on page 297 .
Geomatica Focus
extreme incident angles so that they more closely resemble the reflectance values of pixels with moderate incident angles. In the BRDF equation: t represents the threshold angle i represents the incidence angle e represents the exitance angle (for sensors with the tilt capability) The lower boundary value (g) is a value less than 1 that constrains the factor G to prevent over-reducing the reflectance of pixels with extreme incident angles: . By default the lower boundary value is 0.25. If the corrected reflectance values appear too low (dark), decrease the lower boundary value and repeat the correction. 1. Open the Advanced Options dialog box, see Opening the Advanced Option dialog box on page 297 . 2. Under BRDF Correction, click Empirical Correction. 3. Click the BRDF Options button.
in a larger off-nadir viewing angle, 20 to 30 degrees for example. (4) G = sqrt[cos(i)*cos(e)/cos(t)] the sensor was tilted when the image was taken resulting in a larger off-nadir viewing angle, 20 to 30 degrees for example. 2. In the Threshold angle box, type the value that results from adding 20 degrees to the solar zenith value. 3. In the Lower boundry box, type a value to raise or lower the boundary. 4. Click OK.
Geomatica Focus
A shape that contains two or more vertices, where the first and last vertices do not conjoin.
Chapter 8
Understanding vector layer types
Vectors are a way of presenting spatial information. Instead of representing that information in pixels, vectors represent the information as points, lines, and polygons. Focus provides two main methods for presenting the vectors: Unstructured and Topological. Each method contains several vector layer types. Vector layers contain a number of default attributes that can be viewed with the Attribute Manager. For more information, see Understanding vector layer type default fields on page 307 .
Whole Polygon: A shape that contains three or more vertices, where the first and last vertices conjoin. Unconnected Table: A layer that contains attributes but is not associated to a geographical component. (See Creating an unconnected table on page 306 )
Geomatica Focus
Topological Polygon Contains polygons that use topological conventions. A topological polygon is a closed figure formed by one or more topological lines that define the boundary of a specific location. When a topological polygon overlaps another, the intersecting points become nodes; the lines are split, resulting in a new polygon in the overlap. That is, two topological polygons become three. A topological polygon layer is composed of three layers. When you create a topological polygon layer, Focus also generates a line layer and a node layer. As you create and edit polygons, Focus manipulates the lines and nodes that form the polygon. The line layer includes attributes that identify which polygons lie on either side of each line. The region outside the boundary of the digitized areas on the layer are represented by a global polygon. This global polygon, called Outside Area, appears as -1 in the Attribute Table for topological line layers. These attributes describe the relationship between the shapes. Understanding topological polygons
PCI Geomatics 302
Thematic rasters
A thematic raster is a raster with associated attributes. Normally, rasters present spatial information as pixel values. The numeric value of the pixel represents the attribute for that pixel. Neighboring pixels with the same pixel value collectively represent a surface feature. In thematic rasters, the pixel values are associated to any number of attributes, which can be viewed using the Attribute Manager. In Focus, the attributes for a thematic raster are stored in a vector segment in its file.
Geomatica Focus
without correction in the viewer, but accurate ground coordinates are calculated for each pixel using the pixel and line coordinates, the math model, and the digital elevation model (DEM) or an approximate elevation value that you provide. For more information, see Using a math model with images on page 40 . In the Math Model Area, you can digitize geocoded three-dimensional vectors on a raw image, instead of going through the potentially time-consuming, labor-intensive process of orthorectifying the imagery. Vectors are saved in the projection of the layer without the effects of the math model. As such, the vectors have accurate X, Y, and Z coordinates. You can open vectors digitized in the Math Model Area in an Area containing an orthorectified or geometrically corrected image and the vectors will display correctly. However, if you open vectors without elevation in a Math Model Area, the vectors may be offset from the correct position, as it uses elevation values to calculate the correct position. When you edit vectors in a Math Model Area, you are essentially moving objects in three-dimensional space using two-dimensional vision. You cannot modify the X and Y coordinates of the vector without affecting the Z coordinate. To edit only the X and Y vector coordinates, open the vectors in a planimetric layer instead.
1. In the Maps tree, right-click an Area and click New Vector Layer. 2. In the New Vector Layer dialog box, enable the type of layer that you want in the Layer Type area. For more information about layer types, see Understanding vector layer types on page 301 . 3. In the Georeferencing area, enable one of the following options: Use Area Georeferencing: uses the same georeferencing as defined in the New Area. Use Layer Georeferencing: uses the same georeferencing as defined in an existing layer. Choose a layer that has the desired georeferencing form the list box. User-entered: defines the georeferencing. Enter the projection , bounds, and extents as required. 4. Click OK.
Geomatica Focus
2. Click in the view pane where you want to add the first point of the line or polygon. 3. Repeat step 2 until you have digitized the shape that you want. 4. Double-click the last vertex to complete the shape.
Using the mono-restitution process, you can digitize vectors with accurate X, Y, and Z coordinates with the New Shapes tools. To set up mono-restitution, you need a raw image with a math model segment and a digital elevation model (DEM), or an estimate of the elevation. The math model and DEM are used to set the georeferencing for the Math Model Area, in which the image is displayed without correction in the viewer. Accurate ground coordinates are calculated for each pixel using the pixel and line coordinates, the math model, and the DEM or approximate elevation value. For more information, see Using a math model with images on page 40 and Understanding vector editing in a math model area on page 302 . 1. In the Focus window, open a raw image with a math model segment. Click Math Model. 2. Set up the Math Model Area (see Using the math model for georeferencing on page 41 ). 3. Use the New Shapes tools on the Editing toolbar to digitize vectors (see Adding points to an active layer on page 303 ).
Geomatica Focus
See: Viewing records on page 307 Selecting and clearing records and fields on page 307 Understanding vector layer type default fields on page 307 Adding records to the Attribute Manager on page 309 Adding new fields on page 309 Setting the field definitions on page 309 Changing an existing field to a geometry field on page 310 Updating the geometry on page 311 Using find and replace in the Attribute Manager on page 311 Selecting all records that match a value in the current cell on page 312 Using the compute function on page 314 Creating a relational database on page 312 Opening the Aggregate Attributes dialog box on page 315 Opening the Area Neighbors dialog box on page 315 Opening the Z-value Transfer dialog box on page 317
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
3. Choose one of the following options from the When entering cell list box: Select Entire Cell: highlights the contents of the cell Go To Start Of Cell: places the cursor before the contents in a cell Go To End Of Cell: places the cursor after the contents in a cell 4. Click OK.
numeric field from the selected records Median: ranks for each numeric field the values of the selected records in numerical order. The median is the middle value of the selected records. Maximum: displays the highest value in the field from the selected records Standard Deviation: measures the variation in the distribution of values, which is calculated from square root of the variance 3. Click OK.
306
Geomatica Focus
MetaData tab. 5. Click the Add button. 6. In the Value column next to LAYER_TYPE, type TABLE in upper case letters. 7. Click OK.
open. 2. From the View menu in the Attribute Manager, click File. The file will open using the operating system's default application for that file type.
Viewing records
When you view individual records, the fields appear in the first column followed by the values for that record. When you view all records in a table, each row is a record that contains all the attributes for the shape. Each column is a field that contains the values for each attribute.
Geomatica Focus
Field Name
Description Grouping shapes on page 321 ) The identification number is generated by Focus and cannot be changed.
Layer Type
REPCode
Contains the key to define the appearance of the shapes according to the Unstructured Representation Editor. (See Using the GPS tool on page 351 ) Controls the slant of the text string or point. Measured in radians by Point default, but you Unstructured can change it to display in degrees, gradians, or mils. Defines the field to accept characters, such Point as text. You can Unstructured type directly on the layer or in the TextString field. Identifies a set of Point Line shapes that you Unstructured grouped Whole Polygon together. (See
Area
Displays the computed area enclosed by the polygon. Displays the computed circumference of the polygon.
Perimeter
Angle
ArcIdList
TextString
Identifies the lines that compose a polygon in a Topological topological layer. Polygon (See About topological layers on page 301 ) Identifies the polygon on a topological layer which is on the Topological Line right of the line. (See About topological layers on page 301 )
308
RightAreaId
GroupID
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Field Name
Description
Layer Type
LeftAreaId
Identifies the polygon on a topological layer which is on the Topological Line left of the line. (See About topological layers on page 301 ) Identifies the point (node) that begins a topological line. Topological Line (See About topological layers on page 301 ) Identifies the point (node) that ends a topological line. Topological Line (See About topological layers on page 301 ) Displays the computed Line Topological distance covered Line by the line.
StartNodeId
EndNodeId
Length
From the Field menu in the Attribute Manager, click Show All.
Geomatica Focus
You can define the contents of the Attribute Manager table by choosing attributes in the table and by adding or removing records using the Table Definition dialog box. You can also set the field properties for new and existing records. 1. From the Edit menu in the Attribute Manager, click Table Definition. 2. In the Table Definition dialog box, do any of the following: To hide a field, disable the appropriate check box in the Shown column. To change a field name, double-click the field in the Name column and type a new name. To add a field, click the Add button. To remove a field, select it and click the Remove button. 3. Type or choose data that will appear by default from the Default Value list box. 4. Type a value that will appear in fields that do not contain real data from the NoData Value list box. NoData values are not included in computations. 5. Choose one of the following options from the Read only list box: No: lets you change values in a field Yes: restricts changes to a field 6. Choose how you want to align data in a field from the Justification list box. 7. Type or choose the width of a field in characters in the Field size list box. 8. Type or choose a number of decimal places displayed in a field in the Decimal places list box.
PCI Geomatics
9. Choose one of the following options from the Scientific notation list box: Yes: displays values in a field as scientific notations No: displays values in a field as regular numbers Auto: displays values as either regular numbers or scientific notations, depending on which is shorter 10. Choose one of the following unit types for a field from the Angular units list box: Radians: expresses angles in radians, where 2 pi radians equals the 360 degrees in a circle (one radian equals approximately 57.29577951 degrees) Degrees: expresses angles in degrees, which is the angle between two adjacent radii measured at the center of the circle tht is divided along its radius into 360 equal parts Mils: expresses angles in mils, which measure angles where 1 mil equals 1/6,400 of a circle (1 mil equals approximately 0.05625 degrees) Grads: expresses angles in grads, which measure angles where 400 grads equals the 360 degrees in a circle (a 90-degree right angle equals 100 grads) 11. Choose a conversion type from the Conversion list box. If you choose New, type a factor in the Conversion Factor box. 12. Click OK.
Geomatica Focus
geometry field
Geometry fields are system fields that display the measurements of lines or polygons on a layer. Focus automatically calculates and updates these measurements as you modify the respective shapes. Three Geometry Field types are available: Length: calculates the length of a line Perimeter: calculates the circumference of a polygon Area: calculates the area of a polygon When you create a new vector layer, Focus automatically creates Length, Area, and/or Perimeter fields in the Attribute Manager according to the selected layer type. You can modify some properties, but most remain unavailable. 1. From the Edit menu in the Attribute Manager, click Table Definition. 2. In the Table Definition dialog box, enable the check box in the System column for the field that you want to change into a Geometry Field. 3. In the Geometry Field Properties area, choose the type of field that you want from the Type list box. 4. Choose a unit of measurement for the field from the Display units list box. 5. Click OK.
1. From the Edit menu in the Attribute Manager, click Table Definition. 2. In the Geometry Field Properties area, click Create. 3. Select each new field and define as necessary using the available properties. (See Setting the field definitions on page 309 )
311
Geomatica Focus
what box. For example, if you type 123 in the Find what box, you will only receive matches for cells that contain only 123. You will not receive matches for other numbers such as 12345 or 9123. Limit search to selected fields: searches only in a field selected in the Attribute Manager Limit search to selected records: searches only in a record selected in the Attribute Manager 4. Click Find next. 5. If you want to replace text, click the Replace tab and type the characters that you want to use as the replacement in the Replace with box. 6. Click Replace. If you want to replace all the examples with the replacement characters, click Replace all.
appear in the Primary Table. The Secondary Table acts like a look-up table for the attributes. If you change the values in the Secondary Table, the Primary Table is automatically updated with the new values, as long as the tables are joined. 1. Right-click the layer that you want to use as the Primary Table and click Attribute Manager. 2. From the Tools menu in the Attribute Manager, click Table Join. 3. In the Define Table Join dialog box, click Browse. 4. In the Select Layer dialog box, choose the layer that you want to use as the Secondary Table. 5. In the Primary Table#s Attribute box, select an attribute. 6. Select the attribute from the Secondary Table#s Attributes box that you want to join with the attribute from the Primary Table#s Attribute box. 7. Click the Add button. 8. Click OK.
Geomatica Focus
1. Select a value that you want to match. 2. From the Record menu in the Attribute Manager, click Query by and then click Current. Exclude Current Cell: All records that do not contain the same value as the current cell are selected. The statistics of a selected record is displayed at the bottom of the Attribute Manager. (See Setting a selected record statistics display on page 306 )
6. Select a value or attribute from the appropriate list. 7. Enable one of the following options: AND: selects records that are true for both joined statements OR: selects records that are true for at least one of the joined statements 8. Click Add. 9. Repeat step 3 to step 8 as needed. 10. Click Save. 11. Enter a name for the equation in the Equation name box and click OK. 12. In the Query by Example dialog box, click OK. Query by Subset If you select Query by Subset before using the Query by features (Current, Excluding Current, and Example), the
313
Geomatica Focus
query is limited to the selected records only instead of performing the query on all the records.
4. 5.
6. 7.
8.
of the following to create the expression that you want: Type all or part of the expression in the Expression box. Text should be placed in double quotes (for example, #text#). Double-click an attribute in the Attributes list to add it to the expression. Use the calculator to include integers and the basic mathematic operators in the expression. Select a category of functions from the Categories list box to display the available functions in that category. In the Functions list, select the function that you want to use in the expression. (Available only on the Advanced Compute) If you want to display the result on the screen without adding it to the Attribute Manager, enable the Single Value check box and proceed to step 8. If you want to include the result in the Attribute Manager, select a field in the Field Name box that will receive the results of the computation or type the name of a new field. In the Field Description box, type a description of the contents of the field. Choose one of the following types of field from the Field Type list: Text: defines the field as a text string Integer: defines the field for positive or negative whole numbers Float: defines the field for single-precision real numbers Double: defines the field for double-precision real numbers Click the Run button.
314
Geomatica Focus
If you want to save the equation with the layer, click Save.
To compute the results based on the records that contain the same attribute values, enable the Attributes option and enable the chck box next to the attribute in the Based On column. Add any function or statistic fields to the output Attribute Manager. For more information, see Adding function fields to output layers on page 320 . To add a field containing the number of records used in the calculation, enable the Add a count field check box. 2. Click Aggregate.
Performing a calculation
1. In the Aggregate Attributes dialog box, do any of the following: To use only the selected records in the operation, enable the Aggregate selected shapes only check box. To compute the results based on the shapes that contain the same style in the Representation Editor, enable the Representation values option and select an attribute and function that you want to use.
PCI Geomatics
315
Geomatica Focus
To report which shapes border the selected shapes, enable the Adjacent to the input areas option. To include a region outside the boundary of the digitized areas on the layer, enable the Report outside area in result check box. This represents the global polygon or outside area, which appears as -1 in the Attribute Manager. To report in separate records the results of a shape that borders another shape in different places (not available for thematic rasters), enable the Report neighbor B as two records in result check box. For example, the perimeter of shape B touches shape A in two places so you obtain two records for shape B. To report only the shapes that completely surround another shape (for example, lakes containing islands), enable the Input areas surround option. To report shapes that are surrounded by other shapes (for example, islands), click Input areas are surrounded by option. 2. In the Input Areas column, enable the check mark next to the layer attributes that you want to add to the Area Neighbors table. 3. In the Neighbors column, enable the check box next to the layer attributes that you want to add to the Area Neighbors table. If you want to select the records in the Attribute Manager that correspond to the results, enable the Select found neighbors option. 4. Click OK.
PCI Geomatics
316
Geomatica Focus
If you want to create a new field in the Attribute Manager, click New Field. A default label called Z-value is displayed in the Destination field list. You can rename the label to one of your choice. The field properties, except the data type, are set by default. You set the data type in step 4. To modify the field properties, see Setting the field definitions on page 309 . 4. If you create a new field for the Z-value, the Type list becomes available. In the Type list, click one of the following data types: Integer: defines the field for positive or negative whole numbers Float: defines the field for single-precision real numbers Double: defines the field for double-precision real numbers 5. In the Z-value aggregation list, click the method that you want to use to combine the Z-values from the vertices into an attribute for the shape. Click one of the following methods: First: for each selected shape it uses the Z-value from the first vertex as the attribute. Last: for each selected shape it uses the Z-value from the last vertex as the attribute. Sum: for each selected shape it calculates the sum of the Z-values from the vertices and uses that value as the attribute. Mean: for each selected shape it calculates the average Z-value from the vertices and uses that value as the attribute. The average is obtained by adding values from the vertices and dividing that value by the number of
317
Geomatica Focus
vertices used in the sum. Minimum: for each selected shape it uses the lowest Z-value from the vertices as the attribute. Maximum: for each selected shape it uses the highest Z-value from the vertices as the attribute. Mode: for each selected shape it calculates the Z-value that occurs the most frequently among the vertices and uses that value as the attribute. Median: for each selected shape it ranks the Z-values from the vertices in numerical order. The median is the middle value and it uses that value as the attribute. Standard Deviation: for each selected shape it measures the variation in the distribution of Z-values, which is calculated from square root of the variance, and uses that value as the attribute. 6. Click Transfer.
Geomatica Focus
2. In the Export to Text dialog box, enable one of the following options: Entire Table: exports the whole Attribute Table Visible Region: exports only the displayed records and fields If you want to export specific records and fields, choose a range of records next to Row and choose a range of fields next to Column. 3. Click OK.
Dissolve combines shapes that contain the same value for a selected attribute. The resulting output is a layer that contains the newly combined shapes with each shape represented as a layer record. 1. From the Analysis menu in the Focus window, click Dissolve. 2. In the Dissolve dialog box, choose a file from the File list in the Input area. If a file is not listed, click Browse, locate and select a file, and click Open. If you choose Active Layer, the dissolve is performed on the current layer. 3. In the Output area, enable one of the following options: Display: displays the results without saving the new layer Save: saves the new layer in the project. Choose a file from the File list box and choose a layer from the Layer list box. If you want to display the results in the view pane, enable the Display saved results check box. If you want to use only the selected records, enable the Dissolve selected shapes only check box. 4. In the Dissolve Option dialog box, enable one of the following options: Only adjacent shapes: combines all shapes that share a common border and contain the same value for the selected attribute or RST style All shapes: forms one record for all the
319
Dissolving a boundary
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
shapes on the layer that contain the same value for the selected attribute or RST style If you want to combine the adjacent pixels that are diagonal to each other and that contain the same value for the selected attribute or RST style for thematic rasters, enable the Pixels that meet at a diagonal check box. 5. In the Dissolve Method area, enable one of the following options: Representation Values: removes boundaries between shapes that contain the same key for the representation of the layer Attributes: removes boundaries between shapes that contain the same attribute values 6. In the Based on column, enable the check box next to the attributes you want to include. If you want to add a field containing the number of shapes combined to form each record in the output, enable the Add a count field check box. 7. Click OK. For information about adding function or statistic fields to the output Attribute Manager, see Adding function fields to output layers on page 320 .
dialog box on page 315 , Dissolving a boundary on page 319 , and Using a statistical overlay on page 333 . You can add fields using the simple or advanced methods. With the simple method, you can add only one new field per attribute. With the advanced method, you can add several fields per attribute. The statistic fields, Mean, Minimum, Maximum, Mode, Median, and Standard Deviation, are described in Setting a selected record statistics display on page 306 .
Geomatica Focus
2. Click in the view pane for each vertex you want included in the area. 3. Double-click the last vertex. All the shapes that are inside or that touch the polygon are selected. If you want to add more shapes to your selection, press Shift and digitize another polygon.
Grouping shapes
Grouping ties shapes from the same layer to act as a single unit. Each shape in a group maintains its original representation and attributes. You cannot select or modify grouped shapes individually; however, you can change individual attribute values in the Attribute Manager. When you group shapes, a new field labeled GroupId is added to the Attribute Manager. Focus assigns each record in the group the same GroupId number. 1. Select the shapes you want to group. 2. From the Edit menu in the Focus window, click Group.
1. Select the grouped shapes that you want to separate. 2. From the Edit menu in the Focus window, click Ungroup.
Geomatica Focus
Attaching shapes
Attaching combines shapes from the same layer into one record. The shapes appear as grouped in the view pane, but the records for the attached shapes are unified in a record in the Attribute Manager. You can attach adjacent shapes, non-adjacent shapes, and shapes that are contained within other shapes. Attached shapes are referred to as rings. You can use rings when separate shapes form a single entity, such as a collection of islands forming one county, or when shapes are contained within other shapes, such as an island in a lake. 1. Make sure the items are on the same layer. 2. Select the items you want to attach. 3. From the Edit menu, click Attach.
sizes, each referred to as a buffer level.You use buffer levels to analyse suitability or risk around the input shapes, which is referred to as a proximity analysis. For example, you can create a buffer around domestic wells to analyse the risk of contamination from pesticide use. From the Analysis menu, click Buffer.
Separating shapes
1. Select the attached items. This can be accomplished using the Attribute Manager, by clicking on a group member, through a window selector, or a query. 2. From the Edit menu, click Detach.
Creating buffers
A buffer is a margin created at a specific distance around shapes on a layer. You can create margins of different
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
4. In the Buffer Distances area, enable one of the following options: Simple: buffers all the selected shapes Representation Values: buffers the selected shapes according to their representation values Field: buffers the selected shapes according to an attribute. Choose an attribute from the list box. 5. Enter a number of levels that you want in the Buffer levels spin box. 6. Choose a unit of measurement from the Units list box. 7. In the Buffer distances table, type a number in each Level column to determine the width of a buffer. 8. Click Next.
BufferDistance: lists the width of the buffer for each level in the output layer BufferLevel: lists the levels in the output layer 7. In the Output Areas area, enable one of the following options: Combine: combines the shapes where the buffers overlap Keep Separate: keeps each buffer separate 8. Click Finish.
323
Geomatica Focus
Tool
Name
Action separate shapes. Extends the length of a vertex in a straight line. Removes the start or end vertices shared between lines (pseudo-nodes) Automatically connects the start and end vertices of a line to form a polygon. Flips a shape horizontally or vertically to make a mirror image. Rotates a shape around an anchor. Separates overlapping shapes at their intersecting points. Moves the cursor to the start vertex in a selected
324
Extend Line
Find
Close Shape
Changes line direction (not Reverse Vertices available for whole polygons). Add Vertices Creates new vertices within a shape. Connects ends of lines together or combines polygons by removing common boundaries. Breaks lines and polygons into
Mirror Tools
Rotation Tools
Merge Line/Polygon
Break Line/Polygon
Split Line/Polygon
PCI Geomatics
Start Vertex
Geomatica Focus
Tool
Name
Action shape. Moves the cursor from one vertex to the previous vertex in a selected shape. Moves the cursor halfway between two vertices in the direction of the line. Moves the cursor from one vertex to the previous vertex in a selected shape. Moves the cursor to the end vertex in a selected shape. Makes the vertices in a shape more prominent for better visibility. Opens the Vertices dialog box and displays the vertex coordinates of a selected shape.
Selecting a shape
The Find tool selects a shape and identifies the start and end vertices. 1. On the Vector Editing Tools toolbar, click the Find button. 2. Click a shape.
Previous Vertex
Midpoint
Moving a vertex
The Find tool selects a shape and identifies the start and end vertices. 1. On the Vector Editing toolbar, click the Find button and click a shape. 2. Click the Show Vertices button. 3. Drag a vertex to a new location.
Next Vertex
End Vertex
Show Vertex
Vertices
Geomatica Focus
shape you are editing. 1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the Find button and click a line. 2. Click the Merge Line/Polygon button. 3. Click the start or end vertex of the line. 4. Click the start or end vertex of a line with which you want to merge the first line.
Adding vertices
The Add Vertices tool creates new vertices within a shape. When you use this tool in a Math Model Area (see Understanding vector editing in a math model area on page 302 ), the elevation for the new vertex is derived from the DEM or the approximate elevation value that you provided when you created the Area. 1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the Find button and click a shape. 2. Click the Add Vertices button. 3. Click on the line where you want the vertex. If you want to continue a line, click the start or end vertex of the line and click a series of vertices.
Connecting polygons
1. Click the Find button and click a polygon. 2. Click the Merge Line/Polygon button. 3. Click a polygon with which you want to merge the first polygon.
Cutting a line
The Split Line/Polygon tool cuts lines and polygons into separate shapes. This tool may affect the attributes of the shape you are editing. When you use this tool in a Math Model Area (see Understanding vector editing in a math model area on page 302 ), the elevation for the new vertex created at the cut point is derived from the DEM or the approximate elevation value that you provided when you created the Area. 1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the Find button and click a line. 2. Click the Split Line/Polygon button. 3. Click where you want to split the line.
Connecting lines
The Merge Line/Polygon tool connects ends of lines together or combines polygons by removing common boundaries. This tool may affect the attributes of the
PCI Geomatics
326
Geomatica Focus
When you split a polygon, you draw a line through the shape where you want the polygon to split.
Cutting a polygon
1. Click the Find button and click a polygon. 2. Click the Split Line/Polygon button. 3. Click a point on the outline of the polygon where you want to begin a line. 4. Click in the polygon to form the line. 5. Double-click a point on the outline of the polygon to end the line.
Extending a line
You can move a start or end vertex simply by selecting the vertex with the Find tool and moving it. However, if you want to extend the line without changing its angle, the Extend Line tool forces the vertex to move in a straight line. When you use this tool in a Math Model Area (see Understanding vector editing in a math model area on page 302 ), the elevation for the new vertex is derived from the DEM or the approximate elevation value that you provided when you created the Area. 1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the Find button and click a line. 2. Click the Extend Line button. 3. Click a start or end vertex. 4. Click where you want to end the extension.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
Understanding vector editing in a math model area on page 302 ), the shape is flipped according to the ground coordinates and may be mirrored about oblique axes, which may cause the it to appear distorted.
2. Click the Rotation Tools arrow and click Free Rotate. 3. Drag the shape to the angle you want.
Geomatica Focus
You can select a vertex by clicking it or you can use one of the navigation tools. Start Vertex and End Vertex Moves the cursor to the start vertex or end vertex of a selected shape. 1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the Find button and click a shape. 2. Click the Start Vertex button.
TMoves the cursor halfway between two vertices in the direction of a line.
Displaying vertices
The Show Vertices tool makes the vertices in the shape more prominent so they more easily seen. 1. From the Vector Editing Tools dialog box, click the Find button and click a shape. 2. Click the Show Vertices button.
Geomatica Focus
1. Select a vertex in the Vertices dialog box and do the following: To add vertices, click the Add button. To delete a vertex, click it and click the Remove button. The coordinate system for the Area in the Maps tree is determined by the first layer opened in the Area. When you add layers to the Maps tree, you have the choice of using the same coordinate system or a different one. If the coordinate system for the layer is different than that of the Area, you can display the coordinates of the vertices in either systems.
When you use any of the Spatial Query tools, you can include or exclude your original selection from the resulting selection. When you enable the Add to Selection option, the results of the Spatial Query are selected along with your original selection. When you clear Add to Selection, only the results of the Spatial Query are selected. From the Editing toolbar, click the Spatial Query arrow and choose Add to Selection. A check mark next to the option indicates it is enabled.
Geomatica Focus
1. From the Editing toolbar, click the Selection Tools arrow and choose a tool. 2. Click a shape or select an area. 3. From the Editing toolbar, click the Spatial Query arrow and choose Partially Within.
arrow and choose a tool. 2. Click a shape or select an area. 3. From the Editing toolbar, click the Spatial Query arrow and choose Fully Within Distance. 4. In the Within Distance dialog box, type a number in the Distance box. 5. Choose a unit of measurement from the list box. 6. Click OK.
331
Geomatica Focus
Suitability Overlay analyses the relative importance of input layers and attributes to identify the areas that produce the most positive result. For more information, see Using a suitability overlay on page 334 .
8. Repeat step 5 to step 7 for each layer. If you want to change the order of an attribute, select it in the Attribute table and click the up or down arrow buttons. 9. If you want to change the names of an attribute, double-click it and type a new name. 10. Click Next. 11. In the Output Options area, enable one of the following options: Union: includes all shapes in their entirety from all the input layers Intersection: includes only the overlapping areas of the shapes from the input layers 12. Enable any of the following check boxes: Use a Mask to Limit Output: uses a layer to limit the area. Choose a layer from the list box. Using Only Selected Shapes: includes only the selected shapes as the mask Use a Named Region to Limit Output: uses an existing named region as the mask. For more information about Named Regions, see Creating named regions on page 79 . 13. In the Output Layer area, select a layer type for the new layer from the Type list box. 14. Enable one of the following options: Display: shows the results without saving the new layer Save: saves the new layer in the project. Choose a file from the File list box and choose a layer from the Layer list box. If you want to display the results in the view pane, enable the Display saved results check box. 15. Click Finish.
332
Geomatica Focus
If you want to include only the selected records in the layer, enable the Use selected shapes only check box. 5. In the Secondary Input area, choose a file from the File list box. 6. Choose a layer that contains the attributes you want to add to the Primary Input layer from the Layer list box. If you want to include only the selected records in the layer, enable the Use selected shapes only check box. 7. Click Next. 8. Click Finish. You can add function fields to the output Attribute Manager. (See Adding function fields to output layers on page 320 ) You can also add fields containing other attributes. (See Adding attributes to the statistical overlay output on page 333 )
Geomatica Focus
is available when: The Primary Input is a line layer and the Secondary Input is a line, polygon, thematic raster, or raster. The Primary Input is a polygon layer and the Secondary Input is a point, line, polygon, thematic raster, or raster. The Primary Input is a thematic raster layer and the Secondary Input is a point, line, polygon, thematic raster, or raster. When you enable the Count check box, Focus calculates the number of shapes combined to form each record and adds that attribute the output layer. Surface Length is available when the Primary Input is a line layer and the Secondary Input is a raster. This option is useful if the raster is a DEM. When you enable the Surface Length check box, Focus calculates the three-dimensional surface length of the line and adds that attribute the output layer. Distance is available when: The Primary Input is a point layer and the Secondary Input is a point, line, or polygon layer. The Primary Input is a line layer and the Secondary Input is a points layer. When you enable the Distance check box, Focus identifies the shape from the Secondary Input that is the closest to each shape in the Primary Input and calculates
PCI Geomatics
the distance between them. The distance is added to each record in the output layer. When points are contained within the polygon, the distance equals zero in the output. Counting Specific Pixel Values: You can count specific pixel values when the Primary Input is a line, polygon, or thematic raster layer and the Secondary Input is a raster. For each line in the Primary Input, Focus identifies corresponding pixels in the Secondary Input and adds that attribute the output layer. Grouping Criteria: The Grouping Criteria options are available when the Primary Input is a polygon layer and the Secondary Input is a line or polygon layer. To combine all shapes from the Secondary Input that touch or overlap the boundaries of each shape in the Primary Input, enable the Partially Within option. The resulting attribute is added to the output layer. To combine only the shapes from the Secondary Input that lie entirely within the boundaries of each shape in the Primary Input, enable the Wholly Contained option. The resulting attribute is added to the output layer.
334
Geomatica Focus
positive result. For example, analysing data in a project to identify the best location for a school or the most likely location for a forest fire. To perform the analysis, you must build a project containing layers of data that you want to use in the calculation. Each layer should contain one type of data representing a factor in the calculation. For example, if you are trying to determine the best location for a winery, your project could contain a layer with rainfall levels for an area, a layer of soil types found in the area, a layer containing the road network, and so on. To calculate a combination that produces the best result, you must decide on a scale to rank the importance the layers and a scale to rank the data in the layers. The scales measure the relative importance of each input into the equation; the most important factors affect the results the most. The value from the scale that you assign to the layer and to the data is called a weight. For more information about how to determine the scales, see Understanding weights in the suitability overlay on page 336 . For example, you have a scale of 1 to 100 for the layers. Because the soil type layer is more important than the road network layer, you can assign a weight of 75 to the soil type layer and a weight of 25 to the road network layer; the soil type layer is three times more influential in the calculation than the road network layer. You do not need to use the same scale for the layers and the data in the layers, but you should use one scale for the layers themselves and one scale for the data in the
PCI Geomatics
layers. Weighting the data in one layer according to a vastly different scale from the data in the other layers can skew the results. To add weights to data, add a field in the Attribute Manager for each layer and enter the numeric value expressing the weight for the data in each record. A negative weight for a record will force an unfavorable result in the output for that record. For example, you have a scale of 1 to 10 for the data in the layers. In the soil type layer, you assign the well-drained soils an 8, the poor and shallow soils a 2, and the polluted soils a -1. Any sites containing polluted soils will automatically receive a negative result. You must also assign a weight to the'No Data' value in the layers. The'No Data' value represents the null values or the pixels without data. The'No Data' value is usually set in the metadata of the layer so it may not appear in the Attribute Manager. When you assign a weight to the'No Data' value in step 7, you should use the same scale as the rest of the data in the layers. When setting up a Suitability Overlay, you must determine the weight of each layer, the weight of the NoData value, and select the field that contains the weights for the data in each layer. The result is displayed in a layer indicating the most positive correlation between all the factors in the equation. 1. From the Attribute Manager, add a field to each layer containing the numeric value expressing the weight of the records. For more information, see
335
Geomatica Focus
Adding new fields on page 309 . 2. From the Analysis menu in the Focus window, click Overlay. 3. In the Overlay Wizard, enable the Suitability option and click Next. 4. In the Available Files/Layers list, enable the check mark next to the layers that you want to combine. If you want to select layers from another file, click Browse, locate and select a file from the File Selector dialog box, and click Open. 5. Click Next. 6. Type a number to determine the weight of each layer in the Layer Weight column. 7. Type a number to determine the weight of NoData value for each layer in the NoData Weight column. Use the same weight scale as you used for the attributes. 8. In the Attribute Weight column, click a cell and choose the weight values for the attributes. 9. Click Next. 10. In the Output Options area, enable one of the following options: Union: includes all the shapes in their entirety from all input layers Intersection: includes only the overlapping areas of shapes from the input layers 11. Enable any of the following check boxes: Use a Mask to Limit Output - uses a layer to limit the area. You can use an existing a bitmap, raster, or polygon layer. Choose a layer from the list box. Using Only Selected Shapes - includes only the selected shapes as the mask
PCI Geomatics
Use a Named Region to Limit Output - se an existing named region as the mask. For more information about Named Regions, see Creating named regions on page 79 . 12. In the Output Layer area, enable one of the following options: Display - shows the results without saving the new layer Save - saves the new layer in the project. Choose a file from the File list box and choose a layer from the Layer list box. If you want to display the results in the view pane, enable the Display saved results check box. 13. Click Finish.
336
Geomatica Focus
of each layer in comparison with the others. The scale of the data in the layers does not have to be the same as that used for the layers, but the scale should be consistently applied for all the data. Using different scales for the data in different layers may cause unwanted results. For example, if you used a scale of 1 to 1000 to rank the data in the Soil Types layer and a scale of 1 to 10 for the data in the other layers, the soil types might nullify the importance of other data like rainfall even if the Rainfall layer itself has a higher weight than the Soil Type layer.
Fields, at least one field and at least two records must be selected. If the minimum number of selected records and fields for any chart type is not satisfied, the chart displays a message reminding you to select data. You can create more than one chart per layer. Each chart is connected to the attributes in the layer so if the attribute values change, the chart changes to reflect the new values. Each chart that you create is remembered in the Chart Manager. For more information, see Opening and deleting a chart on page 348 .
Geomatica Focus
kind of data and piles the bands on top of one another to form one column per category. The 100% Stacked Column type is similar to the Stacked columns type, except each band is expressed as a percentage and each column totals 100%. The Stacked columns and Percent columns illustrate the contribution of each band to the whole category. Bar: The bar chart type displays the selected data as horizontal stripes of different colors or patterns. In contrast with the column chart type, the values are organized along the x-axis (horizontally) and the categories are measured along the y-axis (vertically). Bar charts are often used to compare data while reducing the emphasis on the passage of time. Three options are available for the bar chart: The Clustered Bar type forms separate bands for each kind of data and groups the bands side-by-side by category. The Stacked Bar type forms bands for each kind of data and lines up the bands end to end to form one column per category. The 100% Stacked Bar type is similar to the Stacked bar type, except each band is expressed as a percentage and each column totals 100%. The Stacked bar and Percent bar charts illustrate the contribution of each band to the whole category. Line: The line chart displays the selected data as lines of
PCI Geomatics
different colors or patterns connecting points at equal intervals. The categories are organized along the x-axis (horizontally) and the values are measured along the y-axis (vertically). The vertices represent the values for each category and the angles formed by the lines connecting the vertices emphasize the trends. Three options are available for the line chart: The Line type creates a line for each kind of data where each vertex represents the actual value for each category. The Stacked Line type creates a line for each kind of data where each vertex represents the value of each category added to the value of the vertex beneath it. Therefore, the topmost vertex in each category reflects the sum total of all the data in that category. The 100% Stacked Line type is similar to the Stacked line type, except each line is expressed as a percentage and each category totals 100%. The Stacked line and Percent line types illustrate the contribution of each line to the whole category. Area: The area chart displays the selected data as polygons of different colors or patterns connecting points at equal intervals. It is similar to the line chart, except the area below the line is shaded to form a polygon. The categories are organized along the x-axis (horizontally) and the values are measured along the y-axis (vertically). The points represent the values for each category and the angles formed by the lines connecting the points emphasize the trends.
338
Geomatica Focus
Three options are available for the area chart: The Area type creates a polygon for each kind of data where the points represent the actual value for each category. The Stacked Area type creates a polygon for each kind of data where each point represents the value of each category added to the value of the point beneath it. Therefore, the topmost point in each category reflects the sum total of all the data in that category. The 100% Stacked Area type is similar to the Stacked Area type, except each polygon is expressed as a percentage and each category totals 100%. The Stacked Area and 100% Stacked Area types illustrate the contribution of each polygon to the whole category. Pie: The pie chart is a circular graphic which displays the data as wedges representing their portion of the whole. It can only show the portions or ratios of one kind of data at a time. Two options are available for the pie chart: The Pie type creates a circle divided into slices proportional to the whole. The Exploded Pie type creates a circle broken into slices proportional to the whole. Scatter: The scatter chart is a graph of points comparing two sets of data. One set is plotted along the x-axis and the other
PCI Geomatics
along the y-axis. It is used to uncover a possible correlation between the data sets. The appearance of a discernable pattern or clustering of the points indicates a correlation between the data sets. An indicator of a high correlation between the data sets is that you are able to draw a straight line through the points. The more points that cluster about the implied line, the stronger the possibility of a correlation. If the points appear randomly distributed over the chart, it is unlikely that a correlation exists. It is important to note, however, that although a scatter chart may indicate a correlation between the data sets it does not mean that one data set is causing an affect on the other. The correlation can be the result of a third factor affecting both sets or can be simply a coincidence.
339
Geomatica Focus
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
vector or thematic raster layer, click the Selection Tools arrow on the Editing toolbar and select a tool. In the view pane, click or drag to select the shapes that you want included in the chart. In the Focus main menu, click Layer. Click Charts and select a chart type from the list. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Chart Definition button. Select the fields, see Defining the data to chart on page 340 . Click OK.
5. Click OK.
About Series In
The Series In option on the Chart Definitions dialog box defines what is displayed in the graph. Depending on what you want the data to be interpreted, you may want to emphasize either the records or the fields. When you select Records, the data in each record is represented in the chart. When you select Fields, the data is displayed by field in the chart. For example, when you choose Fields for the chart shown in the following figure, the fields are displayed as bars (Pop2000 and Pop2002). When you choose Records, the records (Alaska, California, and Florida) are displayed as bars.
340
Geomatica Focus
meaning of the data displayed in a chart. It puts the data into context so we can analyse, organize, and communicate the information effectively. The chart surround elements include: Title and subtitle The x-axis and its ticks, labels and headings The y-axis and its ticks, labels and headings The legend The background The data labels
Each chart surround element helps to present the data as clearly as possible. You do not need to include every element in every chart. Select the ones that most effectively convey the chart's meaning. 1. On the Chart Definition dialog box, click the Options tab. 2. In the Title box, type a word or phrase that you want as a title for your chart. 3. In the Subtitle box, type a word or phrase that you want as a subtitle for your chart. 4. In the Category field list, select the field that most clearly describes the records used in the chart. For more information, see About the category field on page 342 . 5. In the X-axis heading box, type a word or phrase that you want to display along the bottom of the chart. 6. Select Show X-axis values to display the data values along the x-axis of the chart. 7. In the Y-axis heading box, type a word or phrase that you want to display along the y-axis of the chart.
341
Geomatica Focus
8. Select Show Y-axis values to display the data values along the y-axis of the chart. 9. Select Show legend to display the legend for the data in the chart. 10. Select Show data labels to display labels on the data in the chart. 11. In the Background style list, click to select a style for the area behind the chart. You can create a frame around the chart or color the background. For more information about creating styles, see Selecting a style on page 354 . 12. Click OK. NOTE: The Restore to Defaults button clears the preference file for the chart, not just the settings on the Options tab. For more information, see Resetting the chart to defaults on page 343 .
Chart Type
Series in: Records Category field displays on: legend legend legend not displayed legend
The field that you select depends on what you want to emphasize or what attribute most clearly represents the data in your chart. For example, in the following figure the chart displays the same data: the number of houses and apartments for each newspaper route. If you have new customers to add on Second Avenue which falls along both route 15 and 22, Chart A is going to be less helpful unless you have memorized the names of the couriers responsible for the routes. Chart B, on the other hand, gives you the route number immediately. Understanding the Use of the Category Field
x-axis
342
Geomatica Focus
Definition button. 2. On the Chart Definition dialog box, click the Options tab. 3. Click Restore to Defaults. 4. Click Apply.
343
Geomatica Focus
the viewer. 4. Click the Zoom Out button to decrease the magnification by increments and centers the chart in the viewer.
To change the color of the a part of the chart or chart surround elements
1. In the Chart viewer, click the Selection Tool button. 2. Click the item in the viewer. 3. On the Chart viewer toolbar, click the arrow next to the Color button.
344
Geomatica Focus
4. Click a color from the palette or click More Colors to create a color.
legend from the chart viewer, you can enable it from the Options tab on the Chart Definition dialog box (see Designing the chart surround on page 341 ).
To change the look of a part of the chart or a chart surround element To open the Legend Properties dialog box
1. 2. 3. 4. Click the Selection Tool button. Click the item in the viewer. Click the arrow next to the Style button. Click the style that you want. Different styles are available depending on the item that you chose. To create a new style, select Style Selector. For more information about the Style Selector, see Selecting a style on page 354 . 1. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Selection Tool button. 2. Click the legend. 3. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Properties button.
Geomatica Focus
The labels identify the values along the x-axis and y-axis. 1. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Selection Tool button. 2. Click either the axis, the axis heading, or the axis values. 3. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Properties button.
1. On the X-axis or Y-axis Properties dialog box, click the Labels tab. 2. To display labels for the ticks along the axis, click to select Show Values. 3. In the Field list (if available), select the field that you want to use to identify the ticks on the x-axis. Choose the field that most clearly describes the records used in the chart. For more information, see About the category field on page 342 . 4. In the Size list, type or select the size of the font used for the labels. 5. In the Color list, select the color that you want to use for the font. To modify the color, click More. To change the font, click Selector. For more information about the Selector, see Selecting a style on page 354 . 6. In the Angle box, type the value representing the counterclockwise rotation that you want to apply to the label. In the list select the unit of angular measurement. 7. Click OK.
346
Geomatica Focus
button. 2. Click the title or subtitle. 3. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Properties button.
Displaying ticks
1. On the X-axis or Y-axis Properties dialog box, click the Dividers tab. 2. To display the ticks on the background, select Inside ticks. 3. To display the ticks on the axis but not on the background, select Outside ticks. 4. Click Apply.
Geomatica Focus
1. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Selection Tool button. 2. Click a data label. 3. In the Chart viewer toolbar, click the Properties button.
Charts are kept in memory as long as the project remains open, even if you close the Chart viewer. You can reopen an existing chart by using the Chart Manager (see Opening or deleting a chart on page 348 ). The settings for each chart that you create while the project is open are saved in the project file (.gpr) when you save the project. The data itself, however, is not saved with the chart. The chart only contains a reference to the data. If you make changes to the layer#s attributes, the chart will reflect the changes in the data the next time you open it, but the design of the chart will remain unchanged. If you close the project without saving it, the charts in memory are discarded along with any other changes in the project file. You can also export your chart as a graphic in one of several file formats. For more information, see Opening the Export Map dialog box on page 407 .
Saving a chart
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
but the design of the chart will remain unchanged. If you close the project without saving it, the charts in memory are deleted along with any other changes in the project file.
3. Click the chart that you want to delete. 4. Click the Delete button. 5. Click Close.
To delete a chart
1. In the main menu of the Attribute Manager (see Performing tasks in the Attribute Manager on page 304 ), click Tools. or In the Focus main menu, click Layer. 2. Click Charts, and then click Manage.
PCI Geomatics
349
Geomatica Focus
your project. The reference frame is established by collecting points on the tablet and collecting the same points in the view pane so that Focus can correlate the positions. You can collect the points on each of the four corners of the map or on easily identified features as long as the points are well distributed over the map. With a minimum of four points, Focus can estimate the difference between the coordinates that you entered in the view pane and the coordinates from the tablet. The difference, called an error estimate, reflects the accuracy of the registration between the tablet and Focus. 1. From the Maps tree, click a layer. 2. From the Tools menu, click Digitizing Tablet and then click Register. 3. In the Register Tablet dialog box, click one of the following buttons: Active Area: uses the same georeferencing as the one defined in New Area Active Layer: uses the same georeferencing as one defined in the current layer 4. In the Tie Coordinate Type list box, choose one of the following options: Geocoded: enters the coordinates in georeferenced units Geographic: uses Longitude/Latitude units 5. On the tablet, move the crosshairs of the puck to a feature and press the button to transfer the tablet coordinates to the Tie-Down table. 6. In the Register Tablet dialog box, type the coordinates of the same feature in the Tie Coordinate X and Tie Coordinate Y columns, or
PCI Geomatics
you can click to select the feature in the view pane and press Enter to transfer the coordinates to the Tie-Down table. 7. Repeat step 5 and step 6 to complete the registration. If you want to add more points to the table, click the Add button. To remove a point from the table, click the point, and click the Remove button. To remove all the points in the table, click Clear All. 8. Click OK.
To export a registration
From the Register Tablet dialog box, click Export.
To import a registration
From the Register Tablet dialog box, click Import.
Geomatica Focus
digitizing tablet on page 349 ) You can assign the puck buttons to perform a variety of actions. (See Assigning text actions and modifiers on page 111 ) You can use the puck with the following tools: Adding points to an active layer on page 303 Selecting a single shape on page 321 Editing vectors using the vector editing tools on page 323
To start digitizing
1. From the Maps tree, click the layer that you want to contain the vectors. 2. From the Tools menu, click Digitizing Tablet and then click Start Digitizing. 3. Click the tool that you want to use or press the puck button assigned to the action that you want to perform. For example, if you want to digitize a line, you can click Line in the New Shapes list on the toolbar or click the puck button that you assigned to NewLine. 4. Use the puck to perform the action that you want. For example, use the puck to digitize a road on the map.
To stop digitizing
From the Tools menu, click Digitizing Tablet and then click Stop Digitizing.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
3. In the New Vector Layer dialog box, enable the Point option and click OK. 4. In the Maps tree, select the new point layer. 5. On the Editing toolbar, click the New Shapes arrow and choose Points. 6. From the Tools menu, click GPS Tool. 7. In the GPS Tool dialog box, click one of the following buttons: Capture Stream: updates the new point layer with a point determined by the location of the GPS receiver Capture Point: adds new points to the vector layer at a specified stream interval. You can continue to collect points by repeatedly clicking the button. 8. Click Finish.
Capture Stream: adds a new vertex to the vector layer at the specified stream interval. New vertices are added to the line or polygon until you click Finish. Capture Point: adds only the initial vertex to the line or polygon layer. You can continue to collect vertices for the line or polygon with each click of the button.
Understanding representation
Representation determines the appearance of shapes. Focus applies a default representation to shapes on a vector layer that is not linked to a Representation Style Table (RST). You can continue using the default, create a new RST, or import an existing RST. An RST is a look-up table (LUT) that contains a key and the style associated to that key. The key or the style can also be referred to as a REPCode. The key links the style in the RST to the shape on the layer. Each layer can link to only one RST, but you can link an RST to many layers. Keys can be added as attributes for shapes, such as in the REPCode field, or you can use an existing attribute as the key. When an RST is linked to a layer, Focus identifies the attributes used as keys in the layer and searches for the corresponding keys in the RST. When a match is found, the associated style is applied to the shape in the layer. For example, you can associate an RST to the attributes in a field called roadtype. In the roadtype field, you have a variety of road types such as interstates, highways, and streets. In the RST, the key is the road type with which
352
Geomatica Focus
you have styles associated. When a layer is linked to the RST, the shapes are assigned the style according to their key. A style is composed of one or more parts. Each part has a primitive with a priority. Primitives are the building blocks of the style. Each primitive is based on a point, line, or polygon pattern that is designed according to a number of parameters, such as color. The priority determines which part is placed in front of the other parts in the style. You can control the order by assigning the part a priority number. Parts with a higher number appear in front of parts with lower numbered priority.
When you change the appearance of shapes in the view pane, Focus creates an RST using the ShapeIds as the keys. The Direct RST is saved directly in a .pix file. Indirect RST: Is a separate file (.rst) that contains an RST. You can link an Indirect RST to one or more layers. In previous versions of Focus, the Indirect RST could also have a .gtd extension. The .gtd file is still compatible and can be edited and resaved as a .gtd file. You can also convert an Indirect RST into a Direct RST by embedding it in the layer through its Properties dialog box. You can build an Indirect RST as System-linked or User-linked. System-linked RST: Is based on an attribute in a layer. To generate the RST, select an attribute from the layer to become the key; Focus creates styles for each key based on the style that you design. Focus automatically links the System-linked RST through the key. User-linked RST: Often called a master RST, is built independently from a layer. To build the RST, you define the keys and manually create styles associated to the keys. Once you build the RST, you link the layers to the RST. The keys in the RST can match an existing attribute in the layer or you can add the keys in a field in the layer.
Geomatica Focus
basis for the representation. Choose an RST from the File list box. Generate new styles # creates new styles. Choose a style from the Based on list box. For more information about defining a new style, see Selecting a style on page 354 . If you want to assign various colors to the styles, enable the Vary color check box and choose a color scheme. If you want to assign various sizes to the points or lines, enable the Vary size check box. Enter the size in the From and By spin boxes. By default, the units is in millimeters. 5. Click Update Styles. 6. Click OK.
Selecting a style
1. From the Files list in the Style Selector dialog box, select a representation. If a file is not available, click Browse and select a
354
Geomatica Focus
file. 2. 3. 4. 5. Click a tab containing the style type that you want. Select a style. Click More. Make any changes to the color and outline width of the style. (See Changing style appearance on page 355 ) 6. Make any changes to the parts of the style. (See Changing style parts on page 355 ) 7. Click OK.
Advanced. 2. Choose a part that you want to change from the Part list. If you want to add or remove a part, click the Add or Remove button. 3. Enter a number that determines the priority order of the part from the Priority spin box. The highest number appears in front. 4. Choose a type from the Primitive list box. Each Primitive type contains a list of parameters. 5. For each parameter, change any changes to values in the Values column. 6. Click OK.
Geomatica Focus
Advanced Attributes. 7. In the Text Attribute list, select a field containing the text that you want to incorporate into the style. 8. Click OK.
3. Click OK.
Labelling shapes
A label is a string of characters placed in close proximity to a shape. You can use labels to display information about the shapes and clarify the subject of the layer. The Label Tool uses an attribute from the layer as a label for the shape. You can create labels for vector, grayscale, and pseudocolor layers that contain attributes. Because the automatic placement of labels may be inadequate, you can make individual changes to the labels by using the Selection Tools in the Editing toolbar. You can change the style of the labels individually using the tools in the Display toolbar. Any changes to the characters used in the label are updated automatically in the view pane and the Attribute table. If you make specific changes to individual labels with the Selection Tools or the Display tools and then use the Label Tool for more changes, specific changes may be replaced by the options set in the Label Tool. 1. From the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click Properties. 2. In the Properties dialog box, click the Labels tab. 3. See Managing the labels on page 356 .
Selecting a symbol
1. From the Symbol Selector dialog box, choose a symbol file from the Files list box. 2. In the gallery, select a symbol. If you want to preview the symbol and the preview window is not displayed, click More.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
page 356 and Managing data properties on page 35 . If you are making modifications to individual labels with the intention of printing a map, switch Focus to Map View mode before beginning your edits. To switch to Map View mode, in the main menu click View and then Map View Mode. 1. To display the labels in the View Pane, click in the Visible column beside the label set that you want to show. To hide the labels, click to clear the check mark. 2. To make the labels selectable in the View Pane, click in the Selectable column beside the label set that you want. 3. To add a new label set, click Add New. For more information, see Adding labels to a layer on page 357 . 4. To modify existing labels, click Modify. For more information, see Changing labels on page 357 . 5. To remove a label set, select the layer under Label Name and click Delete. 6. Click OK.
Changing labels
If you are making modifications to individual labels with the intention of printing a map, switch the Focus view pane to Map View mode by clicking the Map View Mode button before begining your edits. 1. From the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click Properties. 2. From the Properties dialog box, click the Labels tab. 3. Select the label you want to change and click Modify. If you want to change the representation for the labels, see Setting label representation on page 357 . If you want to change the options for the labels, see Defining the design and layout for labels on page 358
357
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
. 4. Click OK.
Setting the position for line layer labels on page 359 Setting the position for polygon and raster layer labels on page 360
Geomatica Focus
Setting the position for point layer labels on page 359 Setting the position for line layer labels on page 359 Setting the position for polygon and raster layer labels on page 360
Setting the position for line layer labels on page 359 Setting the position for polygon and raster layer labels on page 360
Setting label representation on page 357 Setting label representation on page 357 Defining which attribute to use for the label on page 358
PCI Geomatics 359
Geomatica Focus
Defining which attribute to use for the label on page 358 Setting the position for point layer labels on page 359 Setting the position for polygon and raster layer labels on page 360
Defining which attribute to use for the label on page 358 Setting the position for point layer labels on page 359 Setting the position for line layer labels on page 359
Designing a symbol
The Symbol Editor contains tools to create or edit symbols. A symbol is composed of one or more parts. A symbol can be a single design or a compilation of overlapping designs and are stored in files with a .sym extension. Symbol files can be used in one or more RSTs. See also: Understanding the symbol working area on page 360 Creating a symbol on page 361 Creating a multi-part symbol on page 361 Selecting a symbol from the symbol file on page 362 Setting symbol representation on page 362 Editing the symbol RST on page 362
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
The working area of the Symbol Editor equals four units square in the map. If you draw a symbol that occupies the whole working area, it will be two units high on the map. The bounding box is the blue box that appears inside the working area. This box is one unit square on the map. The measurement unit is defined in the RST Properties dialog box.
must divide your design into parts. Each part of the symbol contains the design elements of one color. You can use the Symbol Editor to determine the form and structure of the symbol, but the parameters of the symbol, such as color and scale, are determined in the Representation Editor. (See Editing the representation styles on page 354 ) You can rename and save a symbol file to a new location with the symbol file Save As dialog box. To open the symbol file Save As dialog box, right-click a symbol layer in the Maps tree and click Save As. (See About the symbol file Save As dialog box on page 362 ) 1. Create a design. (See Designing a symbol on page 360 ) 2. From the Symbol menu in the Symbol Editor, click Duplicate Symbol. 3. In the Attributes dialog box, type a number that will represent the symbol in the New box below Current SymbolId. 4. Type a label for the symbol in the New box below Description. 5. Click OK. 6. Keep the shapes that you want and use the Selection tools to delete all the other shapes that are destined for another color. 7. Change the style of the remaining shapes. (See Setting symbol representation on page 362 ) 8. Select the source symbol (See Selecting a symbol from the symbol file on page 362 ) and repeat for each part of the symbol. 9. From the File menu, click Save Symbol.
Creating a symbol
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a layer and click Representation Editor. 2. In the tree, right-click Symbol Files and click NewSymbol. 3. Double-click NewSymbol.sym. 4. In Symbol Editor, click Symbol and then click Create Symbol. 5. In the Attributes dialog box, type a number that will represent the symbol in the New box below Current SymbolId. 6. Type a label for the symbol in the New box below Description. 7. Click OK. 8. Draw a symbol. Use the tools explained in Adding points to an active layer on page 303 , Selecting a single shape on page 321 , and Editing vectors using the vector editing tools on page 323 . 9. From the File menu, click Save Symbol.
361
Geomatica Focus
Reports the name and location of a symbol file. Output Lets you choose a different symbol file, select a format for the output, and rename a symbol file. File: Lets you choose a symbol file from the current data.
Browse: Opens a File Selector dialog box, where you can select a different location for the output. Format: Lets you select a format for your output.
Geomatica Focus
Description: Lets you enter a new name for the output symbol file.
Geomatica Focus
Geomatica Focus
If you want to open the Properties dialog box for a selected item, double-click it in the Maps tree.
Chapter 9
Saving a project file
When you prepare data for a publication, it is recommended that you organize the information in a Focus project file. (See Working with project files on page 31 ) From the File menu, click Save Project.
You can create a Map by either clicking the New Map button on the Maps toolbar or by right-clicking the area under the Maps tree and clicking New Map. When you create a new Map, Focus automatically places an empty frame in the view pane that represents the paper on which the Map is printed. Maps have several properties that you can change with the Map Properties dialog box.
Renaming a map
1. In the Maps tree, right-click a map and click Rename. 2. Type a name for the map and press Enter.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
By default, new Maps have a paper size of 215.9 x 279.4 millimetres (8.5 x 11 inches). You can change the paper size to several standard sizes in the Map Properties dialog box. You can also set a custom paper size by dragging the Map handles in the view pane. 1. On the ViewMap toolbar, click the Map View button. 2. In the Maps tree, select a Map. 3. In the view pane, drag a resize handle.
If you want to use a custom paper size, choose Custom and enter the dimensions in the Width and Height spin boxes. Choose a unit of measurement from the list box. 5. Click OK.
Changing the paper size from the Map Properties dialog box
1. Double-click a Map. 2. In the Map Properties dialog box, click the Page Setup tab. 3. Enable an orientation option. 4. Select a standard paper size from the Page Size list box.
PCI Geomatics
366
Geomatica Focus
Scaling an area
In cartography, scale is the ratio of the distance between two points on a Map, and the actual distance between the same two points on the Earth#s surface. Scales can be represented as a Ratio or representative fraction (RF), such as 1:50,000 or 1/50,000, which means that one unit of measurement on the Map equals 50,000 of the same units on the Earth's surface. Graphic scale, usually a straight line on which distances (most often in kilometers or miles) have been marked off. Scale statement, such as 1 cm = 100 km. This scale statement means one centimetre on the Map represents 100 kilometers on the Earth's surface. New Areas are automatically scaled to the best fit for the dimensions of a Map. For example, Focus sets the area scale for a standard 8.5 x 11 page to a scale factor of 1:20000 by default. A new Area contains no raster or vector data. When you add new data, Focus automatically scales it to the area scale. When Focus is in Map mode, you can click on an area in the Maps tree. you can modify the area in the view pane by dragging one of the eight handles in the viewer. Note: With an area, the middle handles crop the image. The corner handles rescale it. Use the area handles in the view pane to rescale, crop, or enlarge an Area. 1. From the Maps tree, double-click an Area. 2. In the Area Properties dialog box, click the General tab. 3. Choose a scale from the Scale list box. If you want to create a different scale, choose Custom and enter a value in the Scale box. 4. Click OK. When you change the scale in the Area or Math Model Area Properties dialog boxes, it becomes the scale for all new layers added to that Area.
Rescaling an area
When you rescale data in the view pane, you extend or compress both the horizontal and vertical planes of the data. The aspect ratio stays the same. All features in a selected Area are enlarged or reduced by a factor corresponding to the ratio of rescaling. You can change the Scale Factor.
367
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
You can perform rescaling operations in both Map or Area view mode. 1. Ensure Focus is in Map view mode. 2. In in the Maps tree, select an Area. 3. Drag a corner of the Area to a new position. Note: Surround areas can be resized and rescaled. However, scale bars and neatline will not be affected by rescaling. The paper range and the scale factor are adjusted automatically when you rescale a selected area, but the georeferenced information remains the same. To view the new scale values, open the Area Properties dialog box. The paper range and the geographic range are adjusted automatically when you resize a selected area but the appearance of the existing layers does not change.
From the Maps tree, right-click a New Area and click Properties.
Geomatica Focus
2. Type a name for the Area in the Name box. If you want to have a border around the Area, enable the Show Outline check box. 3. Choose a scale to determine the ratio of the distance between two points from the Scale list box. If you want to use a custom scale, choose Custom and type the ratio value. (See also Scaling an area on page 367 ) 4. Click the Layout tab. 5. Enter a value used to rescale the representation displayed on the Map in the Scale Factor spin box. For example, if the symbol is 1 millimeter wide, a scale factor of 5 will display the symbol as 5 millimeters wide on the Map. 6. Enter a value representing the priority of the Area relative to other Areas in the Priority spin box. Areas with higher priority levels (larger numbers) mask overlapping Areas with lower priorities. (See Changing the layer priority on page 28 ) 7. In the Position area, enter a value representing the horizontal distance from the left edge of the Map in the Left spin box and choose a unit of measurement for the position and size. 8. Enter a value representing the vertical distance from the bottom edge of the Map in the Bottom box. 9. In the Size area, enter a value for the Area as it appears on the Map in the Width and Height spin boxes. If you want to automatically adjust the extents of the Area to accommodate the data, enable the
PCI Geomatics
Automatic Resize check box. 10. Click the Projection/Extents tab. 11. Enable one of the following options in the Bounds list box: Geocoded: displays the bounds in georeferenced units Geographic: displays Longitude/Latitude units 12. Enter the coordinates of the upper-left corner and lower-right corner of the Area in the appropriate boxes. 13. Enter a value for an angle of rotation in the Rotation box and choose a unit of measurement. If you want to limit processes to a subset of the data, click Define Clip Region. Enable the Enable check box to activate the clip region. 14. Click OK.
369
Geomatica Focus
because the math model is computed for a specific image. You can, however, add geocoded vector layers to the Math Model Area. Due to the special nature of a Math Model Area, surround elements, such as grids and north arrows are disabled, and the extents are determined by the file. From the Maps tree, right-click a Math Model Area and click Properties.
If you want to use a custom scale, choose Custom and type a value ratio. (See also Scaling an area on page 367 ) 4. Click the Layout tab. 5. Enter a value used to rescale the representation displayed on the Map in the Scale Factor spin box. For example, if the symbol is 1 millimeter wide, a scale factor of 5 will display the symbol as 5 millimeters wide on the Map. 6. Enter a value representing the priority of the Math Model Area relative to other Areas in the Priority spin box. Areas with higher priority levels (larger numbers) mask overlapping Areas with lower priorities. (See Changing the layer priority on page 28 ) 7. In the Position area, enter a value representing the horizontal distance from the left edge of the Map in the Left spin box and choose a unit of measurement for the position and size. 8. Enter a value representing the vertical distance from the bottom edge of the Map in the Bottom box. 9. Click the Projection/Extents tab. 10. Enable one of the following options in the Bounds list box: Geocoded: displays the bounds in georeferenced units Geographic: displays Longitude/Latitude units If you want to limit processes to a subset of the data, click Define Clip Region. Enable the Enable
370
Geomatica Focus
Surround elements are positioned relative to the neatline of the Area. If an Area does not contain a neatline, the positioning is based on the Area extents. Any surround element, except for the neatline, can appear more than once in an Area. For example, if you want to show two different scales in your map, such as one in kilometers and the other in miles, you can create two scale bars. You can modify the look of the surround elements and save those settings as a Quick Style, which can be applied to the same type of surround element in the project. For more information, see Selecting an existing quick style on page 397 .
Creating a surround
The surround elements are displayed in the Maps tree for the Area to which they are associated. If you place a surround element so that part of it lies outside the boundaries of the Map, it appears red in the Maps tree. For more information about surrounds, see Working with surrounds on page 371 . 1. From the View menu, click Map View Mode. 2. In the Maps tree, right-click an Area and click Surround. 3. In the Surround dialog box, click a box next to any element you want to use in the Map. A check mark next to an element indicates it is selected. 4. Choose a style for a selected element from the Select a QuickStyle list.
371
Geomatica Focus
If you want to create a new style, click Properties and follow Creating a custom quick style on page 397 . 5. Click OK.
About neatlines
A neatline is a line around an Area that separates data from the rest of the surround. It is a line marking the boundary around the Area beyond which no data is displayed. Unlike the other surround elements, the neatline can only be used once in each Area. The neatline also serves as the frame of reference for positioning other surround elements. To add a neatline to an Area, see Creating a surround on page 371 . To open the Neatline Properties dialog box, see Setting surround element properties on page 372 . The look of a neatline is determined by its:
General properties (see Setting the position of a neatline in relation to an area on page 372 ) Position (see Setting the updating behavior on page 395 ) Quick Style (see Selecting an existing quick style on page 397 )
Geomatica Focus
1. From the Maps tree, right-click a neatline and click Properties. 2. In the Neatline Properties dialog box, click the General tab. 3. Click the Style button and create a style for the line (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 4. In the Distance From Area area, enter a value representing the distance from the left neatline to the Area in the Left spin box and choose a unit of measurement from the list box. If you want to keep the distance between the neatline and the Area the same on all sides, enable the Keep equal check box and go to step 8. 5. Enter a value representing the distance from the right neatline to the Area in the Right spin box. 6. Enter a value representing the distance from the top neatline to the Area in the Top spin box. 7. Enter a value representing the distance from the bottom neatline to the Area in the Bottom spin box. 8. Click OK.
3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Paper: bases extents on paper measurements Georeferenced: bases extents on a geographic coordinate system Enter a value measured from the left edge of the Map to the lower left corner of the neatline in the X min spin box and choose a unit of measurement from the list box. Enter a value measured from the left edge of the Map to the lower right corner of the neatline in the X max spin box. Enter a value measured from the bottom edge of the Map to the lower left corner of the neatline in the Y min spin box. Enter a value measured from the bottom edge of the Map to the upper left corner of the neatline in the Y max spin box. Click OK.
About borders
A border is a decorative frame that surrounds a Map. You can build a border as simple or as complex as you want. To add a border to an area, see Creating a surround on page 371 . To open the Border Properties dialog box, see Setting surround element properties on page 372 . The look of a border is determined by its: General properties (see Changing border style and proximity to neatline on page 374 ) Position (see Setting the updating behavior on page 395 ) Quick Style (see Selecting an existing quick style on page 397 )
373
Geomatica Focus
A grid is an array of regularly-spaced parallel and perpendicular lines arranged over an Area. Each cell is used as a reference point for determining locations or coordinates. For example, they can be used in conjunction with street indexes. A grid
A graticule is drawn along latitude and longitude lines or a representation that relates points in an Area to locations on the ground. A georeferenced graticule
About grids
PCI Geomatics 374
Geomatica Focus
Georeferenced grids are linked to Area data. They can be used to locate and reference Map features with the Earth through georeferenced coordinate systems. Georeferenced grids are not always rectilinear. For example, latitude/longitude grids have curved grid lines, while UTM grids have both curved and straight lines. The position of a grid is based on the position of a neatline or on an Area if a neatline is not set. To add a grid to an area, see Creating a surround on page 371 . You cannot create a grid in a rotated Area (Raster Up). For more information, see About rotated rasters on page 34 . To open the Grid Properties dialog box, see Setting surround element properties on page 372 . The look of a grid (or graticule) is determined by its: General properties (see Changing grid pacing and proximity to neatline on page 375 ) Layout properties (see Changing the style and layout of the grid on page 376 ) Headings properties (see Changing the location and style of the grid headings on page 377 ) Label properties (see Changing the location and style of the grid labels on page 377 ) Position (see Setting the updating behavior on page 395 ) Quick Style (see Selecting an existing quick style on page 397 )
to neatline
The position of a grid is based on the position of the neatline or on an Area if the neatline is not set. 1. From the Maps tree, right-click a grid and click Properties. 2. In the Grid Properties dialog box, click the General tab. 3. In the Distance To Neatline area, enter a value representing the distance from the left border to the left neatline (or Area) in the Left spin box and choose a unit of measurement from the list box. If you want to keep the distance between the border and the neatline (or Area) the same on all sides, enable the Keep equal check box and go to step 7. 4. Enter a value representing the distance from the right border to the neatline (or Area) in the Right spin box. 5. Enter a value representing the distance from the top border to the neatline (or Area) in the Top spin box. 6. Enter a value representing the distance from the bottom border to the neatline (or Area) in the Bottom spin box. 7. Enable one of the following options: Fixed Interval: sets the grid spacing according to a fixed distance between the lines. Follow step 8 to step 10. Fixed count: sets grid line spacing according to a fixed number of lines. Follow step 11 and step 12. 8. In the Fixed Interval area, enable one of the
375
Geomatica Focus
following options: Paper: bases a grid on paper measurements Georeferenced: bases a grid on an Area projection Latitude/Longitude: bases a grid on latitude and longitude coordinates 9. Enter a value representing the horizontal width of the column in the Column Width spin box and choose a unit of measurement from the list box. 10. Enter a value representing the vertical width of the row in the Row Height spin box. If you want to keep the column width and row height the same size, enable the Keep equal check box.
See also Changing the style and layout of the grid on page 376 Changing the location and style of the grid headings on page 377 Changing the location and style of the grid labels on page 377 Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
11. In the Fixed Interval area, enter a value representing the number of columns that you want to cover the Area in the Column spin box. 12. Enter a value representing the number of rows that you want to cover the Area in the Row spin box. If you want to keep the number of columns and rows the same, enable the Keep equal check box. 13. Click OK.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
lines or crosses (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 6. Click OK. See also Changing grid pacing and proximity to neatline on page 375 Changing the location and style of the grid headings on page 377 Changing the location and style of the grid labels on page 377 Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
you want between the grid border and the headings in the Distance from grid spin box. 5. In the Type area, enable one of the following options: Geo style: aligns the headings with the grid lines.Choose a format representing how you want the headings to appear in the Format list box. Paper style: center the headings between the grid lines. Choose an alphabetic or numeric format from the Rows and Columns list boxes. By default, headings are ordered from the top down and from left to right. If you want to reverse the order, enable the Reverse check box for the row or column, or both. 6. Click OK. See also Changing grid pacing and proximity to neatline on page 375 Changing the style and layout of the grid on page 376 Changing the location and style of the grid labels on page 377 Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Geomatica Focus
grid labels
Labels are the numbers positioned on the grid lines that show the Northings and Eastings for a grid. You can change the look of the numbers and adjust the position of Northings and Eastings relative to the grid lines. 1. In the Grid Properties dialog box, click the Label tab. 2. In the Easting Placement area, enable any of the check boxes to indicate where you want the label to be positioned in reference to the lines on the X-axis. UR represents upper right, UL represents upper left, LR represents lower right, and LL represents lower left. 3. Enter a value representing the space between the label and the Y-axis as the label moves along the X-axis in the Horizontal Offset spin box.
5. In the Northing Placement area, enable any of the check boxes to indicate where you want the label to be positioned in reference to the lines on the Y-axis. UR represents upper right, UL represents upper left, LR represents lower right, and LL represents lower left. 6. Enter a value representing the space between the label and the Y-axis as the label moves along the X-axis in the Horizontal Offset spin box.
If you want to have both the horizontal offset and vertical offset the same distance from the lines, enable the Keep equal check box and skip step 7. 7. Enter a value representing the space between the label and the X-axis as the label moves along the Y-axis in the Vertical Offset spin box.
If you want to have both the horizontal offset and vertical offset the same distance from the lines, enable the Keep equal check box and skip step 4. 4. Enter a value representing the space between the label and the X-axis as the label moves along the Y-axis in the Vertical Offset spin box.
8. In the Appearance area, click the Style button and create a left-aligned style for the text (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 9. Choose a format that represents how you want the labels to appear from the Format list box. 10. Click OK. See also Changing grid pacing and proximity to neatline on page
Geomatica Focus
375 Changing the style and layout of the grid on page 376 Changing the location and style of the grid headings on page 377 Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
About legends
A legend is a list of colors, symbols, and patterns displayed in an Area with a description or label explaining what each means. Each color, symbol, and pattern is represented in the legend by a small sample or example of itself. The legend is anchored to the neatline or to an Area if a neatline is not set and is positioned in reference to that anchor. Example of a legend
To add a legend to an Area, see Creating a surround on page 371 . To open the Legend Properties dialog box, see Setting surround element properties on page 372 . The look of a legend is determined by its:
PCI Geomatics 379
Geomatica Focus
General properties (see Setting the number of columns and designing a border for a legend on page 380 ) Title properties (see Adding a title to the legend on page 380 ) Filter properties (see Adding styles to a legend on page 381 ) Structure properties (see Organizing sections in a legend on page 382 and reating a design for C sections in a legend on page 383 ) Columns properties (see Organizing legend columns on page 384 ) Position (see Setting the updating behavior on page 395 ) Quick Style (see Selecting an existing quick style on page 397 )
Bottom: aligns the columns along their bottom edges 5. In the Borders area, enable any of the following check boxes: Show legend border: creates a border around the legend. Click the Style button and create a style (See Selecting a style on page 354 ). Show sample border: draws an outline around each sample in the legend. Click the Style button and create a style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 6. Click OK. See also Adding a title to the legend on page 380
Adding styles to a legend on page 381 Organizing sections in a legend on page 382 Creating a design for sections in a legend on page 383 Organizing legend columns on page 384 Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
380
Geomatica Focus
information included in the legend. Subtitles inside a legend are controlled on the Structure tab (See Organizing sections in a legend on page 382 ). 1. In the Legend Properties dialog box, click the Title tab. 2. Enable the Show title check box. 3. Type the legend title in the Title box. 4. Click the Style button and create a style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 5. Enable one of the following Title placement options: Top: places the title at the top of the legend Bottom: places the title at the bottom of the legend 6. Enter a value representing the distance between the title and the legend in the Spacing from columns spin box and choose a unit of measurement from the list box. 7. Enable one of the following Alignment options: Left: aligns the title along the left edge of the legend Center: centers the title over or under the legend Right: aligns the title along the right edge of the legend 8. Click OK. See also Setting the number of columns and designing a border for a legend on page 380 Adding styles to a legend on page 381
PCI Geomatics
Organizing sections in a legend on page 382 Creating a design for sections in a legend on page 383 Organizing legend columns on page 384 Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
381
Geomatica Focus
1. In the Legend Properties dialog box, click the Filter tab. 2. Click a layer in the Generate column. A check mark indicates a layer is included in the legend. 3. Click a layer in the All Repcode column that you want in the legend. A check mark indicates a layer is included in the legend. If you want to include styles associated to the text attributes in the legend, enable the Add text to RST hierarchy check box. 4. Click OK. See also Setting the number of columns and designing a border for a legend on page 380 Adding a title to the legend on page 380 Organizing sections in a legend on page 382 Creating a design for sections in a legend on page 383 Organizing legend columns on page 384 Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Geomatica Focus
To add sections
1. In the Legend Properties dialog box, click the Structure tab. 2. In the Legend hierarchy list, select the section under which you want to add a subsection. 3. Click the Add button.
Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
To remove sections
1. In the Legend Properties dialog box, click the Structure tab. 2. In the Legend hierarchy list, select a section. 3. Click the Remove button.
383
Geomatica Focus
information, see Customizing a section layout on page 384 . If you want to change the selected section or subsection title, click it and type a new title. 9. Click OK. See also Setting the number of columns and designing a border for a legend on page 380 Adding a title to the legend on page 380 Adding styles to a legend on page 381 Organizing sections in a legend on page 382 Organizing legend columns on page 384 Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
options: Left: aligns the description or label for the sample to the left Right: aligns the description or label to the right 3. Enter a value that represents the indent between the left border and the left side of the legend in the Left spin box and choose a unit of measurement from the list box. 4. Enter a value that represents the indent between the right border and the right side of the legend in the Right spin box. If you want to have both the left and right sides the same distance from the border, enable the Keep equal check box. 5. Enter a value that represents the space between each item in the list in the Inter-item spacing spin box. 6. In the Sample size area, enter a value representing the width and height of the box in the Width and Height spin boxes. 7. In the Section title area, enable an Alignment option. 8. Enter a value that represents the spacing above and below the title in the Above and Below spin boxes. 9. Enable the Delimiters check box. 10. Enter a value for the Minimum length, Lead, and Tail spin boxes for the delimiters. 11. Click OK.
384
Geomatica Focus
You can specify the list item that appears at the top of each column, customize the width and margins of the individual columns, and define a style for a border. 1. In the Legend Properties dialog box, click the Columns tab. 2. Choose the number for the column you want to edit in the Edit column list box. 3. Choose the legend item that you want listed as the first item in the selected column in the Select start item for this column list box. If you want to reinstate the default, click Reset start items. 4. Enter a value that represents the width of the selected column in the Width spin box and choose a unit of measurement from the list box. 5. If you want all columns to be of equal width, enable the Keep all columns same width check box. 6. Enter a value that represents the distance between the left border and the left side of the legend items in the Left spin box. 7. Enter a value that represents the distance between the right border and the right side of the legend items in the Right spin box. If you want to keep the margin sizes equal, enable the Keep equal check box. 8. Enable the Show column border check box. 9. Click the Style button and create a style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 10. Click OK. See also
PCI Geomatics
Setting the number of columns and designing a border for a legend on page 380 Adding a title to the legend on page 380 Adding styles to a legend on page 381 Organizing sections in a legend on page 382 Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
385
Geomatica Focus
5. Enter a value that represents the vertical size of the picture in the Height spin box. 6. Click OK. See also Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
You can add more than one north arrow to an Area and set each arrow property separately. Several default symbols are available; you can also use the Symbol Editor (see Designing a symbol on page 360 ) to design your own. To add a north arrow to an Area, see Creating a surround on page 371 . To open the North Arrow Properties dialog box, see Setting surround element properties on page 372 . To define a North Arrow, see: True North (see Setting the angle and style for a true North arrow on page 386 ) Magnetic North (see Setting the angle and style for the magnetic north arrow on page 387 ) Grid North (see Setting the angle and style for the grid north arrow on page 388 ) Position (see Setting the updating behavior on page 395 ) Quick Style (see Selecting an existing quick style on page 397 )
Geomatica Focus
True North tab and enable the Show true north arrow check box. 3. Enter a value that represents the counterclockwise rotation that you want to apply so that the arrow points north in the Angle spin box and choose a unit of angular measurement from the list box. 4. Click the Style button and create an arrow style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 5. Enable the Show arrow label check box and choose a label from the list box. If you want to customize the position of the label, click Advanced. 6. Click the Style button and create a font style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 7. Click OK. See also Setting the angle and style for the magnetic north arrow on page 387 Setting the angle and style for the grid north arrow on page 388 Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
1. In the North Arrow Properties dialog box, click the True North tab and click Advanced. 2. In the North arrow heading - Advanced dialog box, enter a value that represents the space between the arrow and the label in the Distance from arrow spin box and choose a unit of measurement from the list box. 3. Enable one of the following Angle options: Custom: adjusts the angle of the label. Enter a value that represents the rotation that you want in the spin box and choose a unit of measurement from the list box. Perpendicular: changes the angle of the label so it is vertical to the baseline of the map Parallel: changes the angle of the label so it coincides with the baseline of the map 4. Enable one of the following Alignment options: Left: places the label to the left of the arrow Center: centers the label over the arrow Right: places the label to the right of the arrow 5. Click OK.
Setting the angle and style for the magnetic north arrow
1. In the North Arrow Properties dialog box, click the Magnetic North tab and enable the Show magnetic north arrow check box. 2. Enter a value that represents the counterclockwise rotation that you want to apply so that the arrow points north in the Angle box and choose a unit of angular measurement from the list box. 3. Click the Style button and create an arrow style
Geomatica Focus
(see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 4. Enable the Show arrow label check box and choose a label from the list box. If you want to customize the position of the label, click Advanced. 5. Click the Style button and create a font style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 6. Click OK. See also
3. Click the Style button and create an arrow style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 4. Enable the Show arrow label check box and choose a label from the list box. If you want to customize the position of the label, click Advanced. 5. Click the Style button and create a font style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 6. Click OK. See also
Setting the angle and style for a true North arrow on page 386 Setting the angle and style for the grid north arrow on page 388 Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Setting the angle and style for a true North arrow on page 386 Setting the angle and style for the magnetic north arrow on page 387 Setting the updating behavior on page 395
Selecting an existing quick style on page 397 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Setting the angle and style for the grid north arrow
1. In the North Arrow Properties dialog box, click the Grid North tab and enable the Show grid north arrow check box. 2. Enter a value that represents the counterclockwise rotation that you want to apply so that the arrow points north in the Angle box and choose a unit of angular measurement from the list box.
PCI Geomatics
388
Geomatica Focus
Determining the style and position of the title for the scale bar
Bar 1. From the Maps tree, right-click a scale bar and click Properties. 2. In the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the General tab and enable the Show title check box. 3. Type a title for the scale bar in the Show title box. By default, the title is the current scale in the Area. 4. Click the Style button and create a font style of the scale bar title (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 5. Enable one of the following options for the title placement: Above: displays the title on top of the scale bar Below: displays the title under the scale bar 6. Enable a title Alignment option. 7. Enter a value that represents the space between the title and the scale bar in the Distance from scale bar box, and choose a unit of measurement from the list box. 8. Click OK. See also Selecting a scale bar type on page 390 Setting the divisions for the scale bar on page 390 Setting subdivisions for a scale bar on page 392
If you want to show two different scales, such as kilometers and miles, you must create two separate scale bars. If you want both scale bars lined up at zero, you must align them manually. To add a scale bar to an Area, see Creating a surround on page 371 . To open the Scale Bar Properties panel, see Setting surround element properties on page 372 . The look of a scale bar is determined by its: General properties (see Determining the style and position of the title for the scale bar on page 389 ) Scale bar type (see Selecting a scale bar type on page 390 ) Division (see Setting the divisions for the scale bar on page 390 ) Subdivision (see Setting subdivisions for a scale bar on page 392 ) Style (see Designing a Line and Tick scale bar on page 393 ) Position (see Setting the updating behavior on page 395 ) Quick Style (see Selecting an existing quick style on page 397 )
PCI Geomatics
389
Geomatica Focus
Designing a Line and Tick scale bar on page 393 Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
1. From the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the Division tab and enable the Automatic divisions check box. If you want to manually set the number of divisions, disable the Automatic divisions check box, enter the number of divisions that you want in the Number of divisions spin box, enter a value that represents the real distances on the ground that the division covers in the Division size spin box, and
390
Geomatica Focus
choose a unit of measurement. If you want to display a unit of measurement on the scale bar and set which tick represents zero, click Advanced. 2. Enable the Show headings check box. 3. Click the Style button and create a heading font style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 4. Enable one of the following Placement options: Top: places the headings on top of the divisions Bottom: places the headings under the divisions For the Line and Tick scale bar type, ticks are placed on the same side as the headings. 5. Enter a value that represents the space between the headings and scale bar in the Distance from scale bar spin box and choose a unit of measurement from the list box. 6. Click OK. See also Determining the style and position of the title for the scale bar on page 389 Selecting a scale bar type on page 390 Setting subdivisions for a scale bar on page 392 Designing a Line and Tick scale bar on page 393 Setting the updating behavior on page 395
PCI Geomatics
Labeling a scale bar with a unit of measurement and setting a zero tick
You can specify where a unit of measurement is displayed on a scale bar and which tick represents zero.
1. From the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the Division tab, disable the Automatic divisions check box, and click Advanced. 2. In the Scalebar Divisions - Advanced dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes: Place units label at the start of scale bar: displays a unit of measurement to the left of the scale bar. Choose a unit of measurement from the Label list box. Place units label at the end of scale bar: displays a unit of measurement to the right of the scale bar. Choose a unit of measurement from the Label list box. 3. Click the Style button and create a label font style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 4. Enter a number of the tick on your scale bar where
391
Geomatica Focus
you want the zero mark to appear in the Zero is at tick spin box. 5. Click OK.
the headings and scale bar in the Distance from scale bar spin box and choose a unit of measurement from the list box. 7. Click OK. See also Determining the style and position of the title for the scale bar on page 389 Selecting a scale bar type on page 390 Setting the divisions for the scale bar on page 390 Designing a Line and Tick scale bar on page 393 Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
1. From the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the Subdivisions tab and enable the Show subdivisions check box. 2. Enter the number of subdivisions you want in the scale bar in the Number of subdivisions spin box. If you want to specify how many and which divisions to subdivide, click Advanced. 3. Enable the Show headings check box. 4. Click the Style button and create a font heading style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 5. Enable a heading Placement option. 6. Enter a value that represents the space between
PCI Geomatics
392
Geomatica Focus
You can also choose the colors for a scale bar pattern:
1. From the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the Subdivision tab and click Advanced. 2. In Scalebar Subdivisions Advanced dialog box, enter the number of divisions you want to subdivide in the Divisions to subdivide spin box. 3. Enter the number of the division where you want to begin showing the subdivisions in the Starting at division spin box. 4. Click OK.
1. In the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the Scale Bar Type tab and enable the Tick and Line option. 2. Click the Style tab. 3. In the Scalebar area, click the Style button and create a style for the bar (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). If you want the ticks to overlap the scale bar, enable the Center ticks vertically on scale bar check box. 4. In the Division Ticks area, click the Style button and create a division ticks style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 5. Enter a value that represents the length of a division tick in the Tick height spin box. 6. In the Subdivision Ticks area, click the Style button and create a subdivision ticks style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 7. Enter a value that represents the length of the subdivision tick in the Tick height spin box. 8. Click OK.
Geomatica Focus
scale bar
1. In the Scale bar Properties dialog box, click the Scale Bar Type tab, enable the Single bar, Double bar, or Triple bar option, and click the Style tab. 2. In the Colors area, click any section box and choose a color from the color palette. 3. Enter a value that represents the total height of all sections in the scale bar in the Scale bar height spin box and choose a unit of measurement from the list box. For a triple-bar style, you can set the height of the middle row differently than the top and bottom rows by entering a value representing the height of the middle row of the scale bar in the Middle section height spin box. 4. Enable the Show outline check box and click the Style button to create an outline style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 5. Click OK. See also Determining the style and position of the title for the scale bar on page 389 Selecting a scale bar type on page 390 Setting the divisions for the scale bar on page 390 Setting subdivisions for a scale bar on page 392
Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
Geomatica Focus
6. Enable one of the following Alignment options: Left: aligns the title and subtitle to the left Center: centers the title and subtitle Right: aligns the title and subtitle to the right 7. Click OK. See also Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
If you want to change the font of the text, click the Style button and create a style (see Selecting a style on page 354 ). 3. Enter a value that represents the angle of rotation you want to apply to the text in the Angle spin box and choose a unit of angular measurement from the list box. If you want to import text from a text file, click Import Text, locate and select a file in the File Selector dialog box, and click Save. 4. Click OK. See also
Setting the updating behavior on page 395 Selecting an existing quick style on page 397
395
Geomatica Focus
For Legend, Picture, North Arrow, Scale bar, Title, and Paragraph: Elements are anchored to a neatline and are positioned in reference to that anchor. If no neatline is used, the surround element positions are calculated relative to the extents of the Area. The location of a surround element is determined by the Offset, which is the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) coordinates measured from the anchor. You can see the neatline or the Area represented by a rectangle with white handles. The surround element is represented by a rectangle with gray handles. You can anchor any one of the surround element handles to any one of the neatline or Area handles. To change the location of a surround element, you can drag the surround element by its handle, or you can enter new values. If you want to modify the neatline or Area after you have set the properties for the surround elements, you can set how they behave: Reposition: the surround element automatically adjust its position in correlation with a neatline (or Area), but retains its original settings. Regenerate: the surround element is recalculated and positioned based on new settings for a neatline (or Area). This behavior is useful for the neatline, border, grid, and scale bar elements. Do nothing: the surround element does not adjust to the new settings and remains as originally positioned. 1. From the Maps tree, right-click a surround element and click Properties. 2. In the surround element Properties dialog box, click the Position tab. 3. In the Updating area, choose how you want the
PCI Geomatics
surround element to react when a neatline (or Area) changes position from the When neatline/area moves list box. 4. Choose how you want the surround element to react when the scale of a neatline (or Area) changes from the When area/neatline is rescaled list box. 5. In the When area/neatline is resized list box, choose how you want the surround element to react when a neatline (or Area) is enlarged or reduced in size. 6. Click Apply.
Setting the offset (not available for neatline, border, and grid)
1. In the Offset area, enter a value for the horizontal position in the X spin box and a value for the vertical position in the Y spin box. You can also click a gray handle and drag the surround element into position. 2. In the preview area, click a gray handle. 3. Click a white handle to determine the anchor point. By default, the origin of a starting point of a grid is the lower-left corner of a neatline.
Geomatica Focus
Y spin box.
2. In the surround element Properties dialog box, click the Quick Style tab. 3. Select a custom Quick Style and click the Remove QS button.
Geomatica Focus
buildings, or parks, or a combination of these. An index lists the Map locations and features. The names of the items are usually listed in alphabetical order. You can use combinations of letters and numbers that correspond to grid locations on the Map. 1. Index Information: All content used in the index matching specified conditions. You can compose a list of these items. 2. Information: A reference that identifies a location for each item in the index, information matches specified conditions. You can specify grid information.
and building names. You can also edit redundant words, such as #street# from appearing in the index. Index List: Generates an alphabetical listing of index entries with grid locations. You can add, delete, and modify list entries. Verification Mode, when enabled, is used to interactively locate a list entry within the current Map. An index is generated in its own area on a Map, which is designated as Indexation. There is only one layer in an index area. A grid created by the index is also generated in its own area on the Map and is designated as Index. There is only one layer in a grid area.
Indexation properties
You can set the properties for an index, including filters and lists. Filtering: Specifies the type of information you want to include in an index. For example, you may want to include only road
PCI Geomatics 398
Geomatica Focus
Changing headings, entries, and delimiters in the RepCodes area of the General page. 1. On the toolbar, click Map View Mode. Note: The image must be in Map View Mode for the Indexation dialog box to be accessible. 2. From the Maps tree, right-click an Area and click Indexation. 3. In the Indexation dialog box, click the General tab. 4. Enter a value that represents the number of index columns in the Number of columns spin box. 5. Enter a value that represents the width of the index columns in the Column width spin box. 6. Enter a value that represents the spacing between columns in the Inter-column spin box and choose a unit of measurement from the list box. 7. Enter a value that represents the spacing between items in the index in the Inter item spin box. 8. In the Repcode area, enter a code in any of the following boxes: Index Item Headings Delimiter Index Border You can also click Browse for the corresponding box and select a RepCode. If you want to include a border, enable the Show index border check box. 9. Click OK.
Change these parts of an index with the Indexation properties dialog box
Geomatica Focus
1. From the Indexation dialog box, click the Title tab. 2. In the Parameter File area, click Load. 3. In the File Selector dialog box, locate and select a file, and click Open. When accessing an existing parameter file, it must be used with the same Area for which it was originally created. If you select another Area, the settings are reset to the default.
You can set the spacing of columns and rows; the spacings correspond to the height of the rows and to the width of the columns. 1. In the Indexation dialog box, click the Grid tab. 2. In the Settings section, do one of the following: a. Accept the default values in the Spacing/Rows and the Spacing/Columns boxes. b. Type a value in one or both of the following boxes: Spacing/Rows Spacing/Columns The row and the column counts are automatically determined by the spacing. 3. Click one of the following: Lock Spacing to lock the spacing values. Lock Count to lock the count values. No Lock.
Setting up an index
The Indexation process requires a grid to properly reference the location of text. The grid defines the location of the text that is to be extracted. 1. In the Indexation dialog box, click the Grid tab. 2. In the Extents section, do one of the following: a. Accept the default values in the X min, X max, Y min, and Y max boxes. b. Type a value in one or more of the following boxes: X min X max Y min Y max 3. Click the Display Grid check box.
Geomatica Focus
The row and the column spacings are automatically determined by the count. 3. Click one of the following: Lock Spacing to lock the spacing values. Lock Count to lock the count values. No Lock.
Filtering an index
You can specify the type of information you want to include in an index. For example, you may only want road and building names to appear in the index. You can also exclude redundant words from the index. 1. From the Indexation dialog box, click the Filtering tab. 2. Select any of the following from the left-hand list: RST Group RepCode 3. Click the right-arrow button.
Geomatica Focus
click the word and click the Remove button. 5. Click OK.
To... Delete index headings Rename an item in the list Re-generate an index list
Do the following: Click Delete Headings. Click in a row, type a new name, and press Enter. Click OK.
Verification Mode You can verify an index list by selecting an entry. Focus displays the precise location on the Map where the text is located. If a location is not within the view pane, the Indexation module shifts to where the text is located. The layer where text is located must be active for the Verification tool to work properly.
Do the following: Click Sort. Select a row and click Delete Row. Click Add Headings. Attributes
402
Geomatica Focus
You can add attribute information to the entries in an index. For example, you can define a RepCode for cities with a population attribute, and include the population values in the index, as follows: Ottawa (300,000)..................................D4 1. In the Indexation dialog box, click the Index List tab. 2. Click Advanced. 3. In the Indexation Advanced dialog box, enable the Show Attributes check box. 4. Select an attribute from the Select attribute to use list. 5. Select one of the following formats from the Attribute display format list: Keep format : displays a value as 5, 12 Integer : displays this value as 5 if a value of 5, 12 is displayed in the index 6. Click OK. 7. Click in the Attributes column for the cell where you want to add the attribute information and type the attribute information in parentheses. 8. Press Enter. 9. Click OK. Prefixes List The prefix list words are entered in an index in reverse order. For example, if the word "Lake" appears in the Swap prefixes list, then "Lake Rice" appears in the index as "Rice, Lake." Index entries are sorted according to the most meaningful names.
PCI Geomatics
Geomatica Focus
If you want to copy the word exclusion list to the prefixes list, click the Filtering tab and click Copy exclusion list. 4. Click OK.
Printing a map
404
Geomatica Focus
You can print a Map. The Print Setup dialog box specifies the options for printing your publication. Vector layers placed below a raster transparency in the Maps tree appear in the view pane but are not supported for printing. To print all layers as they appear in the view pane, you can export the map to a file with Export Map and print that file separately. For more information about exporting a map, see Opening the Export Map dialog box on page 407 . From the File menu, click Print Map.
Geomatica Focus
commercial printing. Most color separation processes are based on the colors cyan, magenta, yellow, and black (CMYK). You can define spot (individual) colors in the Change Color dialog box color palette. In color separations, one plate or film is produced for each color. The information for each plate is stored in a .ps file. From the Print Setup dialog box, click Color Separation. Even if spot colors are defined in a color palette, only the colors actually applied to features in the RST are listed in the color list box. Separate Color: Enables all other items in the dialog box. Negative Image Inverts the colors in an image. By default, the color separations process produces a normal image. Negative printing is useful if you want to produce films for the Map. Mirror: Specifies that the film emulsion faces down. Emulsion is the coating of light-sensitive material on a piece of film. Convert to CMYK: Separates all spot colors of a color palette into CMYK
PCI Geomatics
colors. Separating colors in only four plates avoids producing an unnecessary number of plates. Reg Marks and/or Crop Marks: Prints registration marks or crop marks on plates, or both. Registration marks serve as guides to perfectly align different color separation plates. Crop marks are useful when trimming the page to the proper size. Both marks are displayed slightly outside the graphics page extent. Space for these marks is added to the extents of the map, even if they are disabled. Label Marks: Prints a label containing the names of the colors used in the separation process. This label is displayed outside the Crop Marks. Color column: All spot colors listed in the color list box are removed from the list, since they are all converted to CMYK colors. Frequency: For each color in the list box, define the Frequency of the grid. Process color separations are printed using grids of black dots for each color. The frequency in lines per inch defines how close the dots appear. The higher the frequency, the closer the dots and the darker the color.
406
Geomatica Focus
Angle: Defines the orientation of the grid screen or the dots. For each color in the list box, define the angle of the grid in degrees. Overprint: Enables the Overprint color option for each color in the list box. Overprinting is used when two overlapping objects of different color are printed on two different plates. For example, when creating color separations for a magenta-colored circle on a cyan background, the cyan plate would have a white circle knocked out where the magenta circle prints. The cyan and magenta do not mix; however, you can set the magenta to print over the cyan. This results in the circle not being knocked out of the cyan. The two colors overprint in that area, resulting in a purple circle on a cyan background. When a color is selected to overprint, an X appears in the Overprint column of the color list box beside the color and the color is printed on a corresponding plate. No holes corresponding to an overlapping color will be knocked out. If you set color frequency, angle, and overprint options individually, you must select all the colors you want to process. However, if you click on the Convert to CMYK option, all four basic colors are automatically selected. You can interrupt a print job at any time by clicking
PCI Geomatics
Cancel.
Note: For UNIX systems, select the PostScript Level 2 driver. Color separations on UNIX are available for this driver only. The color separations information is printed to a single PostScript (.ps) file, which can be printed by most commercial shops.
Geomatica Focus
location. 2. Choose a file format from the Save as type list box. 3. In the Options area, set the parameters, depending on the following format types: The .ai file format is the native format for Adobe Illustrator and is used primarily for vectors.
The .jpg format is best used for continuous tone images, such as photographs. It uses lossy compression, which means that some data is discarded to reduce the file size. Once a file is compressed with lossy compression, the original data cannot be recovered. The Quality measure is the used to control the balance between the quality of the image and the reduction in the file size. The higher the Quality value, the less data is discarded. You must decide a balance between file size and image quality, which usually falls between 0 and 80. Values over 80 usually produce an increased file size with little visible improvement in image quality. 1. In the Export Map or Export Chart dialog box, choose JPEG (.jpg) from the Save as type list box. 2. Enter a value that represents the resolution produced by the display or printer in the DPI spin box. The closer the match between the resolution of the file and the display or printer, the better the quality of the results. 3. Enter a value that represents the image quality in the Quality box. The lower the number, the lower the quality of the image (more data discarded) and the smaller the file
408
EMF:
4. Click OK.
Geomatica Focus
box. The closer the match between the resolution of the file and the display or printer, the better the quality of the results. 3. Enable one of the following options: Lossless: uses lossless compression Lossy: uses lossy compression. Enter a value that represents the image quality in the Quality box. 4. Click OK.
Geomatica Focus
options. PackBits is a lossless compression method. It reduces a file size by reducing data redundancies. With lossless compression, the original data is restored when a file is decompressed. JPEG is a lossy compression method. It reduces the file size by discarding some data. Once a file is compressed using lossy compression, the original data cannot be recovered. In any lossy compression method, you trade the quality of the image for a reduction in the file size. More compression means a lower quality image. You must decide a balance between file size and image quality. 1. In the Export Map or Export Chart dialog box, choose TIFF (*.tif) from the Save as type list box. 2. Enter a value that represents the resolution produced by the display or printer in the DPI spin box. The closer the match between the resolution of the file and the display or printer, the better the quality of the results. 3. Choose one of the following options from the Compression list box: PACKBITS : uses lossless compression JPEG : uses lossy compression. Enter a value that represents the image quality in the Quality box. 4. Click OK. The .bmp file format is the native bitmap file format for the Microsoft Windows operating system. 1. In the Export Map or Export Chart dialog box, choose BMP (*.bmp) from the Save as type list box. 2. Enter a value that represents the resolution produced by the display or printer in the DPI spin box. The closer the match between the resolution of the file and the display or printer, the better the quality of the results. 3. Click OK.
Geomatica Focus
3. Choose a printer type from the HP RTL Options list box. 4. Choose a color or black-and-white option from the Color list box. 5. Choose a dithering method from the Dither list box. Dithering is a process that places pixels of different colours together to create the illusion of a color that is not available in the palette. If you want to save paper when using roll-fed printers, enable the Print long edge first check box. This option positions the file to make the optimum use of the paper and generate the least amount of waste. 6. Click OK.
Editor. 2. Under the Style column, click the white style. 3. Click the Edit Style tab. 4. In the Values column beside Opacity, enter the value 0. 5. Click OK.